Tracker Mini Manual

The Tracker Mini Notebook : Reference & Guide

Polyend

Tracker Mini

Manual

An Ofcial Reference for The Polyend Tracker Mini

Polyend Tracker Mini Mini Manual

III

Polyend Tracker Mini Mini Manual

Overview 5

Architecture 23

Projects 33

Pattern Format 51

Sequencing Steps 69

Instruments 103

FX Steps 137

Audio 179

Song Mode 217

Master Effects 231

MIDI 245

Performance Mode 265

System 279

Index 293

Contents

Polyend Tracker Mini is a handheld version of

Polyend’s desktop Tracker. This is a modern

hardware implementation of a classic software

music application which emerged in the late

80’s as music making tools mainly on gaming

machines and later on personal computers. A

Tracker is a utility that assembles a linear

series of notes that typically triggers samples

and associated parameters. Unlike standard

digital audio workstations (DAW’s), Trackers

generally run top to bottom when playing

tracks. Trackers usually had a niche community

of followers and never reached the same height

of popularity as other DAW’s. Polyend Tracker

Mini reignites the interest and presents the

composition features of a Tracker into a

portable and immediate format. Don't be fooled

by this quirky programming style of music

making which may appear unusual, but does

provide a very powerful and creative approach

to production. Polyend Tracker Mini presents

this vintage application in a modern and stylish

handheld box with 8 sequenced tracks and a

variety of effects, MIDI and Audio In / Out and

multiple workow environments. With a small

form factor and rechargeable battery, Tracker

Mini is an ideal portable ‘all in one’ workstation.

The feature set is wide with some interestingly

creative functions. Tracker Mini isn't a particularly

difcult instrument to use but the unusual and

less familiar core concept and workow may

mean that getting started is a little confusing and

the learning curve is drawn out. This may be a

different twist on music production but hey, that’s

what makes it fun. This guide aims to help with

the speed up of learning and also to get the very

best from the device. As always the Synthdawg

notebook style allows for your notes to be added

and to make the guidebook personal for you. The

Tracker Mini journey is unusual, yet fun and at

the same time a powerful music making unit

giving some rewarding results. Enjoy.

Overview

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Overview

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Overview

On / Off ButtonUSB Power Charge Input

USB-C to USB-A Cable Supplied

Line In Line Out MIDI In MIDI Out

Stereo audio output also

serves as headphone out.

Micro SD Card Slot.

Pins facing to the front panel.

16GB Micro SD Card & Adapter Supplied

3.5mm Male Stereo TRS Jack

to 2 x 6.3mm TR Mono Female.

Adapter supplied.

3.5mm Jack to 5 Pin MIDI.

Adapter (Type B) supplied

1.1 How to Use This Notebook

Sections are laid out to cover the full workow with walkthroughs, step by

step guides and tips. Some pages carry a wide margin and some are

intentionally blank enabling you to make your own notes.

Control conventions.

(Enter)

D-Pad for navigation options are shown with rounded parentheses. These

represent the 5 physical direction buttons. These include, (Up), (Down),

(Right), (Left) as well as the central (Enter) button.

[+] / [-]

The Master [+] & [-] buttons navigate and for some parameters adjust it’s

values. The outer buttons make changes in larger increments. Also used to

adjust the master volume level.

[Function]

Square parentheses contain general functions that are selectable by one of

the other 15 physically dedicated buttons - either as a primary or secondary

function. Examples are [Rec], [Play], [Shift]. .

When using the [Menu] button, the pop-up menu will open while the button

is held. Highlight the specic menu option by navigating with the D-Pad

Navigation buttons while holding [Menu]. Options with multiple pages are

shown by the dots underneath the option text. The currently highlighted

option is selected when the [Menu] button is released.

[Function] + [Option]

Functions which require multiple button selections simultaneously are

shown with a + symbol between each required button. An example is the

[Shift] + [Copy] command.

[Dynamic Screen Key]

The 8 dynamic screen buttons located directly under the display will be

written using italic text. The actual function that each button serves will

change depending on the current context. The function it serves will be

labelled on the screen label above each button on the device. Currently

unavailable options will show on the screen as dimmed text. Dynamic

screen key examples include [Create Project], [Up] or [Down] options.

1.2 Hardware Overview

Your Notes Can be written here Here

Did you know?

Music Trackers emerged

in the late 1980’s on

gaming computers?

130 mm

170 mm

20 mm

NOTES

Master Volume

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

LCD Display

5 Inch, LCD TFT 800 x 480 Display.

Screen Buttons

Dynamic [Screen buttons] are dependant on the

function displayed above each button.

Dedicated Note Button

Selection of the [Note] element of a step.

Dedicated Instrument Button

Selection of the [Instrument] for a step.

Dedicated FX1 Button

Effect selection for [FX1] of a step.

Function Buttons

Assignable function buttons. Default: 1 - Pattern,

2 - Inst Automation, 3 - Sample Playback, 4 - Master.

Menu Button

Hold to open the menu. Navigate to highlight a selection

from the available options. Release to select.

Play Button

Plays when pressing [Play] the pattern or song. Pressing

again stops playback. Play again restarts.

Insert / Home Button

Pressing [Insert] will insert. Pressing [Shift] + [Insert] will

return ‘home’, to the top of the pattern.

Rec Button

Pressing [Rec] will toggle the record mode on or off for

editing patterns and perform settings.

D-Pad Navigator Buttons

Four navigation pad buttons (Up), (Down), (Left), (Right)

and one (Enter). Manoeuvre through the grid and options.

Dedicated FX2 Button

Effect selection for [FX2] of a step.

Master [+] / [-] Buttons - Course

Adjusts the master volume +/- in large increments. Also

navigates and adjusts values within certain menus.

Microphone

Internal microphone.

Master [+] / [-] Buttons - Fine

Increases the master volume +/- in ne increments.

Also navigates and adjusts values within certain menus.

Copy Button

Pressing [Copy] will copy the selected item.

Use [Shift] + [Copy] to paste any copied item.

Delete Button

Pressing [Delete] will reset or step back.

[Shift] + [Delete] will backspace delete the selected item.

Shift Button

Pressing [Shift] + Another button will select its

secondary function.

Overview

Note Instr

FX1

FX2

Play Rec

Master Volume

Insert Menu

Delete Copy

Shift

Line In MIDI InLine Out MIDI Out

21 3 4

Master Volume

15 16

1817

9 10

11 12

13 14

NOTES

1.3 Start Up

Tracker Mini is powered from the an internal rechargeable battery which is

charged using the supplied USB cable and charger. When restarting

Tracker Mini the previously open project will be be re-opened.

▌ POWERING ON / OFF TRACKER MINI

1. To recharge Tracker Mini, connect the supplied USB-C Mains cable

between Tracker Mini and the supplied USB plug to charge the unit.

Once charged Tracker Mini will operate without the USB power supply

being connected.

2. Ensure the SD Card is installed correctly for Tracker Mini to operate.

Pins should face up towards the front panel.

3. To power up, hold the small power on/off button located on the top right

(looking from the front) for 1 second. Start up will open the previously

opened project.

4. To power off, press and hold the small power button located on the top

right (looking from the top) until the timer bar ends. Tracker Mini will

then power off.

5. To check battery power charge when the unit is off, press quickly the

power button. The battery indicator will display for a short period to

indicate the charging state. The battery state is also displayed if the

power cable is connected while powered off.

The charging supply is 5V, 2A from the supplied mains to USB adapter.

Press the On/Off Button to Power Up

Hold the On/Off Button to Power Down

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

1.4 Generic Button & Control Functions.

There are a number of button commands that operate generically

throughout Tracker Mini. These are applied in a variety of situations.

Main Menu Browsing

Typically the [Menu] Button is held while navigating the main menu. The

navigation can be performed by various button combinations.

Hold

Release

(Up)

(Down)

(Left) (Right)

Up button scrolls one row up the order.

Hold [Menu] button throughout the navigation process.

The menu item is selected when [Menu] button is released.

+ Scrolls multiple steps in the menu.

Left button scrolls one column left.

Right button scrolls one column right.

Down button scrolls one row down the order.

- Scrolls one item down the order.

+ Scrolls one item up the order.

- Scrolls multiple items down the order.

NOTES

Overview

NOTES

Pattern

Song

Perform

Sample

Playback

File

Sample

Recorder

Instrument

Parameters

Sample

Loader

Sample

Editor

Master

Config

Games

1.5 Generic Parameter Editing.

Pages may contain parameters and functions which once selected can be

adjusted in value. These are applied in a variety of situations.

Parameter Editing

A page will need to be selected which contains the parameters to edit. For

example the ‘Master’ page contains a series of adjustable settings. The

highlighted and selected parameter will be indicated with a red bounding

box. It is this parameter that will be changed when using the D-Pad

Navigator and +/- buttons.

Within xed page menu options, the D-Pad navigation buttons and +/-

master buttons will scroll through the available options. The option is also

automatically selected when it is highlighted. The respective screen button

may also cycle through menu options when pressed repeatedly in pages.

* Inner +/- and D-Pad Up / down may operate in similar fashion in some menu and value setting options

(Up)

(Down)

(Left) (Right)

Up button increases parameter value.

D-Pad Navigation

Master +/- Buttons

D-Pad Menu Navigation

Menu Page

Master +/- Buttons

[+] Increases value in larger increments.

Left button navigates parameter selection.

Right button navigates parameter selection.

Down button decreases parameter value.

[-] Decreases value, same as (Down) Button*.

[+] Increases value, same as (Up) Button*.

[-] Decreases value in larger increments.

The central navigation button typically acts as a ‘select’ or ‘enter’ button

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

1.6 Functions Buttons.

There are 4 dedicated function buttons which allow quick access to 8 pre-

dened pages. These are numbered 1 - 4 for the rst 4 functions and also

have an additional set of 4 functions by using [Shift]. These function buttons

are assignable and can be recongured to a range of page options but it is

recommended to start with the defaults in order to build your workow.

Using the assignable Function Buttons

Tap one of the Function buttons or use [Shift] + Tap, to immediately access

the dened page. The default pages that are assigned are illustrated below.

There are 12 available functions which can be assigned to the Function

buttons with up to 8 slots available, 2 for each button. Other than those

assigned by default, the ‘Sample Recorder’, ‘Sample Editor’, ‘Perform’ and

‘Games’ functions can also be assigned in place of the default settings. The

process of binding a page to a button is explained in the conguration

settings section.

The processes described in this manual will assume the default function

button assignments as stated here. The [Menu] options are an alternate

method of selecting a specic function page.

Pattern

Song

Instrument

Parameters

Sample

Loader

Sample

Playback

File

Press [1] - [4] to Select a Dened Function Page

Hold [Shift] + [1] - [4] to Select a Dened Function Page

Master

Cong

The main page is selected when pressing the function buttons. If multiple pages exist,

continue to tap the respective function button to cycle through the available pages.

Shift

21 3 4

NOTES

Overview

NOTES

1.7 First Steps with Factory Projects.

At rst glance, operation of Tracker Mini appears unusual. However the

workow is quite simple once a few fundamentals are clearly understood.

The quick start button commands shown here can be applied with the

factory projects to get familiar with the essential processes to help speed

up the learning curve. Ensure the SD Card is installed.

▌ OPENING A PROJECT

1. When powering on, the previous project will be restored. Projects can

be changed or new ones created. Tracker Mini will only be able to view

up to 100 Projects per folder although user folders can be created.

2. Hold [Shift] + Function [3] to perform a quick selection of the ‘le’

function page. This assumes the default ‘File’ assignment for button 3.

3. Alternatively use the menu navigation to access the le menu.

• Hold [Menu] + Press (Up), (Down), (Left) or (Right) to scroll to

highlight the ‘File’ option. The red bounding box will indicate the

highlighted item.

• Release the [Menu] button. Releasing the button will select and

open the highlighted ‘File’ option.

4. Press [Open] - 2

screen button from the left. The list of available

projects will be displayed on the screen.

5. Press (Up) or (Down) to navigate the list of project options. Alternatively

press 1

screen button for [Up] or 2

screen button for [Down] to scroll

the list selection. The highlighted option will show with a bounding box.

6. With the desired project highlighted, Press [Open] - 8

/ last screen

button to open the project.

7. If the currently active project has been edited a prompt, ‘Do you want to

save the changes to xxxx’ will be presented. Press [Save] - 8

/ last

screen button to save or [Don’t Save] - 7

screen button to proceed

without saving. The option to cancel is also presented.

8. Although not essential, it is usually good practice to select and display

the pattern page at this stage. If required, Function key [1] is assigned

by default to display the pattern page or navigate within the [Menu].

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

The master volume may be set loud when initially starting up. Care should

be taken when playing songs and especially if listening with headphones. It

is advised to rstly set the master volume lower before listening into a song

▌ QUICK ADJUSTMENT OF THE MASTER VOLUME.

1. Hold [Shift] + [+] / [-] Buttons. The upper and lower +/- buttons change

in larger increments and the central +/- in ne increments.

▌ GENERAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE MASTER VOLUME.

1. Hold Function [4] + Press [-] to reduce the master volume. Use the

outer buttons for larger increments in volume. This assumes the default

assignment of button [4] to the Master function pages.

2. To reduce in smaller increments:-

• Hold [4] + Press [-] inner button.

• Hold [4] + Press (Down)

3. Hold Function [4] + Press [+] to increase the master volume. Use the

outer [+] button for larger increments in volume. This assumes the

default assignment of button [4] to the Master function pages.

4. To increase in smaller increments:-

• Hold [4] + Press [+] inner button.

• Hold [4] + Press (Up)

5. The Master page can also be selected from the Menu options. Hold

[Menu] and use the (Left), (Right), (Up) and (Down) D-Pad buttons.

6. The Master Volume, as displayed on the left side bar indicator and can

be adjusted between -51.5dB to +12dB.

▌ PLAYING A PATTERN FROM THE PATTERN OR ANY GENERIC PAGE.

1. Ensure a project with patterns is loaded.

2. Although not essential, it is usually good practice to display the pattern

page at this stage. If required, Press Function [1] to display the pattern

page, this button is assigned as default. Pattern page can also be

selected in the [Menu] options.

3. Press [Play] to play the currently active pattern. Note that this process

will only play and loop the currently selected pattern and not the entire

song, unless the Song page is on display when pressing [Play].

4. Press [Play] to stop playback on the current step.

• Pressing [Play] again restarts from the pattern beginning.

• Pressing [Shift] + [Play] will restart playback from the current

paused position.

• Press [Shift] + [Insert] when play is stopped to reset the playhead to

the start position without commencing play.

▌ PLAYING A SONG FROM SONG PAGE.

1. Select song mode, Hold [Shift] + [1] where this is the default Function

button assigned. This will be applicable only when a song structure has

previously been created. Songs are typically setup in factory projects.

2. Press [Play] to play from the currently active song row. Playback in the

Song page is different to the generic pattern play from within other page

views. Each row will represent a series of patterns across the 8 tracks

and will play the rows top to bottom.

3. Press [Play] to stop playback on the current row.

• Pressing [Play] again restarts playback starting from the beginning

of the current row.

• Pressing [Shift] + [Play] will toggle loop playback for the current row

on or off. If playback is in a stopped state, playback will start at the

beginning of the current row.

• Press [Shift] + [Insert] when play is stopped to reset the playhead to

the start of the song without commencing play.

NOTES

Overview

NOTES

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Overview

NOTES

1.9 QWERTY Keyboard.

Some pages will require text editing for naming tracks or projects etc. The

same functionality applies whenever the Alpha numeric pop-up editor is

used. The screen will display the QWERTY keys and the text to edit. The

screen buttons are used to enter, cancel or save while the D-Pad Navigator

buttons perform the editing. Auto naming is also an option.

The characters and the title can be selected by using (Up), (Down), (Left) or

(Right) to navigate and Press the centre D-Pad Navigator button or Press [Insert]

or Press [Enter] - 1

Screen Button to select and add the selected character.

Option to [Cancel] - 7

from Left Screen Button is also possible.

Save when complete using [Save] - 8

Screen Button to save the name.

Enter Auto name RenameCancel

The screen will display the keys laid out in a QWERTY formation.

The Tracker Mini buttons operate in the naming editor screen when presented:-

• D-Pad (Up), (Down), (Left), (Right) will navigate the selection across the

keyboard. Will also navigate left / right in the text of the name when the

name is highlighted .

• D-Pad Navigator (Centre) button or [Insert] will insert the currently

highlighted character into the name at the cursor position. Also a screen

button option.

• [Delete] to delete characters and use with [Shift] to backspace in the name

from the text cursor position.

Note Instr

FX1

FX2

Play Rec

Insert Menu

Delete Copy

21 3 4

p - +

Backspace

Caps Lock

Space

1.8 Introduction to Tracks

Tracker Mini has 8 tracks, each of which can be congured with unique

patterns made up of one or more instrument combinations. Tracks are

structural elements and the track mixer is found in the master section.

Some specic track commands are also available in the pattern pages, for

example muting tracks. By default 4 tracks are displayed for patterns and

the pattern page is assigned to Function button [1].

▌NAVIGATING TRACKS IN THE PATTERN PAGE

1. Press Function [1] to open the pattern page. 4 Tracks are displayed by

default. The pattern page can also be selected in the [Menu].

2. Press (Left) or (Right) to navigate across all 8 tracks. The green or red

highlighted step will anchor the navigation point on the track columns.

▌MUTING TRACKS IN PATTERN PAGE

1. Press [1] to ensure pattern page is selected. 4 Tracks are displayed by

default. The pattern page can also be selected in the [Menu].

2. To mute / unmute, Press [Shift] + [Screen] button for the respective

track. All 8 tracks are presented by the screen buttons when holding the

shift button. Muted tracks are displayed with the screen keys dimmed.

3. Muting will be applied immediately the screen button is pressed. This is

different behaviour than in the track mixer, where muting is applied

when the mute button is released.

▌CHANGING TRACK VIEW FOR THE PATTERN PAGE

• 8 Tracks with only Note parameter: Press [1] + [Note].

• 8 Tracks with Instrument parameter: Press [1] + [Instrument].

• 8 Tracks with only FX1 parameter: Press [1] + [FX1].

• 8 Tracks with only FX2 parameter: Press [1] + [FX2].

• 8 Tracks with 2 selected parameters: Press [1] + [P1] + [P2], where

‘P1’ and ‘P2’ are 2 from; [Note], [Instrument], [FX1], FX2].

• Revert to 4 track mode, Press [1].

(Up) (Down)

(Enter)(Left) (Right)

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

1.11 Example Workow.

The workow adopted with Tracker Mini will of course develop to t your personal approach. To get

started a typical journey is described below.

NOTES

Overview

Create & Save New Project

Set Project Tempo

Load Samples to SD Card

Sample Audio into Tracker Mini

Select Audio Sample for Project

Create Instruments

Create Pattern

Add Steps and Develop Pattern

Add Master Effects

Mix the Tracks

Congure Performance Options

Render Audio Out

Housekeeping

Save Project

Arrange Patterns into a Song

The SD Card must be installed to start a new

project and use Tracker Mini. Projects are stored

on the SD Card. Create a new project

Project Tempo 40-800 BPM. FX can apply

variations as the patterns develop.

Global settings usually setup or

performed once before or at the

start of a new project.

Instruments are created by

conguring samples with

additional settings and features.

Steps are assembled to create

beats and melodies in a

number of patterns.

Patterns arranged into a song.

Master effects can be adjusted

as can a mix of all 8 tracks to

nalise the complete song

production.

Performance settings can be

applied, ideal for a live set.

The project can be saved (is in

fact auto saved) and audio

rendered if required by bouncing

to audio stems.

Project

Instruments

Pattern

Song

Master & Mix

Perform

Output

Option to manually load uncompressed 44.1KHz,

16bit WAV samples to the SD card from PC or

Mac and accessible to Tracker Mini projects.

Also audio can be recorded as monophonic les

and stored in the audio pool.

Samples can be stored on the SD Card and then

loaded into the project audio pool. Up to 48

instruments can be created in a project.

Instruments are created using a sample as the

source. Editing of parameters are applied.

Example instruments include a wavetable or

granular synth or a sample of sliced beats.

An empty pattern can be created by setting the

tracks, length etc. A project can holds up to 255

patterns. Multiple patterns can be created.

An empty pattern is populated with steps. A step

contains a Note, Instrument and has 2 FX slots.

Assemble steps by track into beats, bass-lines,

leads, pads etc.

While effects can be added to instruments, a

master effect section handles the combined

audio at the output stage. Effects include a

limiter, space, bass boost and EQ

Mix and balance the 8 tracks.

Perform mode allows conguration and live

performances with dened control over specic

elements. Adds variety and improvised creativity.

Render out audio stems to mix and master further

in DAWs or to share with others maybe to create

remixes.

Although projects are auto-saved, it is always

good practice to manually save a nished

production. Maybe rename with ‘Save As’.

Yeah yeah…. The boring bit. But it will help as

projects develop to keep things tidy. Maybe delete

old projects or backup the SD Card.

A song is the arrangement of patterns into a

single track. This is the arrangement of a

complete song where patterns are played in a

dened order.

ACTION COMMENTSPROCESS

1.10 Page Layout.

Each page will display the information and control options for the selected

function. While this may be unique to the context there are some common

features and navigation principles that apply across all (or most) of the

generic pages of Tracker Mini.

C3 04 ---- P-20

D3 04 ---- P-10

C4 12 ---- A 4

Pattern

1 1

C5 40 ---- P-25

C5 40 ----

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ----

P 25

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

C5 02 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- H-25 C5 40 ---- P-20

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

9 9

11 11

13 13

15 15

8 8

10 10

12 12

14 14

Length

Step Jump

Fill Preview Undo Redo More

Track 2 Track 3 Track 4Track 1

Pattern 1 0m:00s P1.008 1.Analog 3 18p

Pattern

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

15 15

Length

Step Jump

Fill Preview Undo Redo More

1 1

C5 40 ---- P-25 C5 40 ---- H-25 C5 40 ---- P-20 C5 40 ---- P-25

Track 2 Track 3 Track 4Track 1

Pattern 1 0m:00s P1.008 1.Analog 3 18p

Central area contains specic

information for the selected function

and settings.

Function / Page currently

selected and represented on the

page. Where multiple pages exist

this will also be shown i.e. 2/3

Time position in Minutes &

Seconds of the current

playhead. This is total play time

not time in a pattern or song

Current Pattern and

Step position

Transport status

Physical Screen Buttons

represent the command displayed

on the screen directly above.

Up to 8 selectable context based

options. These can be menu options,

navigation commands or blank.

The button underscore colours represent the mode in which the command is available. Options

underscored in red are available only in [Rec] mode. Green options are available generically.

Options are dimmed when not currently

available. For example, these may need

an item to be selected rst.

Selected instrument displayed,

although not shown on all pages.

This shows current project when in

the ‘File’ menu page.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Overview

Function Action

Tracker Mini Buttons

Description

Master Master Volume Hold [Shift] + [+] or [-]

Adjusts the master output. The +/- offer ne and course

adjustment options. Also use (Up) or (Down)

General General Navigation (Up), (Down), (Right), (Left) D-Pad, generally navigate, scroll menu selections and options

General Copy [Copy]

Depending on the context, will copy and paste between

functions ie copy patterns. Use [Shift] + [Copy] to Paste.

General Delete [Delete]

Depending on the context, will delete. Will reset any selected

parameter to its default state. Also use with shift to backspace

Pattern Pattern Mode Page [1]

Selects the pattern mode page. Button 1 is by default assigned

to pattern page in the congurable page settings.

Pattern Play Pattern [Play]

Plays the pattern from the start. Stops / Pauses the pattern if it

is already playing. Restarts play if paused mid pattern.

Pattern Continue Play [Shift] + [Play] Restarts play of the pattern from the currently paused position

Pattern 8 Track Note View [1] + [Note]

Display all 8 tracks with only notes instead of default 4 tracks.

2 elements can be displayed i.e. + [FX1], [FX2], [Instrument]

Pattern 8 Track Inst View [1] + [Instrument]

Display 8 tracks with only instrument instead of 4 tracks.

2 elements can be displayed i.e. + [FX1], [FX2], [Note]

Pattern 8 Track FX View [1] + [FX1] or [FX2]

Display all 8 tracks with only FX instead of default 4 tracks.

2 elements can be displayed i.e. + [Note], [Instrument]

Pattern 4 Track View [1] Restores default 4 tracks when viewing 8 tracks

Pattern Select Pattern [1] + (Up), (Down) or [+] / [-] Select Pattern by number.

Pattern Sequential change [1] + (Left) or (Right)

When playing, selects a new pattern to cue playback to start

when the current pattern ends. Pattern blinks red.

Pattern Sequential change [Pattern] + (Left) or (Right)

When playing, selects a new pattern to cue playback to start

when the current pattern ends. Pattern blinks red.

Pattern Immediate change [1] + (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-]

When playing, selects a new pattern to trigger and starts

playback in sync, immediately.

Pattern Immediate change [Pattern] + (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-]

When playing, selects a new pattern to trigger a start

playback, in sync, immediately.

Pattern Multiple Step Select

[Shift] + (Up) (Down) (Left) (Right)

Will select a range of multiple steps for editing collectively.

Pattern Select Top Row [Shift] + [Insert] When stopped, resets the playhead to the top row start.

Pattern Multiple Step Select [Shift] + (Up)

When on the rst step

Will select all steps for the currently selected track

Pattern Multiple Step Select [Shift] + (Up) (Up)

When on the rst step

Will select all steps for all of the tracks

Pattern Mute Tracks [Shift] + [Screen] Button

Screen button 1 - 8 will toggle mute or unmute for tracks 1 - 8

respectively when in pattern mode page.

Pattern

Parameter Selection

Tap Dedicated Param Button

Will lock the selection of the Note, Instrument, FX1 or FX2

parameter when editing or navigating.

Pattern Arm / Disarm [Shift] + [Rec] + [Screen] Button

Arms or Disarms the track for recording. Disarmed tracks will

not allow recording. Screen buttons represent tracks.

Pattern Live Rec Start [Shift] + [Rec]

Start Live Recording. Requires an external keyboard to record

notes into the pattern.

Pattern Live Rec > Play [Rec]

When live recording, pressing [Rec] will continue to play but

exit recording mode.

Function Action

Tracker Mini Buttons

Description

Song Mode Song Press [Shift] + [1] Pressing [Song] switches to song page.

Song Mode Song Hold [Shift] + [1] long press

Holding buttons will temporarily display song page from within

another page i.e. from Pattern page. Release [1] before [Shift]

Song Mode Select Row Press (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-] Navigate the song row slot / pattern. One row can be selected

Song Mode Select Top Row [Shift] + [Insert] When stopped, resets playhead to the top row start.

Song Mode Play Song [Play] Plays the song from the start of the selected slot / pattern row.

Song Mode Stop Song [Play]

Stops / Pauses the song playback. Pressing Play again will

restart in the song at the start of the current slot / pattern row.

Song Mode Loop Row [Shift] + [Play]

Loops playback on the current song slow / pattern row.

Essentially plays the selected pattern.

Song Mode Tempo

Hold [Tempo] + (Up) (Down)

Adjust project tempo, 40 - 800 BPM in 1 BPM increments

Song Mode Tempo

Hold [Tempo] + [+] / [-]

Adjust project tempo, 40 - 800 BPM in 10 BPM increments

when using outer +/- and 1 BPM increments with inner +/-

Perform Perform Use Menu to select perform

Perform Play [Play] Plays current pattern on loop. Also stops playback.

Perform Play [Shift] + [Play] Plays the song on loop. Also toggles pattern / song playback.

Perform Edit [Rec] Edit mode selected. Navigation and slot values in red.

Perform Navigate Column (Left) or (Right) Selects one of the 12 effect slot columns.

Perform Select [Track x] Selects tracks to apply any triggered effect. Track labelled red.

Perform Trigger effect [+], [+], [-], [-]

Triggers, while held, one of the effect value slots in perform,

green mode. In Rec mode this will allow editing of the values.

Perform In Rec Mode (Up), (Down) Change performance effect in the current slot

Perform In Rec Mode [Shift] + (Left) or (Right) Swap effects between slots

Perform In Rec Mode [+] / [-] + (Up) or (Down) Edit the effect value offset for the respective effect and row

Perform Remix

[Track x] + (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-]

Load a new pattern for the selected track(s). Plays

immediately. Live remix mode.

Perform Remix [Track x] + (Left) or (Right)

Arm a new pattern for the selected track(s) once the current

pattern completes. Live remix mode.

Perform Mute / Unmute [Shift] + [Track x] Mute or unmute the selected track

1.12 Quick Reference Commands

Assumes default assignment of function buttons [1] to [4]. D-Pad Navigation referenced in rounded () parenthesis. Dynamic screen keys in italic.

1.12 Quick Reference Commands

Assumes default assignment of function buttons [1] to [4]. D-Pad Navigation referenced in rounded () parenthesis. Dynamic screen keys in italic.

Make no mistake, Tracker Mini is a unique yet

comprehensive device. There are so many

features that are less obvious to producers

more familiar with more traditional sequencers

and DAW’s. The overall structure of Tracker

Mini can seem at rst glance, confusing.

However spending a little time to understand

the overall architecture and its terminology will

set a good starting foundation. For this reason

there are no apologies for taking time to get

intimate with the architecture of the overall

device and bringing this summary upfront in

this guide. Getting a solid understanding and

awareness of the Tracker Mini’s structure will

help enormously in getting to grips later with

the rest of the device. The two basic elements

needed is Tracker Mini itself (of course) fully

charged and the correctly congured Micro SD

Card which is integral to Tracker Mini’s

operation. While more in depth details for

specic topics are covered in the following

sections of this notebook, the overall foundation

and structure is laid out in this chapter. The

hierarchical structure and organisation of data

and functions such as Projects, Patterns and

Steps are summarised collectively and how they

work together. It is therefore worth the

investment of time and focus in understanding

the architectural hierarchy. Developing a

fundamental workow and efcient process will

help get the most out of Tracker Mini’s features.

Architecture

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Architecture

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

2.1 Glossary of Terms

While you may think this should be hidden at the back of this book, understanding the terminology

associated with these topics and especially the Tracker Mini will help unlock it’s power and

performance. It makes sense to become familiar early with the essential terms to help embed into

your workow

Architecture

Beta: Pre-release software versions used for

testing purposes. Polyend often release beta

versions of Tracker Mini.

Effects: Refers to the master effects used across

the overall output audio.

Envelope: An envelope is used to modulate and

shape parameters and audio over time. Tracker

Mini has Envelopes which can be assigned

FX: A number of assignable effects are provided to

steps in the pattern. These are not traditional style

effects but more like mini-applications and

automation controls.

Instrument: In Tracker Mini, an instrument starts

with a sample as its source. Various parameter

congurations can be applied including wavetable

or granular synth applications to operate as the

sound within a step. MIDI instruments to set

channel and settings also can be congured.

Instrument List: Also called an instrument pool or

audio pool. This is the internal memory. Samples

and instruments are loaded here to be accessed

by patterns.

LFO: Low frequency oscillator which is not

specically used for sound generation but to

modulate parameters for sound design and

movement. Tracker Mini has LFO’s which can be

assigned.

Looping: The process of replaying audio or a

pattern continuously in a dened cycle e.g. start to

end then start to end.

MIDI: MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital

Interface and is a standard protocol used for

communicating between equipment. MIDI is

normally applied using 5 Pin MIDI DIN connections

which in some cases (i.e. with Tracker Mini) are

interfaced via a MIDI 5 Pin to 3.5mm MIDI Dongle.

Mod File. Legacy tracker les such as .mod and .it

were used in classic trackers. Not compatible with

current Polyend Tracker OS versions.

Mute: Muting offers variations that can be created

by silencing the play out of tracks and patterns for

sound design purposes and especially when

playing live sets.

Note: A musical note assigned to a samples pitch

and assigned to track steps to create a melody or

percussive beat.

OS: Operating System is the core software that

makes Tracker Mini work. It handles how it

operates and periodic updates from Polyend bring

new features into use.

Parameter: The individual value of a specic

function or control element. A parameter can be

adjusted to affect a sound or a functions operation.

Pattern: This is the backbone and core of a

Tracker Mini sequence and contains all steps in a

sequence. Patterns control how steps are played.

Perform: A mode in Tracker Mini that provides an

environment with 12 selectable effects which can

be triggered live and during improvisations.

Power Bank. A portable rechargeable battery

devices used to power or recharge portable

equipment.

Project: The overall structural container for

patterns, samples, instruments etc. A project

should always be loaded to work with Tracker Mini.

RAM Memory: While Tracker Mini operates with

the Micro SD card, on board RAM memory is also

used for instruments and samples in the project.

Render: This is like internal sampling. To internally

capture patterns, tracks or songs into an

exportable audio sample. Sometimes render is

also called ‘bounce’ in the producer community.

Reset: The process of restarting Tracker Mini by

loading a random OS rmware.

Sample: The basic audio element recorded or

loaded into Tracker Mini and used to create an

instrument.

Sampling: The act (and art) of recording and

capturing audio to be edited and creatively

assembled into a new musical composition.

SD Card: A storage device that is used in Tracker

Mini for holding data, samples, project etc. Tracker

Mini is supplied with a 16GB Micro SD Card.

Solo: The ability to select an individual track to play

alone and effectively mutes other tracks.

Song: A combination of tracks and patterns

combined and structured into a full arrangement.

Step: In Tracker Mini a step is the building block for

creating melodies and beats. Each step contains a

note, instrument and 2 FX slots per track and is

displayed in the track rows.

Track: Tracker Mini contains 8 tracks each which

controls a voice. Tracks are used for structuring the

sequencing of steps. These can be congured with

steps to play a variety of instruments and develop

a complete melody and beat across the 8 tracks.

Tracker: Tracker is a digital audio workstation for

music production. Trackers use a linear top to

bottom sequencing environment where elements

are programmed into lines of Tracker code.

Update: The process of installing the newest

rmware. This brings new features and xes bugs

associated with previous versions.

2.2 Tracker Mini Audio Structure

Architecture

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Architecture

Track 1

Bit-crusher

Limiter

Overdrive

Space

Filter

Bass Boost

Saturation

Delay Reverb

Reverb

Send & Return

Delay

Send & Return

Mix & Pan

MIDI Engine &

Parameters

Instrument

Sample

Wavetable Granular

Out Right

MIDI Out

Line in

MIDI In

Mic In

Out Left

Step

Mix

Note Instrument FX1 FX2

Step

Track 8

128

Project

Firmware Instruments Mod TrackerLog

Micro SD Card

Tracker Mini

Games Manual Projects

Samples

Project

Pattern

Song

Master

Instrument Audio Engine

FX Applications

Sampler

A correctly formatted SD Card must be installed to

operate Tracker Mini. Card default folders shown.

Loaded Project

Maximum 255 Patterns per Project

Maximum 48 Instrument slots are available per Project

A variety of effects are selectable from the list of 29 FX.

E.g. G

E.g. T

E.g. m

….. 8 Tracks / Voices per Project …..

….. Max 128 Steps per Track …..

.…. .….

100 Projects are visible and accessible from within Tracker Mini.

More than 100 could be stored on the SD Card.

Track 1

Pattern

2.3 SD Card Structure.

The Micro SD Card is an integral part of Tracker Mini and must be inserted

to operate correctly. An alert message is displayed if Tracker Mini is

powered up without an SD Card installed. It is important that the correct

format is applied to the Micro SD Card. This should be FAT32 with Master

Boot Record (MBR) Partitioning.

The default le structure will expand as different functions are used. For

example a snapshots folder is created when capturing screen images, also

export and recording folders created once these les are rstly generated.

Files and folders can be accessed with a PC or Mac. A USB adapter is

supplied with Tracker Mini.

Micro SD Can be connected to a

PC / Mac with the USB adapter.

NOTES

Root

Architecture

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Architecture

Sub Folders

SD Card

/Root Directory

/Firmware

Default SD Card Structure

/Drum Kits

/Quick Start

/ProjectName

/FactoryPacks

Tracker Mini comes with 50 factory genre-based packs installed onto the SD Card.

/Instruments

/Samples

/Patterns

/Progressions

/Instrument Kits

/Synths

/Games

/Instruments

/Manual

/Mod

/Projects

/Samples

/TrackerLog

Polyend Tracker Mini_1.0.0.ptf

New OS versions can be located here to update Tracker Mini Mini

Contains xxx.pti instrument les in the sub-folders

1.jpg, 2.jpg, 3.jpg, 4.jpg, 5.jpg, 6.jpg, 7.jpg, 8.jpg

Contains project les located in sub-folders

Legacy .mod or .it Tracker les. May not exist on newer SD Cards

Sample Packs located in sub-folders

Project.mt

2.4 Internal Help & Tips.

Tracker Mini has a series of built in tips and instructions to help get started

with the functions and features. These are automatically available as text

hints which appear at various stages of navigating and manoeuvring

through the options and menus.

This ofcial manual and Q&A is available on the Polyend website. A limited

version of quick start is also available as the onboard manual.

▌VIEWING THE ONBOARD QUICK START

1. Hold [Shift] + Function [4] to open the conguration settings. The

secondary function [4] button by default is assigned to ‘Cong’

2. Navigate with the 1

and 2

Screen Buttons to select the ‘Manual’. Also

the D-Pad Navigator buttons can be used.

3. In the middle page pane, Press the 4

or 5

Screen Buttons to navigate

to ‘Quick Start’.

4. Press [Enter], 6

Screen Button to select the options. The pop-up

window will appear.

5. Navigate pages, Press (Left) or 1

Screen button or (Right) or 8

Screen button. The [+] / [-] buttons also turn pages.

6. Select any other function button page to exit.

NOTES NOTES

Lo1.ptl

Architecture

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Architecture

[Song]

[Perform]

[Master]

1/3 2/3 3/3

[Reverb]

[Delay]

[Limiter]

[EQ]

[Master] [Master]

2.5 Menu Page Map

As a quick guide to the page hierarchy in Tracker Mini the following

diagram illustrates the main pages accessed under the [Menu] option.

NOTES NOTES

Master Volume

[File]

[Cong]

[Sample Playback]

[Sample Editor]

[Sample Recorder]

[Pattern]

The Pattern page is the place where most time will be spent in the Tracker Mini workow

Project Settings, General, MIDI,

Metronome, Firmware, Manual, Credits

[Sample Loader]

[Export]

[Games]

[Select Effect]

[More]

[1]

[3]

[4]

[Shift] + [1]

[Shift] + [2]

[Shift] + [4]

[Shift] + [3]

Default quick page button 1 - 4 assignments are also shown under the page name.

Master Volume

Pattern

Song

Perform

Sample

Playback

File

Sample

Recorder

Instrument

Parameters

Sample

Loader

Sample

Editor

Master

Config

Games

Audio

1/2 2/2

[Instrument Parameters]

[Effects]

[Instrument Parameters]

[2]

Projects are the highest order structural

element in Tracker Mini. A project contains all

the elements of a full track. Think of each

project as a fully arranged song for an album

or a song for live set. Tracker Mini auto saves

projects which are stored on the installed Micro

SD Card. Although the card itself can contain

more, Tracker Mini will have up to 100 projects

visible and accessible. A project should be

opened for playback and editing. New projects

can also be created from scratch. Each project

contains a maximum of 255 patterns across 8

tracks. While patterns are the musical

composition functions, some elements, such

as the 48 available instruments are managed

at project level, and hence accessible to all

patterns. Projects are structural and

organisational functions more so than part of

the creative environment but nevertheless

serve an important purpose in the Tracker Mini

workow. Tracker Mini has an extended project

memory for audio samples. This holds almost 12

minutes of mic recorded audio as standard

although this may vary depending on the audio

quality and format. Samples are stored on the

Micro SD Card but can be also are held in the

Tracker Mini on board sample pool where

samples effectively become instruments.

Projects have an instrument pool populated with

samples or instruments to be available when

creating steps. This is prerequisite to creating

sequences. This section covers the general

project management in Tracker Mini and it’s SD

card plus some key specic project level

functions such as tempo.

Projects

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

3.1 Project Overview

A project is the highest order of Tracker Mini’s functions. It allows projects

to be managed, saved and loaded and also new projects to be created.

Think of a project as container for a complete song for an album or live set.

Access to project level features exists in various parts of Tracker Mini’s

functions and does not have a dedicated single point of access.

3.2 Opening & Saving a Project

Projects are auto saved but can also be manually saved and renamed.

Loading of a saved project is also possible, although on power up the

previously active project will be restored. The project management

functions are in the [Menu] ‘File’ function or accessed by default with [Shift]

+ [3]. Note that projects copied to the SD card must be in the main project

folder. Sub folders are not viewed directly from the ‘le’ menu.

▌ CREATING A NEW PROJECT

1. Hold [Shift] + [3] to open the le browser menu or access with [Menu].

2. Press [New Project] - 1

screen button. An option to save the current

project may be presented.

3. A blank project named ‘New Project’ is created.

▌ OPENING AN EXISTING PROJECT

1. Hold [Shift] + [3] to open the le browser menu or access with [Menu].

2. Press [Open] - 2

screen button. The project list is displayed. SD Card

list in the left window and the recently loaded projects centre. Use (Left)

or (Right) to switch between windows and lists.

3. Press (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-] to navigate the list of projects to load. Also

press [Up] - 1

screen button or [Down] - 2

screen button to scroll the

list. The highlighted option will show with a bounding box.

4. With the desired project highlighted, Press [Open] - 8

screen button.

5. If the currently active project has been edited a prompt ‘Do you want to

save the change to ‘xxxx’’ will be presented. Press [Save] - 8

/ last

screen button or Press [Don’t Save] - 7

screen button to save or exit.

6. If the current pattern is new, a ‘Save As’ command is activated.

7. If required, Press [1] to display pattern page.

▌ MANUALLY SAVING THE CURRENT / EXISTING PROJECT

1. Hold [Shift] + [3] to open the le browser menu or access with [Menu].

2. Press [Save] - 5

screen button from left.

3. The project will be saved and overwrite the previous version.

NOTESNOTES

Projects

Projects - Multiple projects with 100 visible per Project folder.

More projects can be available in the SD Card projects or user folders.

Tracks - 8 Per Project

Tracks are used to organise parts of a pattern such as bass, drums, etc

Patterns - 255 Patterns Per Project

Patterns are sequenced into tracks to create musical elements.

Steps - 128 Steps per pattern

These are the discrete building blocks each with a note, instrument and effects

Song - 255 Slots (Slots = Rows for the 8 Tracks)

A song is an arrangement of patterns to create a complete production

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

▌ SAVING THE CURRENT PROJECT - FIRST TIME

1. Hold [Shift] + [3] to open the le browser menu or access with [Menu].

2. Press [Save] - 5

screen button from left or Press [Save As] - 6

screen

button from left. If using ‘Save’ for the rst time the ‘Save As’ function is

triggered to request a name.

3. The naming function will appear to allow a new name to be created.

The D-Pad buttons will allow navigation and select within the alpha-

numeric keyboard. Project names can be a max of 32 characters.

4. Alternatively, press [Auto Name] - 6

screen button from left. This will

generate a random name for the project and present it in the editor.

5. With the desired name created, Press [Save] - 8

/ last screen button.

6. The project is saved and the keyboard editor function is closed.

The option to create a new folder also exists in the le menu under the ‘Open’

function. This will also require a name to be created.

Enter Auto name SaveCancel

QWERTY Keyboard is represented by the visual grid. The ‘f’ and ‘j’

keys are highlighted and lit on the pads to serve as a reference. The

Screen buttons offer the main commands in the context of the editor.

The following Tracker Mini buttons also operate in the naming editor

when the naming screen is presented:-

• (Up), (Down), (Left), (Right) will navigate the selection across

the keyboard. Will navigate left / right in the text of the name

when the name is highlighted .

• [Insert] will insert the currently highlighted character into the

name at the cursor position.

• [Shift] + [Insert] to delete characters and backspace in the name

from the text cursor position.

3.3 Deleting a Project.

The option to delete a project can be performed in the project browser. The

currently active project cannot be deleted. Change to another project to

delete. Note that deleting a project will also remove it from the SD Card.

▌ DELETING A PROJECT

1. Hold [Shift] + [3] to open the le browser menu or access with [Menu].

2. Press [Open] - 2

screen button from left. The list of available (max

100) projects will be displayed on the left of the screen.

3. Press (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-] to navigate the list of projects to load. Also

press [Up]- 1

screen button or [Down] - 2

screen button to scroll the

list. The highlighted option will show with a bounding box.

4. With the desired project highlighted, Press [Delete] - 3

screen button

from the left.

5. A prompt ‘Do you want to delete project ‘xxxx’’ ?’ will be presented.

6. To conrm, Press [Delete] - 8

screen button to conrm deletion.

Alternatively, Press [Cancel] - 7

screen button from left to exit without

deleting the project.

7. Project will be deleted from the SD Card and no longer visible in the

project list on Tracker Mini *.

* Projects also manually deleted externally from the SD Card using a PC or Mac

will no longer be visible in Tracker Mini.

p - +

Backspace

Caps Lock

Space

NOTESNOTES

Projects

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

3.4 Project Tempo

The overall tempo of the project is set in the ‘Song’ section of Tracker Mini

and has a dened range of 40 - 800 BPM. Tempo can also be modulated

by using the FX slots in a step with the ‘T’ Tempo effect. Note that the MIDI

clock output is based on the project tempo.

Note: Pressing [Tempo] + [Delete] in the song page will reset to the default 130

BPM. This is generic behaviour, where the [Delete] button will reset any selected

parameter to it’s default value.

Tap tempo can be applied in Song Mode by tapping the Tempo

Screen key a minimum of 4 times at the BPM desired. Count

will be displayed when tapping.

Hold [Shift] + [1] to open the ‘Song’ page.

In Song Mode,

Hold [Tempo] + (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-]

To adjust in larger Increments use the upper

and lower [+] and [-] buttons

BPM Range

800 BPM

40 BPM

Tempo

130.0 BPM

▌ ADJUSTMENT OF THE PROJECT TEMPO

1. Hold [Shift] + [1] to open Song mode.

2. Hold [Tempo] + (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-] to change the tempo in small

iterations. Range is 40 - 800 BPM.

3. Use the upper or lower [+] and [-] buttons for larger increments.

▌ TAP TEMPO ADJUSTMENT

1. Hold [Shift] + [1] to open Song mode.

2. Tap [Tempo] - screen button, a minimum of four taps. The tap count will

be displayed during tapping.

3. The tempo recorded is based on the speed of the taps played.

Note that the FX option ‘T’ Tempo triggers a tempo change between 10% - 400%

which can therefore extend the project base tempo range.

NOTESNOTES

Projects

Play

Pattern

Play

Song

Undo Add

Slot

Delete

Slot

Pattern Tempo

130.0 BPM

Track 1 Track 5Track 3 Track 7Track 2 Track 6Track 4 Track 8 Slot

Pattern

Song 0m:00s P1.008

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

3.5 Metronome

Tracker Mini has a metronome which operates when live recording (not

normal playback). This is congurable and selectable on/off within the

‘Cong’ menu under the ‘Metronome’ options.

Option Parameters Description

State

On, Off

Default Off

Toggles the metronome on or off.

Pre Roll

On, Off

Default Off

Sets a count in before the sequencer starts to

help timing of punch in recording.

Ideal for live recording.

Time signature num

1 - 12

Default 4

Number of beats in a measure / bar. Upper

number in the normal time signature value.

Example 4/4 set to 4 beats per measure.

Time signature denum

1 - 12

Default 4

Beat value, division of note. Lower number in

the normal time signature value. Example 4/4

has a quarter note per beat.

Volume

1 - 100

Default 50

Volume of the metronome’s ‘tick’ sound

Press (Left) or (Right) to navigate between the option windows

and use (Up) or (Down) to navigate to the desired option. Also

the screen buttons can be used to navigate.

Press [Shift] + [4] or navigate in the [Menu] for the ‘Cong’ page

Metronome Settings.

▌ SETTING THE METRONOME

1. Hold [Shift] + [4] to open the ‘Cong’ Page. Also access in the [Menu].

2. Ensure the left window is highlighted red i.e. in focus. Navigate windows

by pressing (Left) or (Right). Menu windows will automatically be

selected when pressing the relevant screen keys below the window to

navigate [Up] or [Down].

3. Press (Up) or (Down) to highlight with the bounding box over the

‘Metronome’ option. Alternatively press the relevant screen keys below

the window to navigate [Up] or [Down].

4. Press the relevant screen keys below the window to navigate [Up] or

[Down] under the central options to highlight with the bounding box over

the required Metronome option.

5. To change the selected parameter / setting, Press [Change], 6

Screen

button. The parameter pop-up window listing the available options will

appear.

6. Press (Up) (Down) or [Up] [Down] Screen Buttons to highlight the

desired option.

7. Press [Apply], 6

Screen button to conrm selection or [Cancel], 3

Screen button to exit without changing.

8. The metronome will operate at the chosen time signature and volume

when live recording is activated using [Rec] + [Play]. The Pre roll will

provide a count in of 4 and show the ‘Recording in 4. 3. 2. 1.’ message

before starting to record.

NOTESNOTES

Projects

Change

Project Settings State Off

General Pre Roll Off

MIDI Time signature num 4

Metronome Time signature denum 4

Firmware Volume 50

Fn buttons binding

Manual

Credits

Cong 0m:00s P1.008

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

3.6 Project Pool & Instrument List

A pre-requisite for creating patterns is to have a series of instruments

available to record or program into steps. Instruments are based on the

samples loaded into the project pool and parameters applied to create

instruments. Instruments can also be loaded from other projects but must

exist in the current project instrument list to be accessible to the pattern

steps. A maximum of 48 instruments are available per project depending on

the sample size and hence memory usage.

An instrument or sample from the SD Card libraries can be added into the

active project instrument list. The instrument list is used to congure steps.

Basics of setting up a project instrument list using the Sample Loader

function, accessed by default with [Shift] + [2] is shown here and further

details on the sample management is detailed later.

Press [Shift] + [2] or navigate in the [Menu] for the ‘Sample Loader’ page

Enter Rename Delete

Unused

PreviewAdd Next Import

Sample Loader 0m:00s P1.008

SD Card Instruments

/Firmware 1. Strange Sample Number 1

2. Deep Kick

4. Snare One

5. Closed Hat 1

10.

11.

12.

13.

3. Transient Kick

/Games

/Instruments

/Manual

/Mod

/Samples

/Projects

/trackerLog

Preview Vol

0.00 dB

Memory

17%

Press (Left) or (Right) to navigate between the option windows a

red bounding box will indicate the selected window. Press (Up) or

(Down) to navigate to the desired listed option.

Window display pains between SD Card

and Instrument List. Max 48 instruments

can be stored in a Tracker Mini project.

Window display pains between SD Card

and Instrument List. Max 48 instruments

can be stored in a Tracker Mini project.

Project memory available based on the

selected samples / instruments in the

instrument list.

The bar will show an additional red

element - if memory will increase and

green bar - if memory will decrease

when browsing a sample / instrument

indicating potential memory impact if

sample / instrument is added.

NOTES

Projects

NOTES

▌ CREATING A PROJECT INSTRUMENT LIST

1. Hold [Shift] + [2] to open the ‘Sample Loader’ Page. This is also

accessible within the [Menu].

2. Navigate to the central ‘Instruments’ window and highlight either an

empty slot or an existing instrument. If an existing instrument is

highlighted it will be replaced by the newly selected choice.

3. Navigate to the left ‘SD Card’ window and highlight either instruments or

samples. Use the (Up) or (Down) to navigate and Press [Enter] screen

button to select and open a folder. Use [Shift] + (Up) (Down) D-Pad

navigator to batch select multiple samples / instruments.

4. With a sample or instrument highlighted in the left window, press the

[Add], 1

Screen button. This will add or replace in the selected

instrument slot. Using [Add Next], 2

Screen button will add a sample

and will automatically jump the cursor to the next slot.

5. The memory bar chart will indicate the available project memory in

Tracker Mini. This will depend on the type and size of samples selected

and may limit the amount of instruments available in the instrument list.

6. Additional samples / instruments can be added. The instruments in the

list will be available to add to a step.

Notes:

• A prompt will be offered if replacing an existing instrument.

• When navigating, the /.. symbol indicates folders and subfolder

with a name. Selecting /.. alone will navigate up a level of the SD

Card folder structure.

• Instruments have a .pti lename.

• Samples can be previewed and the preview volume adjusted.

• The memory bar will show an additional red band (increases

memory usage) or green band (decreases memory usage)

indicating the potential memory impact when highlighting a sample

/ instrument to add. Should this be added to the instrument pool it

will affect the memory usage as indicated by the red/green bar.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Projects

NOTES

▌ IMPORTING TO THE PROJECT INSTRUMENT LIST

1. Hold [Shift] + [2] to open the ‘Sample Loader’ Page. This is also

accessible within the [Menu].

2. Navigate to the left ‘SD Card’ window and navigate to and highlight a

sample to import. Use (Up) or (Down) to navigate and Press [Enter]

screen button to select folder.

3. Navigate to the central ‘Instruments’ window and highlight either an

empty slot or an existing instrument. If an existing instrument is

highlighted it will be replaced by the newly selected choice.

4. Press [Import], 5

Screen button. The sample is displayed for editing.

Pressing [Cancel], 6

Screen button at any time to leave the import

menu without importing.

5. The sample can have its start [Start], 2

Screen button and end [End],

Screen button adjusted. Select Start or End and use [+] and [-] to

adjust. The inner [+] and [-] buttons adjust with in ner resolution. This is

a great feature when samples are too long or only a portion is needed.

6. Press [Preview], 1

Screen button to listen to the sample.

7. When editing is complete, select an import option to load the sample

into the instrument list:-

• Press [Import Low Quality], 7

Screen button. This will import a

lower quality sample. This will create a smaller le size and save

memory. The trade off is audio sound quality reduction.

• Press [Import Normal], 8

Screen button. This will import a sample

at the normal Tracker Mini quality specication. This will create a

larger le size and take up more memory. The trade off is optimum

audio sound quality.

Instruments can also be copied and pasted within the sample loader and

instrument list browser to duplicate and instrument. Use the [Copy] dedicated

button to Copy and [Shift] + [Copy] to Paste.

▌ DELETING AN INSTRUMENT FROM THE LIST

1. Hold [Shift] + [2] to open the ‘Sample Loader’ Page. This is also

accessible within the [Menu].

2. Navigate to the central ‘Instruments’ window and highlight an existing

instrument. If an existing instrument is highlighted it will be the one

deleted in this process. Use [Shift] + (Up) (Down) D-Pad navigator to

batch select multiple samples / instruments.

3. Press [Delete].

4. A prompt asking if you want to continue on to delete the highlighted

sample / instrument. Press [No], 7

Screen button to cancel without

deleting or conrm deletion by pressing [Yes], 8

Screen button.

5. The instrument is removed from the Tracker Mini list but is still present

on the SD Card.

6. The memory bar chart will indicate the available project memory in

Tracker Mini. This will depend on the type and size of samples selected

and may limit the amount of instruments available in the instrument list.

7. Additional samples / instruments can be deleted. The instruments in the

list will be available to use in the project.

▌ DELETING ALL UNUSED INSTRUMENTS FROM THE LIST

1. Hold [Shift] + [2] to open the ‘Sample Loader’ Page. This is also

accessible within the [Menu].

2. Navigate to the central ‘Instruments’ window.

3. Press [Delete Unused], 6

Screen button.

4. A prompt asking if you want to continue on to delete the highlighted

sample / instrument. Press [No], 7

Screen button to cancel without

deleting or conrm deletion by pressing [Yes], 8

Screen button.

5. Any instruments that are in the list but not used in the project are

removed from the list. SD Card les remain intact.

6. The memory bar chart will indicate the available project memory in

Tracker Mini. This will depend on the type and size of samples selected

and may limit the amount of instruments available in the instrument list.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

3.7 Summary of Conguration Options

A number of options can be set in the ‘Cong’ menu. These defaults may

be good enough to get started but specic changes may suit certain

workows and situations better. The details of these will be covered in

relevant sections and only an overview of global settings is provided here.

Press [Shift] + [4] or navigate in the [Menu] for the ‘Cong’ page

Menu Option Description Book Section

Project Settings Performance Presets

Allows performance presets to be saved either as

a global conguration or local to each project.

Performance

Mode

Project Settings Pattern Divider

Sets the highlight level for the selected step

offering better pattern visualisation.

Pattern Format

Project Settings Anti-aliasing

Anti-aliasing set to ‘On’ gives a cleaner sound for

sample playback. Off is more lo- vintage feel.

Project Settings Limiter Mode

Sets the characteristics of the limiter attack and

release between subtle and extreme.

Master Effects

Project Settings Sends Mode

Sets the sends to pre-fader i.e. independent of

volume or post-fader.

Master Effects

Project Settings Extra Headroom

Avoid clipping by adding extra headroom in the

output audio.

Project Settings Snap to Zero

Snap audio crossings to zero points, Used as

green markers in the sample playback page.

Instruments

General Display Brightness

Adjusts the brightness level of the 5” display

between three settings: High, Medium, Low.

System

General Display Theme

The colour scheme of the screen. Original has the

dark background while monochrome is bright.

System

General Display Font

Text font option. Original has the classic consolas

look while ‘new’ is smaller, more standard.

System

General Recording Options

Sets the options for what is recorded i.e. notes,

quantization, micro-timing, velocity.

Sequencing

Steps

General Numbering Mode

Sets all numbers to the decimal starting at 0 or 1

or hexadecimal format. Classic look and feel.

System

General Pattern Arrangement

Sets the pattern display to the traditional vertical

view or alternative horizontal display.

Patterns

General Pattern Top Info

Allows the top part of the pattern screen to display

only the track name, additional info or off.

Patterns

General Line In Channel

Selects the audio input of the line in between

stereo, mono left or mono right.

Audio

Press (Left) or (Right) to navigate between the option windows a

red bounding box will indicate the selected window. Press (Up) or

(Down) to navigate to the desired listed option.

Also the [Up] and [Down] screen buttons will select the option and

automatically select the menu window.

NOTES

Projects

Change

Project Settings Performance presets Global

Pattern divider 4

Anti-aliasing On

Limiter Mode

Extra Headroom

Subtle

Off

Sends Mode Post-Fader

General

MIDI

Metronome

Firmware

Cong 0m:00s P1.008

Fn buttons binding

Manual

Credits

Cong Options

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Menu Option Description Book Section

MIDI Clock In

Sets the source of the master clock, Internal

(default) or external USB or MIDI In jack.

MIDI

MIDI Clock Out

Sets the Tracker Mini clock output. Off, USB, MIDI

Out jack, USB + MIDI Out jack.

MIDI

MIDI Transport In

Sets the source of transport control commands,

Internal (default) or external USB or MIDI In jack.

MIDI

MIDI Transport Out

Sets the output of transport control commands, Off,

USB, MIDI Out jack or USB+MIDI jack options.

MIDI

MIDI Notes In

Sets the input routing of external notes in. Set to Off,

USB, MIDI In jack or USB+MIDI jack options.

MIDI

MIDI Notes Input Channel

Sets the MIDI channel for incoming notes from

external gear. Select All channels or Ch 1-16.

MIDI

MIDI MIDI Out

Sets the MIDI output routing between, Off, USB,

MIDI Out jack or USB+MIDI jack options.

MIDI

MIDI CC In

Sets CC (control change) input routing to Off, USB,

MIDI In jack, USB+MIDI In jack.

MIDI

MIDI CC In channel

Sets MIDI channel for CC (control change) incoming

messages. Select All channels or Ch 1-16.

MIDI

MIDI Middle C

Sets middle C as C-3, C-4, C-5, C-6. Calibrates

range in Tracker Mini with external gear.

MIDI

MIDI Clock Sync Correction

Latency compensation for incoming sync. -6 to +6.

Use with MIDI Jack or USB clock in.

MIDI

Metronome State Turns the metronome on or off for live recording. Projects

Metronome Pre Roll Provides a count in of 4 before starting to record. Projects

Metronome Time signature num Upper numerator of the time signature Projects

Metronome Time signature denum Lower denominator of the time signature Project

Metronome Volume Volume level of metronome Projects

Menu Option Description Book Section

Firmware Firmware Update

Activates a rmware update based on the OS

located on the SD card in the ‘rmware’ folder.

System

Firmware Current version

Displays current version of installed OS. Visual

indicator only.

System

Firmware Build Firmware build version display

Firmware Reset cong

Resets this conguration menu to the default

original settings.

System

Fn buttons binding Fn1 Sets the page associated with function button [1] System

Fn buttons binding Fn2 Sets the page associated with function button [2] System

Fn buttons binding Fn3 Sets the page associated with function button [3] System

Fn buttons binding Fn4 Sets the page associated with function button [4] System

Fn buttons binding Fn1+Shift

Sets the page associated with function button

combo [Shift] + [1]

System

Fn buttons binding Fn2+Shift

Sets the page associated with function button

combo [Shift] + [2]

System

Fn buttons binding Fn3+Shift

Sets the page associated with function button

combo [Shift] + [3]

System

Fn buttons binding Fn4+Shift

Sets the page associated with function button

combo [Shift] + [4]

System

Info - - General information and license details.

Projects

Each project contains a maximum of 255

patterns across 8 tracks. Each pattern can

hold up to 128 steps per track. Patterns are at

the heart of Tracker Mini and are built in the

pattern sequencer. The sequencer is what

makes Tracker Mini different from normal

digital audio workstations. Steps are the

building blocks when creating patterns and by

assembling these into audio arrangements it is

possible to create beats and melodies. Each

step consists of a note, instrument and two FX

slots. These are triggered as each row is

activated when playback is initiated. This can

trigger audio information, effect actions or MIDI

messages. Patterns are bite size elements of

a full song and can be created as individual

modules built using steps. Patterns are then

combined and arranged together in song mode

for chaining into a full length track. This section

will focus on patterns using in audio tracks

(although MIDI steps can be created together

with audio). This section will provide overall

guidance on creating basic patterns as well as

their structural elements generally. This is a

foundation to patterns and a deeper dive into

steps and sequencing comes next. All the basic

building blocks and the process needed to get

started in creating, editing and using a basic

pattern are covered in this section. More

advanced and in-depth elements of the

components of a step are covered later as well

as more advanced sequencing functions.

Pattern Format

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

4.1 What’s a Pattern?

Patterns are a combination of 8 Tracks where each has a series of steps

mapped out. The steps form into a melody or beat. So for example Track 1

could be the Drums, Track 2 for Percussion, Track 3 as Bass etc. Patterns

can be created using steps manually ‘programmed’ into the Tracker Mini or

by recording in real time.

NOTESNOTES

Pattern Format

Projects

MyProj

Patterns

Samples

Instruments

project.mt

Pattern_01.mtp

Pattern_02.mtp

Pattern_03.mtp

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Project

A default of 32 steps pre track is available in new patterns.

This can be changed between 1 - 128 Maximum.

Play Direction

Up to 255 Patterns per Project.

Step 1

Step 124

Step 2

Step 125

Step 3

Step 126

Step 4

Step 127

Step 5

Step 128

Track 1 Track 4Track 3 Track 7Track 2 Track 6Track 5 Track 8

Patterns will be stored on the SD Card under the project folder.

Step

Track 2, Step 126

Note

C4 01 P 27

Instrument FX1 FX2

4.2 Process of Creating a Pattern

Formatting and creating a pattern is a simple process but there are some

good practices that will speed up workow and help to move quickly to

making music. A pattern is the container for steps and establishes the step

timing and track format. The dynamic screen buttons are used heavily.

Tempo and Project

Instruments list is populated.

Press [1]

Pattern editing is mainly

performed in pattern mode.

Hold [Pattern] + (Up) or (Down)

Pattern is 1

Screen Button.

Example Pattern = 1

Hold [Length] + (Up) or (Down)

Length is 2

Screen Button.

(Left) & (Right) for larger increments.

Example Length = 32

Manual or

Live Recording to record

steps into the pattern.

Optionally set screen

view, 8 tracks, vertical /

horizontal etc.

Press [Shrink]

Screen Button

Halves length by removing

every second step

Press [Duplicate]

Screen Button

Doubles pattern length

including steps

Press [Expand]

Screen Button

Doubles length by

inserting steps

Pre-Requisite Select Pattern Mode Page

Shrink DuplicateExpand

Select Pattern NumberLength

Add Steps

Display Options

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Pattern Format

4.3 Conguring a Pattern.

Pattern and step editing is performed in ‘Pattern’ Mode. The rst

requirement is to create the pattern itself where steps can later be added to

create the melody or beat. Commands for the pattern are available from the

dynamic screen buttons located at the bottom of the page. These will

change depending on the mode or selection made.

The dynamic screen buttons labelled at the bottom of the page will control options for creating patterns.

Underscore colour represents mode i.e. Red means accessible in [Rec] mode only.

Pattern

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

15 15

Length

Step Jump

Fill Preview Undo Redo More

Render

Selection

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

15 15

Paste

Pattern

Expand

Pattern

Copy

Pattern

Duplicate

Pattern

Invert MoreShrink

Pattern

14.

Menu Option Function Description

Pattern Pattern Selection

Selects a pattern to edit. This will select a pattern number

between 1-255 in the project.

Length Pattern Length

Adjust the number of step rows in the pattern. Default is

32 but a maximum of 128 rows are available in a pattern.

Step Jump Programming Aid

Assists in recording steps with the pads. Will

automatically jump the selection cursor in dened steps.

Fill Programming Aid

Assists in programming steps. Will automatically ll steps

based on dened selection criteria

Preview Instrument Preview

Will play the instrument for the step to allow previewing of

the sound.

Undo

Undo Last

Command

If available, will reset the previous state prior to the last

action, effectively undoing the last (up to 20) commands.

Redo

Redo Last

Command

If available, will restore the previous state after to the last

action, effectively redoing the last (up to 20) commands.

More Next Page Selects the next page of commands - see below

Render

Selection

Bounce Audio

Renders the selection to a new audio sample. Useful to

use elsewhere or to reduce track consumption.

Invert Invert Steps Inverts all steps in the selection vertically

Duplicate

Pattern

Extends Pattern

Extends the entire pattern and its associated steps,

extending the pattern to double the length.

Expand

Pattern

Extends Pattern

Extends the pattern by adding blank steps in between

existing steps, extending the pattern to double the length.

Shrink

Pattern

Contracts Pattern

Contracts the pattern length by deleting every 2nd step,

reducing the pattern to half the length.

Copy

Pattern

Copy Copies the entire pattern to the virtual clipboard.

Paste

Pattern

Paste

Pastes the copied pattern from the virtual clipboard into

the location starting at the current position.

More Prior Page Selects the previous page of commands - see above

▌ SELECTING THE PATTERN MODE PAGE

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ Page. Also accessible within the [Menu].

2. The options for the pattern page will show at the bottom of the page and

are represented by the 8 screen buttons.

3. To change the options page, Press [More], 8

Screen button. This

toggles between the two pages of pattern options.

▌ SELECTING A PATTERN

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ Page. Also accessible within the [Menu].

2. Ensure the pattern is not playing.

3. Ensure options page 1 is displayed. Press [More] to toggle between the

two pages of pattern options.

4. Hold [Pattern] - 1

Screen button + (Up) or (Down). A pattern number

between 1-255 can be selected. Blank patterns selected have 32 steps

as default. The [+] and [-] buttons can also be used.

5. The currently active pattern number is displayed top left in the info bar.

▌ ADJUSTING THE PATTERN LENGTH

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ Page. Also accessible within the [Menu].

2. Ensure options page 1 is displayed. Press [More] to toggle between the

two pages of pattern options.

3. Hold [Length] - 2

screen button + (Up) or (Down). A pattern length

between 1-128 steps can be selected. Default is 32. The arrow buttons

(Left) or (Right) will set length in predened denominations i.e. 1, 2, 4,

8, 16 etc

Tip: It is good practice to build patterns starting with a small length. For example

start with 8 or 16 steps and create the beat or melody. This can then be duplicated

/ extended along with its steps and then edited to create longer passages.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Pattern Format

▌ EXTENDING PATTERN LENGTH

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ Page. Also accessible within the [Menu].

2. Ensure options page 2 is displayed. Press [More] to toggle between the

two pages of pattern options.

3. Press [Rec] to select recording mode and allow editing. Screen buttons

will be unavailable, shown dim, otherwise.

4. The current pattern can be extended in severals ways. The options

available via the 8 screen buttons are:-

• Press [Duplicate Pattern]. The pattern will be extended by

duplicating the full pattern along with its steps. Effectively doubles

the pattern length.

• Press [Expand Pattern]. The pattern will be extended by inserting

additional step rows in-between existing steps. Effectively doubles

by stretching the pattern length.

• Adjusting [Length] will also increase the pattern length. New empty

step rows added at the end.

5. The [Undo] or [Redo] screen buttons can be used if required to restore

a previous state. These are on Page 1 of the page options.

▌ REDUCING PATTERN LENGTH

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ Page. Also accessible within the [Menu].

2. Ensure options page 2 is displayed. Press [More] to toggle between the

two pages of pattern options.

3. Press [Rec] to select recording mode and allow editing. Screen buttons

will be unavailable, shown dim, otherwise.

4. The current pattern can be reduced in severals ways. The options

available via the 8 screen buttons are:-

• Press [Shrink Pattern]. The pattern will be reduced by deleting each

second step in the pattern. This will delete any step whether empty

or lled. Effectively halves the pattern length.

• Adjusting [Length] will also reduce the pattern length. Any steps will

be hidden but will be restored if the pattern length is extended.

5. The [Undo] or [Redo] screen buttons can be used if required to restore

a previous state.

Duplicate Pattern

Original Pattern Affected Pattern

Every 2nd Step Deleted Resulting, Halved Pattern

Shrunk Pattern

Double the pattern length

Expand Pattern

Blank steps added after each step

Step 1

Step 1 Step 1 Step 1

Step 1 Step 1

Step 4

Step 33

Step 6 Step 6

Step 32

Step 5 Step 5

Step 32

Step 64

Step 2

Step 2 Step 2 Step 2

Step 3

Step 3 Step 3 Step 3

Step 2 Step 2

Step 5

Step 3 Step 3

Step 6

Step 34

Step 7 Step 7

Step 35

Step 8 Step 8

Step …

Step 4 Step 4 Step 4

Step …

Step 63

Step …

C5 40

----

P 25

C6 40

----

P 25 C6 40

----

P 25 C6 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25 C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

C6 40

----

P 25 C6 40

----

P 25

E5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25 C5 40

----

P 25

C6 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

B5 40

----

P 25 B5 40

----

P 25

E5 40

----

P 25 E5 40

----

P 25

NOTES

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Pattern Format

4.4 Copying and Pasting a Pattern.

Patterns can be copied and pasted between different pattern slots. This will

copy the entire pattern and its steps as well as the length conguration.

▌ COPYING AND PASTING A PATTERN

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ Page. Also accessible within the [Menu].

2. The options on pages 1 & 2 are required during this process. Press

[More] to toggle between the two pages of pattern options.

3. Press [Rec] to select recording mode and allow editing. Screen buttons

will be unavailable, shown dim, otherwise.

4. On pattern page 1, select the pattern to copy, Hold [Pattern] 1

Screen

button + (Up) or (Down). Example, select Pattern 1.

5. On pattern page 2, Press [Copy Pattern] Screen Button. The pattern is

copied to the clipboard.

6. On pattern page 1, select the pattern to paste into, Hold [Pattern] 1

Screen button, + (Up) or (Down). Example, select Pattern 2.

7. On pattern page 2, Press [Paste Pattern] Screen Button. The pattern is

pasted into the current pattern and will overwrite any existing data. It is

possible to continue to paste the pattern to other pattern slots.

8. The [Undo] or [Redo] screen buttons can be used if required to restore

a previous pattern state.

4.5 Inverting a Selection of Steps.

Patterns are created top to bottom and steps assigned in the step rows.

Steps once selected in a pattern can be inverted. This will reverse the order

in which the steps play. For example the rst step in the selection will play

last and vice versa.

▌ INVERTING A STEP RANGE IN A PATTERN

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ Page. Also accessible within the [Menu].

2. Ensure options page 2 is displayed. Press [More] to toggle between the

two pages of pattern options.

3. Press [Rec] to select recording mode and allow editing. Screen buttons

will be unavailable, shown dim, otherwise.

4. Navigate to the rst step. Press [Shift] + (Up) or (Down) to select the

sequence of steps and / or Press [Shift] + (Left) + (Right) to select steps

across tracks.

5. Press [Invert] Screen Button to reverse the order of the range of steps

selected. This reverses the vertical order of the steps. The steps remain

in their respective tracks.

6. The [Undo] or [Redo] screen buttons can be used if required to restore

a previous state.

Original Range

Selected Range 2 - 4 Bounded in Red

Inverted Range

Inverted Range 2-4 Bounded in red

Track 1 Track 1Track 2 Track 2

Step 1 Step 1

Step 2 Step 2

Step 3 Step 3

Step 4 Step 4

C6 40

----

P 25 C6 40

----

P 25

C6 40

----

P 25

C6 40

----

P 25

E5 40

----

P 25

C6 40

----

P 25 C6 40

----

P 25

E5 40

----

P 25

NOTES

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Pattern Format

4.6 Pattern Mode Page Layout Options.

Pattern and step editing is performed in ‘Pattern’ Mode, selected by

pressing the default assigned button [1] or using [Menu]. To edit steps,

select [Rec]. The pattern mode view can be changed in the cong options.

Track 1

– – – C5 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – C5 C4 D2 – – – – – – – – – – – –

– – – – – – C4 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –

Track 5Track 3 Track 7Track 2 Track 6Track 4 Track 8

Track 1

– – – – – –

C5 C5

1 2

– – – – – –

C5 C5

– – – – – –

Track 2

Track 1

– – – – – –

C5 C5

– – – – – –

C5 C5

– – – – – –

Track 2

Press (Up) or (Down) to navigate vertically in

the Tracker Mini grid. Cursor will wrap past the

end to the start when using arrow keys

Press [Shift] + [Insert] to reset the

cursor position to the start, step 1

Step Row

Green Play or

Red Rec Mode

Change the pattern info for the top bar in the

Cong settings: General > Pattern top info.

Top bar: Off, Tracks Only or additional Info

Switch to 8 Track view.

Displays a single element across all 8 tracks

[1] + [Note] - Displays all 8 tracks, with only the note parameters

[1] + [Instrument] - Displays all 8 tracks, with only the instrument parameters

[1] + [FX1] - Displays all 8 tracks, with only FX1 parameters

[1] + [FX2] - Displays all 8 tracks, with only FX2 parameters

Hold [1] + A combo of max 2 parameter buttons: Note, Instrument, FX1, FX2 to display

2 parameters per track across 8 tracks.

Press [1] to return to 4 tracks, all step parameters

To select a step

Press (Left) or (Right) to navigate

horizontally in the Tracker Mini grid

C3 04 ---- P-20

D3 04 ---- P-10

C4 12 ---- A 4

Pattern

1 1

C5 40 ---- P-25

C5 40 ----

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ----

P 25

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

C5 02 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- H-25 C5 40 ---- P-20

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

9 9

11 11

13 13

15 15

8 8

10 10

12 12

14 14

Length

Step Jump

Fill Preview Undo Redo More

Track 2 Track 3 Track 4Track 1

Pattern 1 0m:00s P1.008 1.Analog 3 18p

C3 04 ---- P-20

D3 04 ---- P-10

C4 12 ---- A 4

Pattern

1 1

C5 40 ---- P-25

C5 40 ----

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ----

P 25

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

C5 02 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- H-25 C5 40 ---- P-20

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

9 9

11 11

13 13

15 15

8 8

10 10

12 12

14 14

Length

Step Jump

Fill Preview Undo Redo More

Track 2 Track 3 Track 4Track 1

Pattern 1 0m:00s P1.008 1.Analog 3 18p

The ‘top down’ view can be changed

to ‘left right’ in the Cong settings;

General > Pattern Arrangement

▌ NAVIGATING THE PATTERN PAGE

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ Page. Also accessible within the [Menu].

2. The step cursor will display a green border with the selected step

parameter highlighted green in normal playback mode. This indicates

the step in focus and current playhead position.

3. To move the position vertically, Press (Up) or (Down). The selection will

scroll and will wrap at the end of the pattern back to the top.

4. To move the position horizontally across tracks, Press (Left) or (Right).

The selection will scroll across the 1-4 visible tracks and switch across

tracks 5-8 at the right of the page. This view is default.

5. Press [Shift] + (Up), (Down), (Left) and (Right) to select rather than just

navigate a range of steps.

6. To return the playhead / step selector to the top step 1 of the pattern,

Press [Shift] + [Insert] when the sequencer is stopped.

▌ CHANGING FROM 4 TO 8 TRACK VIEW

1. By default the pattern page display 4 tracks. This can be changed to

display 8 tracks with a various step options:-

• 8 Tracks with only Note parameter: Press [1] + [Note].

• 8 Tracks with Instrument parameter: Press [1] + [Instrument].

• 8 Tracks with only FX1 parameter: Press [1] + [FX1].

• 8 Tracks with only FX2 parameter: Press [1] + [FX2].

• 8 Tracks with 2 selected parameters: Press [1] + [P1] + [P2], where

‘P1’ and ‘P2’ are 2 from; [Note], [Instrument], [FX1], FX2].

• Revert to 4 track mode, Press [1]

2. This relies on page [1] being assigned as ‘Pattern’. This is set as the

default but can be changed in the conguration.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Pattern Format

▌ CHANGING BETWEEN VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL VIEW MODE

1. The default mode is for Tracker Mini to display patterns top to bottom in

a vertical arrangement. This is the traditional and expected view for

Tracker’s in general. This can be changed to an Horizontal left to right

view. This is less common but may suit people more accustomed to

more modern DAW arrangements.

2. Hold [Shift] + [4] to open the ‘Cong’ project conguration menu.

3. Ensure the left window is highlighted red i.e. in focus. Navigate windows

by pressing (Left) or (Right). Menu windows will automatically be

selected when pressing the relevant screen keys below the window to

navigate [Up] or [Down].

4. Press (Up) or (Down) to highlight with the bounding box over the

‘General’ option. Alternatively press the relevant screen keys below the

window to navigate [Up] or [Down].

5. Highlight red the General options window. Navigate windows by

pressing (Left) or (Right). Menu windows will automatically be selected

when pressing the relevant screen keys below the window to navigate

[Up] or [Down].

6. Press (Up) or (Down) to highlight with the bounding box over the

‘Pattern Arrangement’ option. Alternatively press the relevant screen

keys below the window to navigate [Up] or [Down].

7. To change the options between horizontal and vertical views, Press

[Change]. The parameter pop-up window listing the available options

will appear.

8. Press (Up) / (Down) or [Up] / [Down] Screen Buttons to highlight the

desired option.

• Vertical Revolver - Tracks scrolls wrap at the pattern end / start. The

page view will also show the pattern wrap.

• Vertical Original - Tracks scroll top to bottom and bottom to top.

View shows linear pattern.

• Horizontal - Track scrolls left to right and view is linear.

9. Press [Apply] - 6

from left screen button to conrm selection or

[Cancel] - 3

from left screen button to exit without changing.

10. The display will reect the selected option.

▌ CHANGING PATTERN TOP INFO DETAILS

1. The default mode is for Tracker Mini to display an information bar plus

the tracks at the top of the pattern display. This can be changed to give

more clarity to the Tracker Mini pattern grid.

2. Hold [Shift] + [4] to open the ‘Cong’ project conguration menu.

3. Ensure the left window is highlighted red i.e. in focus. Navigate windows

by pressing (Left) or (Right). Menu windows will automatically be

selected when pressing the relevant screen keys below the window to

navigate [Up] or [Down].

4. Press (Up) or (Down) to highlight with the bounding box the ‘General’

option. Alternatively press the relevant screen keys below the window to

navigate [Up] or [Down].

5. Highlight red the General options window. Navigate windows by

pressing (Left) or (Right). Menu windows will automatically be selected

when pressing the relevant screen keys below the window to navigate

[Up] or [Down].

6. Press (Up) or (Down) to highlight with the bounding box over the

‘Pattern Top Info’ option. Alternatively press the relevant screen keys

below the window to navigate [Up] or [Down].

7. To change between horizontal and vertical views, Press [Change]. The

parameter pop-up window listing the available options will appear.

8. Press (Up) / (Down) or [Up] / [Down] Screen Buttons to highlight the

desired option.

• Off - No information is displayed at the top of the page.

• Track names - Only display the track name information.

• Additional Info: Display tracks, and upper bar expanded information,

such as time, transport, pattern, instrument etc. This is default.

9. Press [Apply] - 6

from left screen button to conrm selection or

[Cancel] - 3

from left screen button to exit without changing.

10. The display will reect the selected option.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Pattern Format

▌ CHANGING THE PATTERN GRID VISUAL DIVIDERS

The pattern grid has a number of graphic guides as a visual aids when

sequencing steps into a pattern. This is by default set to divisions of 4

providing a visual on beat guide at rows 1, 5, 9 etc. These can be changed

in the ‘Cong’ menu settings.

1. Hold [Shift] + [4] to open the ‘Cong’ project conguration menu.

2. Navigate to ‘Project Settings’ option. Navigate windows by pressing

(Left) or (Right). Menu windows will also be automatically be selected

when pressing the relevant screen keys below the menu window to

navigate [Up] or [Down].

3. In the project setting options, central window, highlight ‘Pattern Divider’.

4. Press [Change] - 6

from Left Screen Button.

5. Press (Up) / (Down) or [Up] or [Down] Screen Buttons to highlight the

desired option between 1 - 16.

6. Press [Apply] - 6

from left screen button to conrm selection or

[Cancel] - 3

from left screen button to exit without changing.

7. The display will reect the new visual indicator divider bars.

Visual Dividers to aid step positioning.

Default shown = 4.

Pattern Divider.

Example = 3.

Pattern Divider.

Example = 7.

Pattern Divider Setting in ‘Cong’ Menu under ‘Project Settings’

Pattern

C5 40 ---- P-25

C5 M02 ----

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

P 25

-- ---

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

C5 02

C3 04

D3 04

C5 40

Length

Step Jump

Pattern 1

Pattern

C5 40 ---- P-25

C5 M02 ----

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

P 25

-- ---

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

C5 02

C3 04

D3 04

C5 40

Length

Step Jump

Pattern 1

Pattern

C5 40 ---- P-25

C5 M02 ----

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

P 25

-- ---

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- ---

C5 02

C3 04

D3 04

C5 40

Length

Step Jump

Pattern 1

▌ EDITING TRACK NAMES

Track names can be edited and changed to custom text. Track name length

is maximum 7 characters. The defaults are Track 1, Track 2, Track 3 etc but

can be set to more appropriate names such as drums, perc, bass etc.

1. Press [4] to select the Master. This consists of 3 pages and each is

cycled in turn by pressing [4] button. Page is displayed top bar, left side.

2. Navigate to page 2/3 - Track Mixer. All tracks are displayed in this view.

3. Press [Rec] and the editing mode will be toggled on or off. Set to on, as

indicated by the word ‘Edit’ in red at the bottom of each track and

representing the screen buttons per track.

4. Press the relevant screen button 1 - 8 for the track to edit. For example,

Press Screen Button for Track 1 - 1

Button on the left.

5. The Alpha numeric QWERTY keyboard will be displayed and enable the

default ‘Track 1’ name to be changed. Edit as per normal using the

QWERTY functions with the D-Pad navigation and screen button

commands. Maximum 7 characters available for track names.

6. Press [Save], 8

Screen button, to conrm and immediately save the

new name for the track.

7. Repeat step 4 - 6 for other tracks if required.

Play Rec

Insert Menu

Delete Copy

Press [Rec] to toggle the track name editor on or off on the Master Page

2/3. Press a screen button 1 - 8 to select the specic track to edit.

0.00 dB

Edit

0.00 dB

Edit

0.00 dB

Edit

0.00 dB

Edit

0.00 dB

Edit

0.00 dB

Edit

0.00 dB

Edit

0.00 dB

Edit

Drums PadPerc Track 7Bass Track 8Kick Lead

Track Mixer 2/3 0m:00s P1.008

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Pattern Format

4.7 Quick Start Step Creation.

Patterns are just empty containers and will require steps to be added to

create a beat of melody. A step is essentially a note, instrument (based on a

sample) and two effect slots. This section gives a quick start on step

composition before moving to more in depth coverage in a future section.

▌ ADDING STEPS IN A PATTERN

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ page. Also accessible from the [Menu].

2. To move the cursor position vertically, Press (Up) or (Down). And to

move the position horizontally across tracks Press (Left) or (Right).

Ranges can be selected using [Shift] + D-Pad navigation buttons.

3. Select recording mode, Press [Rec]. The steps selected will appear red

as opposed to green when in normal playback mode.

4. To add a step, Hold the dedicated step function note, instrument, FX1 or

FX2 button and set the step using the D-Pad navigation. Also the [+] / [-]

buttons can be used instead of the D-Pad.

• Hold [Note] + (Up), (Down), (Left), (Right) to navigate note selection.

Adds the highlighted note value to the step.

• Hold [Instrument] + (Up) or (Down). Adds the highlighted instrument

from the instrument list. This will require instruments to be available

in the instrument list. Default notes are also assigned.

• Hold [FX1] + (Up) or (Down). Adds the highlighted effect from the

effect list to the step.

• Hold [FX2] + (Up) or (Down). Adds the highlighted effect from the

effect list to the step. .

5. The centre (Enter) button on the D-Pad Navigator can then be used to

repeatedly apply the current step and settings in other step slots.

▌ EDITING EXISTING STEPS IN A PATTERN

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ page. Also accessible from the [Menu].

2. To move the position vertically, Press (Up) or (Down). To move the

position horizontally across tracks Press (Left) or (Right). Ranges can

be selected using [Shift] + D-Pad Buttons.

3. Select recording mode, Press [Rec]. The steps selected will appear red

as opposed to green when normal playback mode is set.

4. To edit a step, press the dedicated step function button i.e. [Note],

[Instrument], [FX1], [FX2] and the selection will highlight the parameter

in the step selection bounding box.

5. Use the (Up), (Down), (Left), (Right) Buttons or [+] and [-] to change the

selected step setting for the held option i.e. Note, Instrument etc.

▌ DELETING STEPS IN A PATTERN

1. Press [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ page. Also accessible from the [Menu].

2. To move the position vertically, Press (Up) or (Down). To move the

position horizontally across tracks, Press (Left) or (Right).

3. Ensure a note or instrument parameter is selected. Deleting when the

FX1 or FX2 parameter is selected will only delete the FX parameter

setting and not the full step. To delete MIDI Instruments the parameter,

specically [Note] or [Instrument] should be deleted.

4. Press [Delete]. The selected step or the selected step range will be

deleted from the pattern.

▌ INSERTING STEPS IN A PATTERN

1. Hold [1] to open the ‘Pattern’ page. Also accessible from the [Menu].

2. To move the position vertically, Press (Up) or (Down). To move the

position horizontally across tracks, Press (Left) or (Right).

3. Press [Insert]. A new empty step row is added and the selected step

and steps below are moved down.

The process of sequencing steps is the core

process in Tracker Mini pattern design. Steps

and patterns go hand in hand. The pattern

format section covered earlier explained the

general pattern creation, structure and general

navigation of patterns. Also the process of

adding and editing steps at a fundamental

level. This laid out the foundations for patterns.

This section goes further into the workow and

process of sequencing steps and takes a

deeper dive and more advanced view. The four

components of a step; Note, Instrument, FX1

and FX2 are explained in more detail, giving an

insight into what’s behind each one. The

multiple options in the process of working with

steps as well as the detailed explanations such

as how to create an instrument or what each

effect does are included. Steps can be used for

beats or melodies and with multiple tracks

used together, can create chords. The focus

here will be on the audio elements of steps.

MIDI steps and patterns will be covered

specically in more detail in a later section,

although a similar process is applied to creating

both audio or MIDI steps. The section has a

heavy focus on the process and techniques

associated with working with steps in patterns.

The included workow tools and tips will speed

up the process of creating patterns and making

music and help to become more comfortable in

using Tracker Mini.

Sequencing Steps

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

5.1 Dedicated Step Parameter Buttons.

A step is a building block which triggers events such as playing a note or

beat or activating a MIDI action and is used for creating patterns. Steps are

programmed across pattern rows which represent each of the eight

available tracks in the pattern sequence.

A step is a combination of 4 main components each of which has a

dedicated selection button:-

Note. This sets the pitch of the step and is important for creating

melodies or beats based on sample mapped drum hits.

Instrument. This is a combination of a sample and the parameters and

settings assigned to it. Also for setting MIDI Channel.

FX1. The rst effect slot where the modulation and audio effects can be

applied for the step.

FX2. The second effect slot where the modulation and audio effects can

be applied for the step.

P 25- -- -C5 40

Step Dedicated Parameter Buttons

Pattern page is selected by pressing [1] or from the [Menu] while the Note,

Instrument, FX1 and FX2 have dedicated buttons for editing the selected step.

The step selection box will show solid

colour on the selected option part.

Example: Note is shown highlighted here.

Parameters are colour coded in line with

the dedicated step function buttons

Note

+ Octave

Effect Type

+ Value

Instrument

Number or

MIDI

Effect Type

+ Value

FX1

FX2

Note

Instr

C5 40 ---- P 25

5.2 Process of Creating a Step

Steps are sequenced in the Tracker Mini each of which contains a Note,

Instrument, and two FX slot options. It is good practice to structure these

into tracks of relevance. For example kick drum on track 1, especially at the

starting point.

Pattern Format Set,

Instrument Pool Populated

Navigate to the rst step to

create / edit. It may help to

develop individual tracks rst

Select [Rec] Recording Mode.

Step selection box red.

Use [Rec] + [Play]

Live Recording to capture real

time steps and parameters

using an external controller.

Press [Play]

To play. Also Press [Rec] to

exit record mode.

Hold [Note] + [+] / [-]

To select the step note

Hold [FX2] + [+] / [-]

To select the effect

The D-Pad Navigator Pad (Up), (Down), (Left), (Right) buttons also can be used.

Hold [Instrument] + [+] / [-]

To select Instrument

Hold [FX2] + [+] / [-]

To select the effect

Repeat Cycle to add

more steps manually.

Use ‘Fill’ and ‘Step

Jump’ to assist with

populating multiple steps

Pre-Requisite Select First Step

Note FX1

Edit & Add

Instrument

Fill & Jump

FX2

Recording Mode

Live Recording Mode

Create More Steps /

Develop Other Tracks

Play

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

5.3 Recording Mode.

Steps are created by recording into the Pattern grid. There are two methods

of recording steps, rstly by manually programming steps at desired

intervals per track, some automated features will help in the workow. Also

real time live recording is possible using an external controller.

The selected step is navigated using the D-Pad navigation. An active step

will have at least one of the four; note, instrument, FX1, FX2 elements

shown. The currently selected step will have a green bounding box.

The selected step to edit in recording mode will be shown with a red

bounding selection box.

▌ TOGGLING RECORDING MODE ON/OFF

1. The default mode is for Tracker Mini to play patterns and the currently

selected step indicated by the green bounding box.

2. Press [Rec] to toggle between playback and recording mode. Recording

mode is required to create, edit and congure steps in a pattern. The

bounding box is indicated red when in recording mode.

3. The [+] and [-] buttons are essential edit functions in recording mode for

placing ‘work steps’. Any selected parameter, highlighted with a solid

colour, can be changed in recording mode using [+] & [-] Buttons. The

D-Pad navigation buttons will move the cursor within the pattern.

4. Hold the dedicated parameter button, Note, Instrument, FX1 or FX2 will

temporary select for choosing an option or quick tap to lock selection.

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

Rec

Press [Rec] to select recording mode, which allows editing of steps.

Pressing again reverts to normal play mode.

Green selection box: Normal playback mode.

Solid green box shows which parameter is selected using the dedicated

parameter selection buttons. Cant be edited in normal mode.

Red selection box: Recording mode, step editor.

Solid red box shows which parameter is selected using dedicated parameter

selection buttons and is therefore editable.

Quick Tap Dedicated Parameter Button to select specic parameter

Off

5.4 Manual Recording Steps.

Steps can be added manually in Pattern Mode by navigating to a location

and using one of several step entry button options. Pre-requisite is that the

project instrument list is pre-populated with sample / instrument options.

▌ QUICK START TO MANUALLY ENTER AND EDIT STEPS

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Select the target step to edit. Use the D-Pad navigator (Up), (Down) to

scroll top to bottom i.e. step row 1. Press (Left), (Right) to select a track.

The step should be highlighted with the green bounding box.

3. Press [Rec] to switch to recording mode. Recording mode is red.

4. Press [Preview] - 5

Screen Button to listen to the step audio.

5. For Note Steps use the most appropriate option to t your workow.

Ensure the note element is selected, tap [Note] to select.

• To set the default note, Hold [Note] + [+] / [-] or the D-Pad Navigator

buttons. The Note matrix will appear for the note to be selected.

• Press centre D-Pad Navigator (Enter) button. The default note will

be placed in the current step and the cursor will jump to the next

‘Step Jump’ interval. Holding (Enter) will repeat step placement.

• Press any [+] button to place a dened ‘C5’ note into an empty step.

The cursor position will remain on the current step. On existing

notes, the outer [+] / [-] buttons will change in octave increments

and inner [+] / [-] buttons will change the note in semitone intervals.

• Press the outer [-] button on an empty step to place a dened ‘OFF’

Command into the note step.

• Press the inner [-] button on an empty step to place a dened ‘FAD’

Command into the step note. Press again to cycle to place ‘CUT’

and again to select ‘OFF’.

6. Hold [Instrument] + [+] / [-] to select from the instrument list. Also with

instrument already selected, [+] / [-] can be used to change the

instrument. Tap [Instrument] instead of holding to lock the mode.

7. Hold [FX1] + [+] / [-] to select the FX from the effect list. Also with [FX1]

already selected, [+] / [-] will change the effect. Same process is applied

for [FX2]. Tap [FX1] or [FX2] instead of holding to lock the mode.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Manual Step Entry

Rec

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

Track 1 Track 4Track 3Track 2

Recording mode on to edit steps in the pattern

Step Jump only

with (Enter)

Steps can be added individually.

Example: Hold [Note] + Navigate with (Up), (Down),

(Left), (Right) to select a note from the note grid.

Subsequent steps are recorded in when pressing the

D-Pad navigator (Enter) button. This will record

iteratively the selected note parameter into rows

dened by the ‘Step jump’ intervals.

Pressing the (Enter) button in recording mode will record the note and instrument into subsequent steps.

This is applied when the note or instrument which is selected and not applied for FX parameters.

Note Selected, C5.

Instrument Selected, Instrument #3.

FX1 Selected, Effect not applied.

FX2 Selected, Volume = 50.

Quick Tap Dedicated Parameter Button to lock the selection e.g. [Instrument] for editing

(Enter)

(Right)

[+]

Empty Step: Place a ‘C5’ note

Existing Note: Increment an octave

Empty Step: Place a ‘C5’ note

Existing Note: Increment a semitone

Empty Step: Place a ‘FAD’ command

Existing Note: Decrement a semitone

Empty Step: Place an ‘OFF’ command

Existing Note: Decrement an octave

[-]

[+]

[-]

D-Pad Navigator for moving around the pattern. Master [+] / [-] for editing of step parameter values.

(Down)

(Up)

(Left)

Select multiple step rows with [Shift] + (Up) or (Down).

Also across multiple tracks [Shift] + (Left) + (Right)

On the top row [Shift] + (Up) will select all steps in the

track. Press [Shift] + (Up) + (Up) to select all steps.

Edits to any existing parameters can be made

simultaneously, but only If a parameter is already set.

These changes will be relative to the original value.

Unassigned elements of a step will remain empty.

Step Jump

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 03

----

V 50

C5 03

----

V 50

C5 03

----

V 50

C5 03

----

V 50

D6 03

----

V 10 D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

--- ---

V 50

V 30

Steps can also be edited collectively. Select a range within a track and/or

across tracks to edit the selected range.

▌ MANUALLY EDITING A RANGE OF STEPS

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Select the target step to edit. Use (Up), (Down) on the D-Pad Navigator

or [+] / [-] to scroll top to bottom. Press (Left), (Right) to select a track.

The step should be highlighted with the green bounding box.

3. Hold [Shift] + (Left) or (Right) to select a range across tracks and Hold

[Shift] + (Up) or (Down) to select rows and expand the selected range.

4. To select all steps for an individual track, select the top row step on the

track to select, then Press [Shift] + (Up).

5. To select all steps in the pattern, select the top row step on any track,

then Press [Shift] + (Up) & (Up).

6. Press [Rec] to switch to recording mode. The step bounding box will

turn red and allow editing of the collective step range.

7. Press [Preview], 5

Screen button, to play only the selected range.

8. The [+] / [-] buttons will now change all existing parameter values for the

selected steps when in recording mode.

9. Select a parameter to edit. Only existing parameters can be changed.

Any empty parameter slots will not change and remain open.

• To change Note: Hold [Note] + Use the D-Pad Navigator to select a

note. Tap (Enter), centre button to replace any existing note on all

selected steps. If required, Tap [Note] to lock to retain the mode.

• To change Instrument: Hold [Instrument] + (Up) (Down) or use the

[+] / [-] buttons to replace existing instruments to the new

instrument. If required, Tap [Instrument] to lock to retain the mode.

• FX1 and FX2 Cannot be changed when a range is selected.

8. Press [+] / [-] to adjust the value of the selected parameter within the

step range. The selected parameter will be indicated in solid coloured

red. When adjusting values simultaneously they will each change

relative to the original value including any FX Values.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

▌ COPYING AND PASTING STEPS AND STEP RANGES

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Navigate to select a Step. If required Press [Shift] + (Left) or (Right) and

[Shift] + (Up) or (Down) to select a range of tracks and rows.

3. Press [Rec] to switch to recording mode. The step bounding box will

turn red and allow copying of the step or collective step range.

4. Press [Copy] button. The selected step or step range will be copied to

the clipboard.

5. Relocate the cursor to the rst step in which to paste by using (Up),

(Down), (Left) or (Right). The top left step is the anchor for a range.

6. Press [Shift] + [Copy] button to paste. The copied step or step range will

be pasted from the clipboard and into the selected step or the relative

range. Undo and Redo can be used if needed.

▌ DELETING STEPS AND STEP RANGES

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Navigate to select a Step. If required, Press [Shift] + (Left) or (Right)

and [Shift] + (Up) or (Down) to select a range of tracks and rows.

3. Press [Rec] to switch to recording mode. The step bounding box will

turn red and allow copying of the step or collective step range.

4. Press [Delete] button. The selected step, if note or instrument is

selected, will be deleted. If only the FX1 or FX2 is selected then the

effect alone is deleted.

5. MIDI channel values are not deleted when deleting a note. This can be

deleted by selected the instrument parameter when deleting.

▌ COPY / PASTE AN ENTIRE PATTERN

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Hold [1] + [Copy] to copy the current pattern to the clipboard.

3. Select a new pattern, Press [1] + (Up) or (Down)

4. Hold [1] + [Shift] + [Copy] to paste into the current pattern.

5.5 Step Jump Recording Multiple Steps

When steps are added using the D-Pad (Enter) button the active step is

automatically advanced to the next step when complete. The intervals for

this are based on the ‘Step Jump’ feature. This is useful for creating

patterns with dened intervals and speeding up workow. Step jump does

not operate when using the [+] / [-] step entry method.

Step Jump Examples

Track 1 Track 2

Recording mode on to edit steps in the pattern

[Enter]

Step Jump

The selected step will not

advance and will remain at the

same step position

The selected step will

advance automatically to

select the next step position

The selected step will

advance four steps forward. In

this example selecting the

next ‘on beat’ position.

The Step Jump setting is useful when populating specic intervals, for example each on beat step or

each off beat step or alternate steps for percussion. This speeds up the workow and helps with

creating interesting sequences.

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

C5 40

----

P 25

D5 40

----

P 25

D5 40

----

P 25

D5 40

----

P 25

D5 40

----

P 45

D5 40

----

P 45

D5 40

----

P 45

Rec

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

5.6 Fill Recording Multiple Steps

The ‘Fill’ function allows a more elaborate and detailed population of step

ranges. This speeds up workow by helping to create batches of steps with

dened criteria automatically applied. Also Fill is a very creative tool for

generating melodies and beats and experimenting with patterns.

▌ ACCESSING THE FILL UTILITY

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Press [Rec] to switch to recording mode. The step bounding box will

turn red and allow editing of steps.

3. Select a range of steps: Hold [Shift] + (Up), (Down), (Left) or (Right)

4. Ensure the step parameter to populate is selected: Press [Note],

[Instrument], [FX1] or [FX2]. The parameter will be highlighted solid red.

5. Press [Fill], 4

Screen button. This will open the Fill utility pop-up

window and be ready to select the criteria to apply to the selected step

range and its selected parameter.

Range To Fill

Fill will populate a selected range of steps

based on the ll criteria applied.

Example: Illustration shows 2 Tracks, 4 rows.

Fill Parameter

The selected parameter will be the

element to be lled.

Example: Illustration shows Note selected

It is possible to ll ranges that are already containing steps, contain empty steps or mix of both. The ll

operates in the range and ignores the Step Jump parameter.

Track 4Track 3

D6 03

----

V 10 D6 01

----

V 20

E6 03

----

D5 03

----

D6 01

----

V 10

C6 01

----

V 20

----

--- ---

V 50

V 30

▌ ENTERING STEPS WITH STEP JUMP

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Navigate to select a Step.

3. Press [Rec] to switch to recording mode. The step bounding box will

turn red and allow steps to be added.

4. Hold [Step Jump], 3

Screen button + Press [+] / [-]. Set the value to the

step jump interval required. The Inner [+] / [-] buttons change in

increments of 1 and the outer buttons in increments of 10.

5. Pressing the (Enter) D-Pad button will enter a step and advance the

active step by the value set in the ‘Step Jump’ setting.

6. Continue to press (Enter) to add more steps and advance by the set

interval or edit the current step manually.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Fill Utility Window

The window layout is similar for the step range and parameters selected.

However the content and features for ll will change depending on the

context of the selection and the options chosen. A typical Fill window is

shown below with a summary of common features. The Fill utility is mainly

controlled using the dynamic screen buttons under the Tracker Mini screen.

To access Fill:-

Press [Fill] - Screen Button, when in [Rec] Mode of the pattern page [1].

Sequencing Steps

Example of using a basic Fill

As a quick start introduction to creating lls and example to populate an

empty range with notes followed by lling the FX1 for the series of notes

with a pan variation effect. This will play a percussion segment,

▌ CREATING A NOTE FILL

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Press [Instrument] and select a percussive sound. The ‘606-ClosedHat’

sample, numbered instrument ‘6’, has been loaded into the project

instrument list and will be used for this example.

3. Press [Rec] to switch to recording mode. The step bounding box will

turn red and allow editing of steps.

4. Select a range of empty steps: Hold [Shift] + (Up), (Down), (Left) or

(Right). For this example select 8 step rows on a single track. The

option for selecting multiple rows and tracks is possible.

5. Ensure the notes step parameter is selected in the pattern range

selected: Press [Note], which will be highlighted solid red.

6. Press [Fill], 4

Screen button. This will open the Fill utility pop-up

window.

7. Press [Where?], 1

Screen button. Repeat presses will cycle through

the options. Also, with the ‘Where?’ section highlighted, (Up), (Down) or

[+] / [-] will scroll through and select options.

Dynamic area of 5 features containing the criteria specically required for 1) Parameter

selected, 2) Step range selected and 3) Options chosen in ‘Where’ & ‘Fill Type’.

Example Illustration shows a range of notes selected with the ‘note’ and ‘constant’ selections.

Ensure a range of steps is selected and the step parameter also selected before opening

the Fill utility. This range and parameter will be what determines the ll application.

Where?

Option of where to apply the ll

within the selected step range.

Example: Note would apply a note

ll to all steps containing a note.

Fill Type

Option of how to apply the parameter

within the selected step range.

Example: Constant would apply a

constant note value C2 into the range.

Fill

Activates the ll command.

Applies dened criteria into the

selected range.

Cancel

Exit without

applying.

Where? Scale Fill Type CancelNote

Fill

Fill Notes

Note

Chromatic

Constant

No Note

Minor

From-To

Major

Random

No FX

Dorian

Random

Lyd Major

Each

Lyd Minor

Where? Scale Fill Type CancelNote

Fill

Fill Notes

Note

Chromatic

Constant

No Note

Minor

From-To

Major

Random

No FX

Dorian

Random

Lyd Major

Each

Lyd Minor

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

8. Select in the bounding box ‘No Note’. This option will select all steps

that do not have a note set. As the selected range is empty all 8 steps

will be lled with this option.

9. Press [Scale] - 3

Screen Button. Repeat presses will cycle through the

options. Also the (Up), (Down) or [+] / [-] will scroll through and select

options. Select ‘Chromatic’. As this is a percussion instrument the scale

is less important.

10. Press [Fill Type] - 4

Screen Button. Repeat presses will cycle through

the options. Select ‘Constant’. As this is a percussion pattern the

instrument does not require scale or note ranges so constant will repeat

the note.

11. Press [Note] - 5

Screen Button. Repeat presses will cycle through the

options. Also the (Up), (Down) or [+] / [-] will scroll through and select

options. Set to C5, the root note for the sample.

12. Press [Fill], 8

Screen button. This will activate the ll command and

populate the selected range.

The default note value is C5 which plays a sample at its original pitch value. The rst slice of

a beat slice sample will be triggered using note C2.

Track 4 Track 4 Track 4Track 3

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 01

----

V 20

D6 01

----

V 20

D6 01

----

V 20

---- ------- ---

E6 03

----

D5 03

----

--- ---

V 50

V 30

C5 06

---- ----

C5 06

---- P-50

C5 06

---- ----

C5 06

---- P-36

C5 06

---- ----

C5 06

---- P-22

C5 06

---- ----

C5 06

---- P -8

C5 06

---- ----

C5 06

---- P 7

C5 06

---- ----

C5 06

---- P 21

C5 06

---- ----

C5 06

---- P 50

C5 06

---- ----

C5 06

---- P 35

Note Fill FX Fill

▌ ADDING THE PAN VARIATION USING FILL

1. Following from the previous example; In Pattern Mode [1] with [Rec]

On, ensure the previous step range is still selected.

2. Press [FX2]. This selects the effect column FX2 which is highlighted

solid red.

3. Press [Fill] Screen Button. This will open the Fill utility pop-up window.

The display will now be different as the ll utility is now FX, not Note Fill.

4. Press [Where?] - First Screen button. Repeat presses will cycle through

the options. Also the (Up), (Down) or [+] / [-] will scroll through and

select options.

5. Select in the bounding box ‘Note’. This option will select all steps that

have a note set. This is effectively the range of notes recently created.

6. Press [Fx Type], 3

Screen button. Repeat presses will cycle through

the options. Also the (Up), (Down) or [+] / [-] will scroll through and

select options. Select ‘Panning’, as the effect to ll into the selected

range.

7. Press [Fill Type], 4

Screen button. Repeat presses will cycle through

the options. Select ‘From-To’ to allow a range of pan values to be lled.

8. Press [From], 5

Screen button. Press (Up), (Down) or [+] / [-] to set the

value. Set this to -50.

9. Press [To], 6

Screen button. Press (Up), (Down) or [+] / [-] to set the

value. Set this to 50.

10. Press [Fill], 8

Screen Button. This will activate the ll command and

populate the selected range. This will create a percussive pattern which

will pan left to right in the stereo image. The values are automatically

assigned in equal intervals across the range.

Where? Fx Type

Fill Type CancelFrom

-50

Fill

Fill Fx 1

Note

Random FX

Constant

No Note

None

From-To

Off

Random

No FX

Volume

Random

Panning

Each

Micro Tun

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

Fill Utility Generic Page Parameter - Where.

The Fill utility will present options respective to the selected step parameter.

If for example an FX parameter is selected in a range, then the ll utility will

represent FX Fills. Some elements like ‘Where?’ and ‘Fill Type’ are generic.

The ‘Where?’ option determines where in the selected step range the ll steps and dened

parameters will be placed. This will ll new steps into the steps in the range which are empty,

already lled or both depending on the selected option.

Where?

Where? Step

Scale Fill Type CancelNote

Fill

Fill Notes

Euclidean

Chromatic

Constant

No Note

Minor

From-To

Major

Random

No FX

Dorian

Random

Lyd Major

Each

Lyd Minor

Option Sub-Option Description

Note -

Will populate only steps in the selected range where a

note already exists, overwriting the original value.

No Note -

Will populate only steps in the selected range where no

note exists, ie blank note steps

FX -

Will populate only steps in the selected range where an FX

parameter already exists, overwriting the original value.

No FX -

Will populate only steps in the selected range where no FX

parameter exists, ie blank FX steps

Random -

Will populate steps in the selected range randomly for both

existing and blank steps. Density is a related option.

Random Density

Density parameter controls, in percentage how much of

the range is lled when the ‘Random’ option is selected.

Each -

Populates steps in the range with a dened step interval

which ranges from 1-32. Step is a related option.

Each Step

Step parameter controls the intervals of evenly distributed

step lls when the ‘Each’ option is selected

Euclidean -

Generates rhythmic patterns within the range based on the

population of 1-32 events. Event is a related option.

Euclidean Event

Events determine how the steps and intervals are

generated with respect to the selected step length.

Euclidean Patterns

Euclidean patterns are a more creative ll function. While the other options

perform a population based on structure, Euclidean option aims to be more

creative in generating musical sequences. Euclidean patterns are

generated based on a mathematical model where the steps and intervals

determine a pattern beat. Tracker Mini uses ‘events’ and the step length to

calculate the steps and intervals.

Consider the following formula as rough guide for Euclidean lled patterns.

Steps will be ‘rounded’ to the nearest step location to spread as ‘evenly’ as

possible within the event and length constraints.

Examples:

Euclidean Formula = Step Length / Event

8 Steps in the Length,

Event = 4.

4 Steps in the Length,

Event = 3.

8 Steps in the Length,

Event = 5.

5 Steps in the Length,

Event = 2.

8 Steps in the Length,

Event = 7.

3 Steps in the Length,

Event = 2.

Track 4

---- ------- ---

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10 D6 03

----

V 10 D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

D6 03

----

V 10

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

Fill Utility Generic Page Parameter - Fill Type.

The ‘Fill Type’ option is another generic parameter in the Fill Utility and

concentrates on range of ll values.

Option Sub-Option Description

Constant -

Populates the steps applied with a xed singular

parameter value as stated with Note, Instrument or FX

Constant

Note,

Instrument

or FX

Sets the parameter value to be applied when lling

steps. This will differ depending on Note, Instrument, FX

From-To

Populates the steps applied with multiple parameter

values distributed across the dened range

From-To From

Starting point for the parameter value range which will

be used to ll the steps range.

From-To To

End point for the parameter value range which will be

used to ll the steps range.

Random

Populates the steps applied with multiple random

parameter values distributed across the dened range

Random From

Starting point for the parameter value range which will

be used to randomly ll the steps range.

Random To

End point for the parameter value range which will be

used to randomly ll the steps range.

The ‘Fill Type’ option operates on the parameter value and determines how the ll parameter

is applied into the selected step range. This will ll the parameter as an individual repeated

element, will be based on a range of values or will randomise the step parameters.

Fill Type

Where? Step

Scale Fill Type CancelNote

Fill

Fill Notes

Euclidean

Chromatic

Constant

No Note

Minor

From-To

Major

Random

No FX

Dorian

Random

Lyd Major

Each

Lyd Minor

Scale Scale Label

Chromatic Chromatic

Minor Minor

Major Major

Dorian Dorian

Lydian Major Lyd Maj

Lydian Minor Lyd Min

Locrian Random

Phrygian Phrygian

Phrygian Dominant PhrygDom

Mixolydian Mixlydian

Melodic Minor Melo Min

Harmonic Minor Harm Min

BeBop Major BeBopMaj

BeBop Dorian BeBopDor

BeBop Mixolydian BeBopMix

Blues Minor Blues Min

Blues Major Blues Maj

Pentatonic Minor Penta Min

Pentatonic Major Penta Maj

Hungarian Minor Hung Min

Scale Scale Label

Ukranian Ukranian

Marva Marva

Todi Todi

Whole Tone Wholetone

Diminished Dim

Super Locrian SLocrian

Hirajoshi Hirajoshi

In Sen In Sen

Yo Yo

Iwato Iwato

Whole Half WholeHalf

Kumoi Kumoi

Overtone Overtone

Double Harmonic DoubleHarm

Indian Indian

Gypsy Minor GypsyMin

Neapolitan Major NeapoMaj

Neapolitan Minor NeapoMin

Enigmatic

Not used for Fill

Fill Notes

Filling a selected range will also be based on the parameter selected. When

the step range is selected the ll parameter options will reect the

parameter selected in the range.

Where? Scale Fill Type CancelNote

Fill

Fill Notes

Note

Chromatic

Constant

No Note

Minor

From-To

Major

Random

No FX

Dorian

Random

Lyd Major

Each

Lyd Minor

When Notes are selected the note scale will be available for the notes

that will be lled into the range. The notes will be constant, random or

between the from-to range.

Fill Notes

Track 4

---- ------- ---

C2 02

----

P-50

C2 02

----

P 50

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

Fill Instruments

When the instrument parameter is selected in the range, the ll will apply

instrument lls. This is based on the project instrument pool.

Fill FX

When either of the 2 FX parameters is selected in the range, ll will apply

FX lls. This is based on the effects FX list available within Tracker Mini.

Where? Fill Type Cancel

Instrument

Fill

Fill Instruments

Note Constant 606 Kick

InstX

No Note

From-To 606 K2

InstY

Random Sample1

InstZ

No FX

Random

Each

Where? Fx Type

Fill Type CancelFrom

-50

Fill

Fill Fx 1

Note

Random FX

Constant

No Note

None

From-To

Off

Random

No FX

Volume

Random

Panning

Each

Micro Tun

When Instruments are selected the instrument pool for the project is

presented. It is also possible with From-To or Random Fill Type to

populate the steps with multiple instruments across a variety of steps.

When any of the two FX are selected the Tracker Mini effect list is

presented as ‘Fx Type’. The selected effect character is shown under the

name. It is also possible with From-To or Random ‘Fill Type’ to populate

the range of steps with variations for the FX value setting.

Fill Instruments

Track 4

---- ------- ---

C2 02

----

P-50

C2 02

----

P 50

Track 4

---- ------- ---

C2 02

----

P-50

C2 02

----

P 50

5.7 Live Recording Steps with an External Controller

Live recording offers an alternative to manual recording when programming

steps into a sequence and when using an external MIDI Controller. Manual

step recording is useful building complex and precise melodies and

arrangements. Live recording is good when integrating Tracker Midi into a

MIDI system for more natural sequences. As always this will be based on

individual taste and a t to personal workow preferences.

Live recording allows steps to be placed in real time using an external

controller while the sequencer loops to record multiple cycles of steps.

Live Recording Considerations:-

• An external MIDI keyboard controller should be connected to

Tracker Mini in order to to play and record live.

• It is often useful to set the metronome to on, found in the Cong

menu when live recording to aid the timing.

• Recordings can be edited afterwards using the editing tools and

process as described with manual recording. Live recording is

useful to grab quick sequences and edit for accuracy afterwards.

• The habit of arming tracks is helpful. Armed tracks can be recorded.

By default tracks will shift recording to the next right track step if the

active step being recorded coincides with an existing step.

• Quantization settings are in the cong menu under ‘Recording

options’. Micro moves, slightly nudge and offset the note timing and

can also be live recorded.

Tip: The technique of reducing the project tempo for live recording can be helpful

in capturing more precise musical and rhythmic patterns at a slower rate. Turn the

tempo back to it’s normal setting once the pattern has been recorded.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

▌ REAL TIME LIVE RECORDING A PATTERN

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Hold [Instrument] + (Up), (Down) or [+] / [-] to scroll through and select

options. Select the instrument to record. The Notes will be live recorded

from the incoming MIDI keyboard.

3. Press [Rec] + [Play] to start live recording mode. The sequencer will

start immediately or after a count in of 4 if ‘Pre roll’ is set on.

4. Play the external MIDI keyboard controller. Notes are recorded along

with a ‘Note Off’ value.

5. Steps will be recorded into the current track. Notes will not be

overdubbed. Any recording that coincides with an existing note will by

default be recorded into the step row on the next track right. This

behaviour is dependant on arming of tracks.

6. Press [Rec] to leave recording mode but to continue playing.

7. Press [Play] to stop playback.

▌ PREPARING FOR LIVE RECORDING

A number of settings are available when recording live. These are optional

depending on circumstances.

• Set the Metronome: [Menu] > Cong > Metronome: State On.

• Set the Pre roll count in: [Menu] > Cong > Metronome: Pre roll On.

• Set Quantize: [Menu] > Cong > General > Recording Options

• Arm or Disarm a track to allow recording:-

Hold [Shift] + [Rec] + Screen Button to toggle arm/disarm per track.

Note that only arming the target track to record to will avoid steps

being recorded to adjacent tracks when steps are occupied.

• Ensure the Note parameter is highlighted which will allow recording

steps. If the Instrument or FX is highlighted by default, then these

will be recorded.

• Hold [Instrument] + [+] / [-] to set a default instrument to record.

▌ SETTING QUANTIZE RECORDING OPTIONS

1. Hold [Menu] and with D-Pad navigation buttons, select ‘Cong’ options.

2. In the left window, highlight ‘General’. Use the screen, D-Pad

navigation or [+] / [-] buttons to scroll menu.

3. Press (Right) to select the ‘General’ sub menu option window and scroll

to select ‘Recording Options’. Use the screen, D-Pad Navigator or the

[+] / [-] buttons to scroll menu. Press [Change] screen button to edit.

This will determine the quantize for recording:-

• Only Notes: Quantize notes only.

• Microtiming: Will record a nudge or offset as it is played by

recording as a ‘Micro-move’ FX value in the step. Delete these FX to

revert to quantized values.

• Velocity: Use an external MIDI Keyboard to record in real time

velocity values. Velocity is recorded as an FX value.

• Microtiming + Velocity. Record into both FX the xed velocity and

real time microtiming values.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

5.8 Note Steps

One of the four components of a step event is a Note. This may be a

musically scaled note or a note assigned to a sample or slice. Essentially

note controls a single note pitch in the step event for the instrument. The

default note value C5 refers to the original sample pitch. C5 is therefore a

default note assigned from the ‘Note’ applied. When using a Beat Sliced

instrument, the rst slice played is assigned as C2.

Note Summary

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

Note parameter has a dedicated

button when working in the pattern.

Note is the rst parameter in the step

event and is highlighted when selected

Note grid is used to select a note value for the step event. Hold

[Note] + D-Pad Buttons or [+] / [-] to choose a note. Press [+] / [-]

to adjust existing note when the step is selected.

Lowest Note

Chromatic

Scale shown - default

The notes value are mapped across the note grid. Starting at C3 bottom left, by

default and top right, at B6 to C6 top left. This therefore covers four octaves.

The Note selected from the note grid can then be placed, repeatedly into steps using

the D-Pad Navigator (Enter) button.

Note

C5 02 V 10 P 25

C6 E6 A6C#6 F#6F6 A#6D6 G6 B6D#6 G#6

C5 E5 A5C#5 F#5F5 A#5D5 G5 B5D#5 G#5

C4 E4 A4C#4 F#4F4 A#4D4 G4 B4D#4 G#4

C3 E3 A3C#3 F#3F3 A#3D3 G3 B3D#3 G#3

▌ DETAILED APPLICATION OF A NOTE VALUE TO A STEP EVENT

1. Press [1] to select the pattern mode page.

2. Select a blank or existing step event.

3. Press [Note] to ensure the note parameter is selected in the step event.

This is a short press. Holding [Note] will display the note grid.

4. Select recording mode, Press [Rec]. The steps selected will appear red

as opposed to green when in normal playback mode.

5. For placement of Note Steps several methods exist:-

• To set the default note, Hold [Note] + [+] / [-] or the D-Pad Navigator

buttons. The Note grid will appear for the note to be selected. The

highlighted note in the grid will be the chosen default.

• Press centre D-Pad (Enter) button. The default note will be placed in

the current step and the cursor will jump to the next step ‘Step

Jump’ interval. Holding (Enter) will repeat the step placement with

the same note until the (Enter) button is released.

• Press any [+] button to place a dened ‘C5’ note into an empty step.

The default note selected prior does not reect in this placement

method. The cursor position will remain on the current step.

• Press the outer [-] button on an empty step to place a dened ‘OFF’

Command into the note step.

• Press the inner [-] button on an empty step to place a dened ‘FAD’

Command into the step note. Press again to cycle to place ‘CUT’

and again to select ‘OFF’.

6. For editing notes within existing steps:-

• Press (Enter) to overwrite an existing note with the previously

selected note. Instrument is unaffected.

• On existing notes, the outer [+] / [-] buttons will change in octave

increments and inner [+] / [-] buttons will change the note in

semitone intervals.

7. Notes will be added, displayed with teal coloured text. New notes are

always added to an empty step along with the currently selected

instrument, coloured yellow. On existing steps, the note is changed and

existing instrument retained.

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Polyphony & Chords

Each track in Tracker Mini can handle one voice which can play multiple

notes, but not simultaneously. To create chords, multiple tracks would be

used when each track represents a note. A triad would therefore need 3

tracks to play the chord.

Tracks can be rendered to a new audio sample and reduce the tracks used.

This re-sampling method can also be used to render into an audio le when

FX slots are full.

▌ RENDERING TRACKS TO AUDIO CHORDS

1. Press [1] to select the pattern mode page and Press [Rec] to select

record edit mode.

2. Hold [Shift] + (Up), (Down), (Left), (Right) to select the range to render.

For example, select across all the tracks making up the chord and

optionally select the pattern duration of 16 steps

3. Press [More]. The 8

Screen Button to select more pattern options.

4. Press [Render Selection], the 1

Screen Button.

5. The naming page appears. A name can be edited i.e. name of chord or

press [Auto Name], 5

Screen Button to automatically apply a name.

6. When the name is entered, Press [Render & Load], 7

Screen Button.

This option will not only render the audio but also automatically load the

sample into the instrument list. The pattern will halt playback if playing.

7. When the le has been ‘exported’, the instrument list will open ready to

preview or select the sample exported.

8. Press [1], to return to the pattern page. Now replace the instrument on a

track with the rendered chord sample. Ensure the note is set to the

same default for the sample playback, example C5.

9. Remove the other track samples to free them up.

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

Track 1

…

Track 2 Track 3

C5 02

- -- -

P 25 E5 02

- -- -

P 25 G5 02

- -- -

P 25

Special Note Commands

Three special note commands can be applied instead of the actual note

value. These are not used for applying a note sound, but are used for

controlling how a note ends. These include CUT - Immediately silences the

audio, FAD - Fades out audio gradually and OFF - Triggers Note Off for the

envelope and starts the release phase.

To access these options, on an empty step, use the Inner and Outer [-]. The

Inner [-] will place a ‘FAD’ message and additional presses of [-] will then

change to ‘CUT’ and ‘OFF’. The Outer [-] will place an ‘OFF’ message. On

an existing step, the note can be edited further if required to create notes or

note messages using [+] / [-].

FAD - Fade.

Will gradually reduce the audio sound and fade it

out. Also will turn MIDI Notes off.

CUT - Cut.

Will immediately stop the audio sound. Also will

turn MIDI Notes off.

OFF - Off.

Will act as ‘Note-Off’ and trigger the release phase

of the envelope to reduce the sound.

FAD 02

- -- -

v 45

CUT 02

- -- -

v 45

OFF 02

- -- -

v 45

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

5.9 Instrument Step Parameters

Each step event has an instrument which is based on a sample, either raw

or edited or formed into a granular or wavetable instrument. Any instrument

added to the 48 instrument pool is available to be added to a step.

Instrument Summary

The default note value is C5 which plays a sample at its original pitch value. The rst slice of

a beat slice sample instrument with be triggered at C2.

Hold [Instrument] + D-Pad Navigator Buttons or [+] / [-] to

choose an instrument from the list. Also use [+] / [-] to scroll and

select, the outer buttons scrolling in larger increments.

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

Instrument parameter has a dedicated

button when working in the pattern.

Instrument is the second parameter in the

step event and is highlighted when selected

While holding [Instrument], the pop-up window will

display the available instrument list where the

selection can be made to load to the step event.

While holding [Instrument], the pop-up window will

display the available instrument list where the

selection can be made to load to the step event.

Instr

C5 02 V 10 P 25

▌ DETAILED APPLICATION OF AN INSTRUMENT TO A STEP

1. Press [1] to select the pattern mode page.

2. Select an empty or existing step event.

3. Press [Instrument] to ensure the instrument parameter is selected in the

step event. This is a short press. Holding the button will display the

instrument list.

4. Select recording mode, Press [Rec]. The steps selected will appear red

as opposed to green when in normal playback mode.

5. For placement of instruments to empty steps several methods exist:-

• Press (Enter) to place a note which will also place the current

instrument at the same time.

• Hold [Instrument] till list appears then release. This will place the

current instrument into the step.

• Hold [Instrument] + (Up) or (Down) to select from the instrument list.

A default ‘C5’ note is also added to an empty step.

• Hold [Instrument] + [+] / [-] to scroll in small or large increments and

select an instrument from the list. A default ‘C5’ note is also added

to an empty step.

6. For editing an instrument within an existing step:-

• Hold [Instrument] until list appears then release. This will place the

current instrument into the step.

• Hold [Instrument] + (Up) or (Down) to select from the instrument list.

• Hold [Instrument] + [+] / [-] to scroll in small or large increments and

select an instrument from the list.

5. The instrument will be added, displayed with yellow coloured text.

Instruments are always added with a note. Instruments cannot be

added when a note message ‘OFF’, ‘FAD’ or ‘CUT’ exists.

Render

Selection

1 1

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

C5 02 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- H-25

C4 12 ---- A 4

C5 40 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- P-25

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

9 9

11 11

13 13

15 15

8 8

10 10

12 12

14 14

Paste

Pattern

Expand

Pattern

Copy

Pattern

Duplicate

Pattern

Invert MoreShrink

Pattern

Pattern 1 0m:00s P1.008

Instruments

1. Strange Sample Number 1

2. Deep Kick

4. Snare One

5. Closed Hat 15. Closed Hat 1

6. Deep Pad

7. Grainy Pluck

8. Grrrrr

9. DawgGawn

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

3. Transient Kick

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

5.10 FX Step Parameters

Each step event has two FX slots which can be populated from a library of

effects. Each FX has two parts, rstly the effect type, represented by a

single character and secondly it’s value.

FX Summary

Tap to select [FX1] or [FX2]. To edit the value, Use [+] / [-] to

adjust the value. The outer [+] / [-] buttons change the value

in larger increments.

While holding [FX1] or [FX2], the pop-up window

will display the available effects list where the

selection can be made to load to the step event.

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

FX1 & FX2 parameter each has a dedicated

button when working in the pattern.

FX1 FX2

FX are the third and fourth parameters in the

step event and are highlighted when selected.

FX Type

FX Value

FX1

FX2

C5 02 V 10

V 10

P 25

▌ DETAILED APPLICATION OF AN EFFECT TO AN EMPTY STEP

1. Press [1] to select the pattern mode page.

2. Select a blank or existing step event.

3. Press [FX1] or [FX2] to ensure the FX parameter is selected in the step

event. This is a short press. Holding [FX1] or [FX2] will display the effect

list pop-up.

4. Select recording mode, Press [Rec]. The steps selected will appear red

as opposed to green when in normal playback mode.

5. To assign the FX to an empty step, either:-

• Hold [FX1] or [FX2] till list appears then release. This will place the

current effect into the step. Press [+] / [-] to adjust the FX value. The

Outer buttons in larger increments.

• Hold [FX1] or [FX2] + (Up) or (Down) to select the type from the list.

Release the [FX1] or [FX2] button, the FX step remains selected.

Press [+] / [-] to adjust the FX value. The Outer buttons in larger

increments.

• Hold [FX1] or [FX2] + [+] or [-] to select the type from the list.

Release the [FX1] or [FX2] button, the FX step remains selected.

Press [+] / [-] to adjust the FX value. The Outer buttons in larger

increments.

6. To assign or change the FX to an existing step, either:-

• Hold [FX1] or [FX2] + (Up) or (Down) to select the type from the list.

Release the [FX1] or [FX2] button, the FX step remains selected.

Press [+] / [-] to adjust the FX value. The Outer buttons in larger

increments.

• Hold [FX1] or [FX2] + [+] or [-] to select the type from the list.

Release the [FX1] or [FX2] button, the FX step remains selected.

Press [+] / [-] to adjust the FX value. The Outer buttons in larger

increments.

7. Subsequent selection of FX slots allow adjustment of its value with the

[+] and [-] buttons when in [Rec] mode.

In the Effect list window, press the 7

and 8

screen button to toggle the

description of the highlighted effect on or off. This is an aid to using the FX.

Render

Selection

1 1

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

C5 02 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- H-25

C4 12 ---- A 4

C5 40 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- P-25

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

9 9

11 11

13 13

15 15

8 8

10 10

12 12

14 14

Paste

Pattern

Expand

Pattern

Copy

Pattern

Duplicate

Pattern

Invert MoreShrink

Pattern

Pattern 1 0m:00s P1.008

- - None

Sets the Volume of an

Instrument. For MIDI

instruments this sends

the NOTE ON velocity

parameter

From 0% - 100%

! - Off

P - Panning

M - Micro Tune

G - Glide

T - Tempo

I - Swing

m - Micro Move

q - Gate Length

C - Chance

R - Roll

A - Arp

n - Random Note

i - Random Instrument

V - Volume

Description

101

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

100

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

FX Types.

The two FX slots can be populated from a library of FX effects. Each FX

has an effect type plus the associated value.

FX Type Description

None. Empty FX1 or FX1 effect. No effect applied.

Off. Will toggle off the effect used on the prior effect step.

Volume or Velocity (NOTE OFF) for MIDI.

Positions the step sound left / right in the stereo plane.

Micro Tune. Fine pitch tuning of note and MIDI Out.

Glide time from previous to current note - based on the note pitch.

Tempo change. Changes the pattern tempo.

Swing. Applies a swing from any step track for the entire pattern.

Micro move nudges forward by a small amount the step position.

Gate length. Adjusts the step note gate length.

Chance is the probability of a note playing.

Roll, beat repeats the note also with options for volume or pitch inc/dec.

Arpeggiator, for creating pitch based melodies. (Also needs MIDI Chord)

Random note. Sets a range of notes for random playback.

Random instrument. Sets a range of instruments for random playback.

f Random FX. Sets a random FX to the step from a selected range.

v Random Volume. Sets a random velocity variation on each cycle

Reverses sample playback. Played end to start.

Sets the playback position for a sample start, wavetable or granular position

Plays the selected slice for the step - sliced samples

g Volume LFO Rate

h Panning LFO Rate

j Filter LFO Rate

k Position LFO Rate

I Finetune LFO Rate

FX Type Description

Overdrive amount for the step

Low Pass Filter Cutoff. Frequency represented by 0-100%

Delay. Amount of send effect 0-100%

Reverb. Amount of send effect 0-100%

Bit depth. 4 Bits to 16 Bits.

Tuning. -24 semitones to +24 Semitones. 4 Octave range.

Slide up amount. Range is 0-255 with 1/16

semitone increments.

J Slide down amount. Range is 0-255 with 1/16

semitone increments.

a MIDI Out (CC, PC, Chan & Poly Aftertouch). Needs a channel & Instrument

b MIDI Out (CC, PC, Chan & Poly Aftertouch). Needs a channel & Instrument

c MIDI Out (CC, PC, Chan & Poly Aftertouch). Needs a channel & Instrument

d MIDI Out (CC, PC, Chan & Poly Aftertouch). Needs a channel & Instrument

e MIDI Out (CC, PC, Chan & Poly Aftertouch). Needs a channel & Instrument

f MIDI Out (CC, PC, Chan & Poly Aftertouch). Needs a channel & Instrument

0 MIDI Chord, note output. (Used also with Arp).

NOTESNOTES

Sequencing Steps

In the language of Tracker Mini, an instrument

is the part of a step that generates sound and

is essentially based on an audio sample.

Instruments are loaded into the instrument

pool to be accessible in a project (explained in

the project section). A maximum of 48

instruments can be loaded to a project. At its

core an instrument has a sample or part of a

sample along with a set of dened settings.

The sample parameters set the conguration

of the sample itself and also the integration

within the Tracker Mini instrument feature set.

A sample can be sliced for example to be used

as beats in a drum kit. It can form the central

audio source for the wavetable and granular

engines. These operate like synthesizers. It

can also simply be a pure stand alone sample.

Building of instruments and their application in

Tracker Mini is an essential foundation for

sound design. MIDI instruments also exist and

the application of these is covered in the MIDI

section. There are a variety of things that can be

done to create an instrument. Working with

instruments clearly has a cross over between

the practical, process orientated tasks and the

creative, inspirational parts. Both are equally

important and often it is worth dedicating time

purely to sound design and instrument creation.

Building a library of say, percussion, drums,

bass, leads, or pads and textures, and so forth is

good practice. This can make the track design

and full song production workow smooth and

simple, helping to switch the focus on the

assembly and creation of patterns. Instruments

are stored as ‘.pti’ les and can be used across

projects and can be distributed and shared with

others. Tracker Mini provides an all in one

solution for music making and having a

collection of instruments readily available makes

this music making process faster and more

effective.

Instruments

103

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

102

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

105

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

104

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

6.1 Instrument Overview

An audio instrument is the primary sound source in Tracker Mini and is

based on an audio sample. The instrument can be purely an audio sample

which can then be congured into a more elaborate instrument such as

wavetable synth. The Instrument parameters will congure settings. The

sound can be affected by effects and modulation but essentially an

instrument has a sample at its core and is triggered by the step on which it

is applied.

6.2 Instrument Parameter Pages

A series of instrument parameters are accessible for controlling, shaping

and modulating the sound. The two pages are accessible directly from

toggling the assigned button [2]. Page 1 is general parameters while Page

2 covers parameter automation. Pressing [Delete] on a selected parameter

will reset it to it’s default state.

21 3 4

Page 1 of 2: General Sample Based Parameters

Page 2 of 2: Automation Parameters

Press to select and cycle the instrument parameter pages

Screen buttons select the parameter options or use (Right) (Left) to

navigate each option. Press (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-] to adjust the value.

The outer [+] / [-] buttons adjust in larger increments.

Volume

10.00 dB

Panning

-25

Tune

Cutoff

100

Finetune

Resonance

Filter Type

Low-pass

Instrument Parameters 1/2 0m:00s P1.008

Disabled

Low-pass

High-pass

Band-pass

1.Analog 3 18p

Destination Type

Off

Sustain

100

Attack

0.020s

Release

0.050s

Decay

0.030s

Amount

100

Instrument Automation 2/2 0m:00s P1.008

OffVolume

EnvelopePanning

LFOCutoff

Wavetable Position

Granular Position

Finetune

1.Analog 3 18p

The instrument selection has a dedicated

button when working in the pattern.

Instruments can be created from samples, edited, sliced and saved as ‘.pti’ les

which can then be used in other projects or shared with others.

.pti

Up to 48 audio instrument slots are available in the instrument

list to populate and to choose from. Instruments or samples

can be loaded to the instrument list.

The two instrument parameter pages are specic to the

currently selected instrument. By default these are assigned to,

and selected by pressing button [2]. Also select in the [Menu].

C3 04 ---- P-20

D3 04 ---- P-10

C4 12 ---- A 4

Pattern

1 1

C5 40 ---- P-25

C5 40 ----

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ----

P 25

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

C5 02 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- H-25 C5 40 ---- P-20

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

9 9

11 11

13 13

15 15

8 8

10 10

12 12

14 14

Length

Step Jump

Fill Preview Undo Redo More

Track 2 Track 3 Track 4Track 1

Pattern 1 0m:00s P1.008 1.Analog 3 18p

21 3 4

C5 01 V 10

P 25

Instr

107

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

106

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

6.3 General Instrument Parameters - Page 1

The general settings page covers sample based parameters that affect

general audio functions.

0 Frequency Band 100

High Pass Filter

Level

0 Frequency Band 100

Low Pass Filter

Level

0 Frequency Band 100

Band Pass Filter

Level

Volume

Adjusts the audio level of the instrument.

Range is -inf dB to 24.00 dB

Volume / Pan

Tuning

Volume Level

Stereo Field

-50 Left Right 50

24dB

-Inf dB

Tune

Adjusts the audio pitch tuning of the sample.

Range is -24 Semitones to +24 Semitones

Filter Type

Selects the type of lter to apply.

Options; Disabled, Low-pass, High-pass, Band-pass

Filter Types & Functions

A lter attenuates and cuts areas of the frequency range in an audio signal.

A low pass lter allows the frequencies through which

are below the cutoff frequency and attenuates the

audio signal frequencies above the cutoff. Resonance

boosts the audio at the selected frequency.

A high pass lter allows the frequencies through which

are above the cutoff frequency and attenuates the

audio signal frequencies below the cutoff. Resonance

boosts the audio at the selected frequency.

A band pass lter allows frequencies through within a

band of the cutoff frequency and attenuates the rest of

the audio signal frequencies. Resonance boosts the

audio at the selected frequency. Band width (Q) is not

adjustable in the Tracker Mini band-pass lter.

Panning

Adjusts the audio position left to right

balance in the stereo eld.

Range is -50L (fully left) to +50R (fully right)

Finetune

Adjusts the sample audio pitch ne tuning.

Range is -100 Cents to +100 Cents

Cutoff

Filter cutoff frequency. Point of attenuation.

Range is 0% to 100%

Resonance

Boosted frequency point to create resonance.

Range is 0% to 100%

Volume

10.00 dB

Panning

-25

Instrument Parameters 1/2

Tune

Finetune

Instrument Parameters 1/2 0m:00s

Cutoff

100

Finetune Resonance

Filter Type

Low-pass

P1.008

Disabled

Low-pass

High-pass

Band-pass

1.Analog 3 18p

C CA

F B B

1 Semitone Steps

(Half steps)

100

Cents per Semitone

1 Octave

(12 Semitones)

Filter

109

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

108

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

Access to control the general parameters is simple and quick. The process

described applies when accessing all instrument parameters and effects.

▌ ADJUSTING INSTRUMENT PARAMETERS

1. Ensure the desired instrument is selected. This will be shown top right

of the screen.

2. Press [2] to open the ‘Instrument parameter’ page. This is also

accessible from the [Menu].

3. Pressing [2] again will toggle between the general parameter page and

the automation parameters.

4. Within the instrument page 1 of 2 (page number top left), the instrument

effects are accessible. Press [More], 8

Screen button to open the

effects page, and press [Back] to return to the main page.

5. Press the screen button below the desired option to select. Pressing

(Left) or (Right) will navigate the options. The selected parameter will

show a red bounding box.

6. Within a selected option, Press [+] or [-] to manually adjust the

parameter value e.g. Volume. The outer [+] / [-] buttons make changes

in larger increments.

7. Alternatively, Press (Up) or (Down) to incrementally adjust the

parameter value. Holding a button will continuously adjust the value.

8. With a parameter selected, Press [Delete] to reset it’s value to the

default setting. For example Panning will reset to 0.

9. Parameters are presented in columns. The bar style value is shown in

the the upper main page and also the exact value is shown below the

parameter name under the screen button labels.

10. To exit the instrument parameters, select another page e.g. [1].

6.4 Instrument Effect Parameters - Page 1

The general settings page 1 also gives access to a series of instrument

effect parameters. There are 2 instrument specic effects, overdrive and bit

depth and also 2 send controls which use the common delay and reverb.

Bit-depth

Overdrive

Filter

Reverb

Send

Delay

Send

Mix & Pan

Reverb

Delay

Instrument

Sample

Page 1 of 2: General Sample Based Parameters

Instrument Parameter Effects

Screen buttons select the parameter options or (Right) (Left) to

navigate option. Press (Up) or (Down) to adjust / select

Volume

10.00 dB

Panning

-25

Tune

Cutoff

100

Finetune

Resonance

Filter Type

Low-pass

1.Analog 3 18p

Overdrive

Bit depth

Reverb send

-inf dB

Delay send

-inf dB

Instrument

Synthesizer

Back

Instrument Effects

0m:00s P1.008

111

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

110

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

The effect settings page covers sample based parameters that affect the

specic instrument. Note that the generic delay and reverb settings are in

the master section of Tracker Mini.

Overdrive

Overdrive introduces a gritty aggressive tone to the audio

sound. Based on traditional practices of pushing the limits

of an amplier and creating distortion in the signal.

Range 0-100%

Bit Depth

Analog signal are smooth evolving shapes. Digital audio

samples represent this by sampling and registering the

audio information into number of bits. The higher the

number the better a signal is represented. Tracker Mini

uses 16 Bit audio which is CD standard, but can be

reduced to give a more LoFi sound effect.

Range 4-16

Reverb Send

The reverb send is not a dedicated instrument effect in

itself but controls the amount of instrument audio that is

sent to the master reverb. This is mixed to the signal and

combined with other sends. Reverb adds space and

represents room reections simulating spacial depth,

distance or proximity.

Range 0-100%

Delay Send

The delay send is not a dedicated instrument effect in

itself but controls the amount of instrument audio that is

sent to the master delay. This is mixed to the signal and

combined with other sends. Delay adds an echo and

repetition into a sound and is a creative effect and lls

space to keep interest.

Range 0-100%

Overdrive

Bit Depth

Delay Send

Reverb Send

Overdrive

Bit depth

Reverb send

-inf dB

Delay send

-inf dB

Overdrive

Bit depth

Reverb send

-inf dB

Delay send

-inf dB

Overdrive

Bit depth

Reverb send

-inf dB

Delay send

-inf dB

Overdrive

Bit depth

Reverb send

-inf dB

Delay send

-inf dB

6.5 Instrument Automation Parameters - Page 2

Automation also called modulation, creates movement and interest in an

instrument sound. The instrument automation settings page covers the

settings which control modulation over the instrument sound audio sample.

These parameters are located in the second page of the instrument

parameters.

The modulator can be an LFO or an Envelope. Both shape audio over a

time period for one of the several selectable destinations.

LFO

Envelope

Modulation

Source or Off

Volume

Panning

Finetune

Cutoff

Wavetable Position

Granular Position

Each destination has the

option of an LFO, Envelope

or No Automation.

Type Destination

Screen buttons select the parameter options or (Right) (Left) to

navigate option. Press (Up) or (Down) to adjust / select

Available parameters will depend on the destination and the automation type selected.

Destination Type

LFO

Amount

100

Shape

Triangle

Speed

24 steps

Instrument Automation 2/2 0m:00s P1.008

OffVolume Rev Saw 24 steps

4 steps

EnvelopePanning Saw 16 steps

3 steps

LFOCutoff Triangle 12 steps

2 steps

3/4 step

Wavetable Position Square 8 steps

3/2 step

1/2 step

Granular Position Random 6 steps

1 step

3/8 step

1/3 step

Finetune

1.Analog 3 18p

SpeedA D

S RShape

Amount

113

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

112

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

Automation can add some highly creative and interesting features to a

sound. This is applied by modulating parameters in the instrument sample.

This can transition from a simple, static audio sound (when type is off) to

add some subtle movement to generative and evolving sound designs. Try

combining and experimenting with automation.

LFO - Low Frequency Oscillator

A low frequency oscillator (LFO) operates at a lower frequency than a

normal audio oscillator which is typically used as an audio generator. The

purpose of an LFO is to act as a modulator for parameters of other devices,

to add interest and create movement. A common use of an LFO is to add a

vibrato effect to control the pitch of a sound.

As well as the shape, the second key parameter is speed. LFO Speeds in

Tracker Mini are hard synchronised to the project tempo and are therefore

assigned based on the number or intervals of steps. Despite Tracker Mini

having a de-clicking audio algorithm, some settings may still cause audio

clicks due to the LFO cycle with respect the samples zero crossing points.

Steps

Speed Setting Illustrations

Speed 24

Speed 16

Speed 4

Speed 3/2

Speed 1

Speed 1/4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Time

Amplitude

Time

Amplitude

Time

Amplitude

Time

Amplitude

Time

Amplitude

LFO Shapes

Examples show 2 Cycles of the LFO shape. Speed inuences cycles across pattern.

LFO Speed

Speed is based on pattern step intervals.

* 128 to 32 Step Speed options are not available with Volume as the destination.

Triangle

Good for vibrato style sounds

Reverse Saw

Ideal for ramp down sounds

Square

Great for steppy, pulses

Saw

Ideal for ramp up sounds.

Random

Steppy random sounds

Speed

In Steps

Speed *

In Steps

128

Speed

In Steps

3/4

1/2

3/8

1/3

1/4

Speed

In Steps

3/2

Speed

In Steps

3/16

1/6

1/8

1/12

1/16

Speed

In Steps

1/24

1/32

1/48

1/64

115

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

114

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

Steps

LFO

Speed 16

Triangle

Dest: Cutoff

Sample

Drone

With the destination of cutoff, speed of 16 (and with 16 step pattern), the LFO

cycle will span all the steps. The lter cutoff long evolving changes will create a

long drone pulse to the sound, adding movement and interest.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Steps

LFO

Speed 2

Rev Saw

Sample

Natural Decay

With a speed of 2, the LFO cycle will span 2 steps. With a natural decay of a long

sample triggered on step 1 will give a delay style effect as the sample plays. Try

speed of 1 for a faster delay effect.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Example Speed & Shape Options

With respect to steps

Steps

LFO

Speed 2

Rev Saw

Dest: Volume

Sample

Natural Decay

With the destination of volume, speed of 2, the LFO cycle will span 2 steps. With

a natural decay of a long sample triggered on step 1 will give a delay style effect

as the sample plays. Try speed of 1 for a faster delay effect.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Envelope

An envelope shapes the audio over time. While an LFO will cycle, an

envelope is considered more of a one-shot function and typically operates

across a note length. This is normally used to shape the sound of a note

and how the sound develops from note on to note off (and beyond). It can

also be used as a modulation effect. Tracker Mini uses an ADSR envelope

which has 3 time ranges, Attack, Decay and Release plus Sustain level.

The OFF Command can be triggered on an individual step using the Note ‘OFF’ special

command, accessible by the [-] buttons when inputing notes.

ADSR Envelope

Time

Note On

‘OFF’

Note Off

Attack

Time

A SD R

Sustain

Level

Decay

Time

Release

Time

Amplitude

Amount

Destination Type

Envelope

Sustain

100

Attack

1.000s

Release

1.000s

Decay

0.500s

Amount

100

Instrument Automation 2/2 0m:00s P1.008

OffVolume

EnvelopePanning

LFOCutoff

Wavetable Position

Granular Position

Finetune

1.Analog 3 18p

117

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

116

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

The envelope page covers sample based parameters that affect the shape

of the instrument sound over time. The selection of each parameter may

not be linear to allow for a better resolution to choose the value in the more

relevant range areas. The amount will set how much of the envelope is

applied 0-100%.

Attack Time

Attack is the initial time period of the envelope. This

affects the transient of the sample. Shorter times for more

percussive ‘hits’ and longer for more evolving ramps.

Range 0-10 Seconds.

0-1 Sec has a better resolution of control.

Sustain Level

This is the nominal level at which the note / sound will

sustain after the initial ‘note on’ request. This will be the

level continuously played while holding a note.

Range 0-100%.

Decay Time

A decay time period which is applied after the attack

phase and applying a note. The period before settling the

sound level to a steady state.

Range 0-10 Seconds.

0-1 Sec has a better resolution of control.

Release Time

This is the nal envelope stage and is activated after the

note is released - Tracker Mini ‘OFF’ special note

command. This is the time period where the sound

dissipates from the sustain level to silence.

Range 0-10 Seconds.

0-1 Sec has a better resolution of control.

Attack

Sustain

Decay

Release

6.6 Sample Playback Overview

An instrument can be a sample, edited or raw. A raw ‘.wav’ sample can be

added to the instrument list. When a sample is edited and developed further

as an instrument it can be saved as a ‘.pti’ instrument, for example

‘drumkit1.pti’. This can be used across all projects or distributed to other

Tracker producers.

This section covers the basics of using .pti instruments. The end-to-end

capturing, editing and use of audio sampling is covered elsewhere.

How a sample is applied as an instrument is handled in the ‘Sample

Playback’ page, accessed by default to [3] button or from the [Menu].

Type Play Mode Description

Play 1-Shot Basic sample playback. Plays start to end once.

Loop Forward Loop Sample playback. Plays start to end and cycles on loop.

Loop Backward Loop Sample playback. Plays end to start and cycles on loop.

Loop Pingpong Loop Sample playback. Plays start to end to start on loop.

Slice Slice Sample is sliced. Used for pitch base melodies.

Slice Beat Slice Sample is sliced. Used for beat based instruments.

Synthesizer Wavetable Sample is used as the wavetable, like a synth.

Synthesizer Granular Sample grains are used and played, like a granular synth

Preview

0.000s

Start

0.000s

Zoom

1.00

End

6.000s

Play Mode

Sample Playback 0m:00s P3.002

1-Shot

Slice

Forward loop

Beat Slice

Backward loop

Wavetable

Pingpong loop

Granular

16.hh3

Current Instrument

Selected

Sample Waveform

Display matches play mode.

Play Mode List.

How the sample will be

played in the instrument

Playback Parameters

Settings are based on play

mode for sample playback

Note: Playback is not visually animated in the waveform display when playing but the

playhead is displayed when previewed.

21 3 4

Envelope

Sustain

100

Attack

1.000s

Release

1.000s

Decay

0.500s

Amount

100

Envelope

Sustain

100

Attack

1.000s

Release

1.000s

Decay

0.500s

Amount

100

Envelope

Sustain

100

Attack

1.000s

Release

1.000s

Decay

0.500s

Amount

100

Envelope

Sustain

100

Attack

1.000s

Release

1.000s

Decay

0.500s

Amount

100

Envelope

119

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

118

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

1-Shot Parameters

The available parameters are simple for the 1-shot option with only two

editing parameters and one visual aid. Navigate and select using the

Screen Buttons. Also navigate using the (Left) (Right) buttons to select the

parameter and (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-] to adjust the value.

Zero Crossing option can be set in the Cong > Project settings.

Instruments

6.7 1-Shot Play Mode

The most basic play mode is 1-shot which simply plays a sample through

once, start to end. This is the normal operation when using samples without

too audio much editing and where the general duration of the sample is to

be retained.

The note value, tempo and pattern length will also affect how the sample

plays. A higher note value will play the sample faster. A lower note value will

play the sample slower. Triggering the instrument step will trigger the 1-shot

sample which will play for its duration or until another trigger is initiated.

Steps

Time

1-Shot

Sample

1-Shot

Sample

Original

Faster

Slower

Step Note Trigger

Sample plays once, when triggered. Note value affects pitch. Sample will play

until complete or until another trigger is activated in which case it is restarted.

Higher note values will shorten i.e. speed up the sample while lower values will

elongate i.e. slow the sample. The sample and pattern length should be

considered as well as tempo to achieve desired results. Sample tempo and pitch

are not automatically analysed in Tracker Mini and therefore not normally known

unless manually noted when sampling and recording the original audio.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Start EndZoom

1-Shot

Preview

0.000s

Start

0.000s

Zoom

1.00

End

6.000s

Play Mode

Sample Playback 0m:00s P3.002

1-Shot

Slice

Forward loop

Beat Slice

Backward loop

Wavetable

Pingpong loop

Granular

16.hh3

Function Parameter

Screen

Button

Range Description

Edit Play Mode 7th & 8th

Modes

Selects the play mode to apply. Includes 1-Shot

plus loop modes and wavetable / granular synth.

Aid Zoom 6th

Variable

Zooms in horizontally to the visual display for more

precise editing. Does not affect playback. Zoom

reference point is based on the previously adjusted

parameter i.e. Start.

Aid Preview 1st

Variable

Hold to play the sample. The number below the

screen button label indicates current play position

in seconds. Preview playback will run for approx 1

sec after releasing the preview button.

Edit Start 2nd

Variable

Adjusts and edits the sample start point. This is the

starting position used when a 1-shot sample is

triggered in a pattern or when previewed. Marker is

red but will change to green if a zero crossing point

is detected at the current position.

Edit End 5th

Variable

Adjusts and edits the sample end point. This is the

ending position used when a 1-shot sample is

triggered in a pattern or when previewed. Marker is

red but will change to green if a zero crossing point

is detected at the current position.

121

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

120

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Loop Parameters

The parameters for the forward loop, reverse loop and pingpong loop play

are identical across these play modes. Options are start / loop start, end /

loop end plus the zoom visual aid. Navigate and select using the Screen

Buttons. Also navigate using the (Left) (Right) buttons to select the

parameter and (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-] to adjust the value.

Forward Pingpong Backward

Instruments

6.8 Loop Play Modes

Three loop playback modes exist, forward loop, backward loop and

pingpong loop. All of these three play modes have similar functions and

only differ in their playback direction.

The note value, tempo and pattern length will also affect how the sample

plays. A higher note value will play the sample faster. A lower note value will

play the sample slower. Triggering the instrument step will trigger the sample

once and it will continue to play for its duration in loop until another trigger is

initiated or the pattern ends.

Steps

S LS ELE

Sample

Forward

Loop

Backward

Loop

Pingpong

Loop

Sample plays forwards from start to the end, then restarts back to the start.

Playback continuously loops start to end until another trigger or the pattern ends

Sample plays from the start position to the loop end, then restarts from the loop

end, playing in reverse. Playback continuously loops in reverse within the loop

start / end points until another trigger or the pattern ends

Sample plays from the start position to the loop end, then plays in reverse to the

the loop start, then plays forwards to the loop end. Playback continuously loops

forward and backwards through this cycle until another trigger or the pattern ends

Sample playback is initially triggered and while ever the pattern plays it will continue to loop.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Start

* Start / End, Loop Start / End Positions cannot cross over. Start is always before end.

Loop Start Loop End End

Zoom

Preview

0.000s

Start

0.000s

Loop Start

1.400s

Loop End

4.700s

Zoom

1.00

End

6.000s

Play Mode

Sample Playback 0m:00s P3.002

1-Shot

Slice

Forward loop

Beat Slice

Backward loop

Wavetable

Pingpong loop

Granular

16.hh3

Function Parameter

Screen

Button

Range Description

Edit Play Mode 7th & 8th

Modes

Selects the play mode to apply. Includes forward

loop, backward loop, pingpong loop as well as 1-

Shot and wavetable / granular synths.

Aid Zoom 6th

Variable

Zooms in horizontally to the visual display for more

precise editing. Does not affect playback. Zoom

reference point is based on the previously adjusted

parameter i.e. Start.

Aid Preview 1st

Variable

Hold to play the sample. The number below the

screen button label indicates current play position

in seconds. Preview playback will run for approx 1

sec after releasing the preview button.

Edit Start 2nd

* Lower

than End

Adjusts and edits the sample start point. This is the

starting position when the sample is rst triggered

in a pattern or when previewed. Red marker turns

green if a zero crossing point is detected.

Edit Loop Start 3rd

* Higher

than Start

Adjusts the sample loop start point. This is the start

position used on the 2

and subsequent playback

cycles, playing from loop start to loop end. Value

will always be same or higher than start position.

Red marker turns green at a zero crossing point.

Edit Loop End 4th

* Lower

than start

Adjusts the sample loop end point. This is the end

position used for playing a loop. Value will always

be same or lower than end position. Red marker

turns green at a zero crossing point.

Edit End 5th

* Higher

than Start

Adjusts and edits the sample end point. The

ending position, outside of a loop when a sample is

triggered in a pattern or when previewed. Red

marker turns green at a zero crossing point.

Time

Cycle & Loop

Cycle

Loop

123

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

122

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Slice Parameters

The parameters for slice and beat slice are identical across the play modes

but may have different behaviours in use. Navigate and select using the

Screen Buttons. Also navigate using the (Left) (Right) buttons to select the

parameter and (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-] to adjust the value.

Instruments

6.9 Slice Play Modes

Two similar slice playback modes exist, slice and beat slice.

Slice mode is typically used to slice an audio sample in order to create pitch

based kits. The pads in Slice mode represent current scale.

Beat Slice mode is typically used to slice percussive and atonal samples.

Notes in Beat Slice mode represent individual slices, for example hits of a

drum kit and are useful for playing and recording live beats.

Individual slices per step can also trigger from the FX, ‘S’ step function.

C6 E6 A6C#6 F#6F6 A#6D6 G6 B6D#6 G#6

C5 E5 A5C#5 F#5F5 A#5D5 G5 B5D#5 G#5

C4 E4 A4C#4 F#4F4 A#4D4 G4 B4D#4 G#4

C3 E3 A3C#3 F#3F3 A#3D3 G3 B3D#3 G#3

5 9

7 11

C#2 D#2D2 E2 G2 A#2F2 G#2 B2F#2 A2 C3C2

6 10

8 12

Slices

Selected Slice 1 of 8

Slices

Slice Start Points Adjust

Add - To add a new slice after the currently selected slice

Remove - To delete the currently selected slice

Zoom

Slice

Examples: Synth Note, Piano, String Pad

Slice selected for the instrument will play at the note pitch, default note for original sample pitch is

C5. This will play notes melodically based on the step note and current pitch scale.

Slices can also be played individually. Beat slices can

be played from notes in the pattern. Slice 1 Starts on

Note C2. FX ‘S’ Slice effect can also be used to

select the specic slice within a pattern step.

Beat Slice

Examples: Combo of Kick, Snare, Hat, Effects on Instrument 1.

Function Parameter

Screen

Button

Range Description

Edit Play Mode 7th & 8th

Modes

Selects the play mode to apply. Includes Slice and

Beat Slice as well as 1-Shot and wavetable /

granular synths and loop modes.

Aid Zoom 6th

Variable

Zooms in horizontally to the visual display for more

precise editing. Does not affect playback. Zoom

reference point is based on the previously adjusted

parameter i.e. Slice number.

Edit Slice 1st

Variable

Selects the slice number for editing from the

available number of slices. Also will select the slice

to playback in scale when in Slice Play Mode. Use

(Enter) to preview playback and also to select the

slice in Beat Slice Play Mode.

Edit Adjust 2nd

Variable

Adjusts the start position for the selected slice.

Cannot exceed the previous or next slice position.

Use zoom to assist with precise editing. Red

marker turns green at a zero crossing point.

Edit Add 3rd

Adds a new slice after the currently selected slice

start marker. Slice will be added centrally between

the currently selected slice start and next slice start

or end position.

Edit Remove 4th

Removes and deletes the currently selected slice

start marker. No prompt - immediate deletion.

Edit Auto Slice 5th

Automatic

Automatically removes any existing slice markers

and adds a series of new markers at each

transient point. Prompt to conrm is given.

Edit Number Shift + 1st

1 - 48

Sets the number of slices to create when using the

‘equal’ slice option. This applies the number of

equally spaced slices across the sample.

Edit Equal Slice Shift + 2nd

Initiates slicing of the sample into the equal spaced

slices, set by ‘number’. Prompt to conrm.

C5 01 V 10 P 25

S 3

S 12

V 10

125

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

124

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

▌ REMOVING A SLICE

1. Press [3] to open the ‘Sample Playback’ page. Also from the [Menu].

2. Press the 7

or 8

Screen Button to navigate to ‘Slice’ or ‘Beat Slice’

Play mode depending on the function required.

3. Select a slice, Press [Slice], 1

Screen button. X of Y, Where X is the

selected slice and Y the total number of slices available.

4. Press (Up) or (Down) to select the slice number to delete.

5. Press [Remove], 4

Screen Button. The selected slice is deleted

immediately and the currently active slice reverts to the previous slice.

▌ ADJUSTING A SLICE START POSITION

1. Press [3] to open the ‘Sample Playback’ page. Also from the [Menu].

2. Press the 7

or 8

Screen Button to navigate to ‘Slice’ or ‘Beat Slice’

Play mode depending on the function required.

3. Select a slice, Press [Slice], 1

Screen button. X of Y, Where X is the

selected slice and Y the total number of slices available.

4. Press (Up) or (Down) to select the slice number to edit.

5. Press [Adjust], 2

Screen Button. Zoom may help create precise edits.

6. Press (Up) or (Down) to adjust the slice start position.

Shift

Slice

11 of 15

Adjust

4.000 s

Add Remove

Zoom

1.00

Auto Slice

Play Mode

Sample Playback 0m:00s P3.002

1-Shot

Slice

Forward loop

Beat Slice

Backward loop

Wavetable

Pingpong loop

Granular

16.hh3

Number

Equal Slice

Play Mode

Sample Playback 0m:00s P3.002

1-Shot

Slice

Forward loop

Beat Slice

Backward loop

Wavetable

Pingpong loop

Granular

16.hh3

▌ SLICING A SAMPLE

1. Ensure the desired instrument is selected with the sample to edit. This

will be shown top right of the screen.

2. Press [3] to open the ‘Sample Playback’ page. This is also accessible

from the [Menu].

3. Press the 7

or 8

Screen Button to navigate to ‘Slice’ or ‘Beat Slice’

Play mode depending on the function required.

4. To slice the sample, follow one or a combination of the slicing

techniques. Up to 48 slices are possible:

a. Transient Slicing. Will automatically slice the sample into a number

of slices located at the points where a dynamic amplitude change is

detected. The number of slices is based on the number of transients

detected.

• Press [Auto Slice], 5

Screen Button and acknowledge when

prompted. Existing slices are cleared and new ones created.

b. Equal Slicing. This will slice the sample in a set number of equally

spaced positions. Amount of slices set by the ‘Number’ value. Hold

[Shift] to access this feature.

• Hold [Shift] + [Number], 1

Screen Button and Press (Up) or

(Down) to set number of slices to create.

• Hold [Shift] + [Equal Slice], 2

Screen Button while still holding

[Shift]. Acknowledge on prompt. Existing slices are cleared and

new equidistant slices are created.

c. Manual Slicing. This will add 1 slice at the central point between the

currently selected slice start marker and the following slice start.

• Select a slice, Press [Slice], X of Y, Where X is the selected slice

and Y the total number of slices available. The [Slice] option is

the 1

Screen button.

• Press (Up) or (Down) to select the number of the slice.

• Press [Add], 3

Screen Button. The new slice is added. If no

slices are present, one is added at the sample start position.

• Any new slice added automatically becomes the currently

selected slice.

Hold

127

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

126

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Wavetable Parameters

The wavetable play mode is a simplied application of wavetable synthesis

and consists of two core parameters. The Window is the wavetable length

(samples per frame) and has a maximum value based on the original le.

The position parameter is what enables the creative sound design and

audio manipulation. This can be manually adjusted to nd a sweet spot or

modulated with the envelope or LFO.

Instruments

6.10 Wavetable Play Modes

Wavetable instruments can be created in Tracker Mini. This emulates

classic wavetable synthesizers by using a sample as the wavetable source.

Standard Tracker Mini samples can be used ‘out of the box’ or samples

prepared specically to suit the application in a wavetable synth and give

better performance. The Tracker Mini wavetable synthesis brings a simple

yet different creative option into the instrument library.

What is Wavetable Synthesis?

The most common synth model is subtractive synthesis. This is based on a

sound source, typically using one or more oscillators, tuned in various

ways. The sound is then shaped and carved by ltering out (subtracting)

frequencies, applying envelopes and adding effects. Wavetable synths

typically follow these same principles but the ‘oscillator’ is formed from a

series of wave-shapes called wavetables. In reality, a wavetable consists of

a set of stacked samples called frames, the standard being 256 frames.

Navigating or modulating through the almost endless wave positions and

selecting ‘single cycles’ in the wavetable is a fundamental element in

wavetable sound design. In Tracker Mini the wavetable size (samples per

frame) is set by the ‘Window’ parameter. Think of this as the length of the

available table, the default maximum being dened by the original audio

sample format. The ‘Position’ within the wavetable is also selectable and

important in the sound design process. Position can also be modulated.

Current Instrument

Selected

Sample

Waveform Cycle.

Play Mode List.

How the sample will be

played in the instrument

Window

Frame size, range dictated

by wavetable format

Position

Wave position selection,

also can be modulated.

Preview Position

Window

2048

Play Mode

Sample Playback 0m:00s P3.002

1-Shot

Slice

Forward loop

Beat Slice

Backward loop

Wavetable

Pingpong loop

Granular

16.hh3

Position

Size of window will affect resolution

Window

Function Parameter

Screen

Button

Range Description

Edit Play Mode 7th & 8th

Modes

Selects the play mode to apply. Includes

Wavetable and Granular as well as 1-Shot and the

three loop modes.

Aid Preview 1st

Hold to play the wave from the current position

selected in the window. Also hold while adjusting

position to ‘scan’ for the desired sound.

Aid Window 3rd

Variable

The width of the wavetable can be adjusted down

from the default maximum. The parameters are

normally divisions of 2 down from the maximum

(Typically 2048)

Edit Position 2nd

Variable

Selects the playback position within the wavetable

window. This can be manually adjusted to nd the

desired ‘sweet spot’ or modulated with an LFO or

Envelope for movement and interest.

129

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

128

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

Optimising Wavetables

The best approach to operating with wavetable synthesis is to use WAV

les that have been created for wavetable use. This will adhere to the frame

and sample conventions stated. Also the audio samples will be created with

smooth rather than stepped transitions between waves. There are many

pre-prepared wavetables available for download but also check out the

online sheets of sound creator and Modbap Modular OsirisEdit to learn

more about wave creation.

Tracker Mini’s factory wavetable les are located in the samples folders on

the SD Card.

There are many freely available wavetable samples online. Standard

samples can be used but wavetable formatted WAV les provide better and

smoother performance. The most common standard is 2048 Samples /

Frame (256 Frames). This applies to XFer Serum, U-He Hive, Dune, but

others may also exist. Ableton Live Wavetable uses 1024 samples and

down samples when a 2048 format is applied.

Standard audio les may sound ‘stepped’ when navigating the position.

Tracker Mini has an on-board optimisation tool, WT Smoother which will

process a standard sample and helps to smooth the sound and give better

performance. This effectively converts the le to a more suitable format for

Tracker Mini’s Wavetable Synth. Navigating a processed audio wave will

sound smoother in the transition across positions.

▌ USING WT SMOOTHER TO OPTIMISE SAMPLES

1. Ensure the sample is loaded to the instrument list and selected as

currently active. Note that samples in the instrument list are copied into

the onboard memory from the SD Card.

2. Press [Menu] and navigate to select ‘Sample Editor’. Operations in the

‘Sample Editor’ are performed destructively to the sample in memory.

However the original le is retained intact on the SD Card.

3. Edit the audio le [Start], 1

Screen button and [End], 2

Screen Button

selects the marker. Press (Up) or (Down) or [+] / [-] to adjust the

positions to select part of the sample to process.

4. Press the 7

or 8

Screen button to navigate to ‘WT Smoother’.

5. Press [Select effect], 6

Screen button to select WT Smoother.

6. Press [Window Num], 1

Screen button in the WT Smoother application.

This selects frames. The 256 default is a typical setting to use. Press

(Up) or (Down) or [+] / [-] to adjust.

7. Press [Window Len], 2

Screen button in the WT Smoother application.

This selects sample length. The 2048 default is a typical setting to use.

Press (Up) or (Down) or [+] / [-] to adjust.

8. Press [Preview], 7

Screen button to audition the audio while editing.

This will need to process the audio before playing. Press [Stop], 7

Screen Button again to stop preview.

9. Press [Apply], 8

Screen button to apply and render the new audio le.

This converts to a wavetable which can be used in the wavetable play

mode as a smoother more rened option.

10. Save the project to also save the edited instruments in the project

folder. Hold [Shift] + [3] then Press [Save], 5

Screen Button. Saving the

project also automatically saves the instruments in the instrument

subfolder. These can be accessed from other projects.

Root

Wavetable_2048

/Samples

131

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

130

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Preview

0.000 s

Position

4.520 s

Length

500.0 ms

Shape

Triangle

Loop

Forward

Play Mode

Sample Playback 0m:00s P3.002

1-Shot

Slice

Forward loop

Beat Slice

Backward loop

Wavetable

Pingpong loop

Granular

16.hh3

Instruments

Modulating Wavetables

The wavetable position is the key parameter to adjust and edit to search for

a desired sound. This parameter can also be modulated from within the

instrument automation page using an envelope or LFO. This adds

movement and interest.

Hold [Preview] in the wavetable page while the LFO is running will display

the animated position dynamically in real time.

Fast LFO Speeds can create glitchy and noisy sound designs. Use slower

LFO speed or envelope and reduce the wavetable window for developing

sound textures and ambience especially with added effects such as reverb.

Try synchronised speeds to tempo / steps to create rhythmic patterns. The

LFO amount will also effect how strong the LFO is applied.

Try manually adjusting the window and position while playing and with an

LFO to experiment with the sound.

LFO

Sample

Wavetable

Select the ‘Sample playback’ page to view the wavetable.

Select ‘Instrument Parameter’ page 2 to

edit the LFO and instrument automation

Position

6.11 Granular Play Modes

Granular instruments can be created in Tracker Mini. As with all Tracker

Mini instruments, Granular synth uses a sample as its core sound source.

Granular synthesis is ideal for glitchy soundscapes and textural sounds.

What is Granular Synthesis?

Granular synthesis breaks a sample down into tiny slices, lets describe this

as microscopic level. These narrow slices are generally less than 1 second

but often much shorter in duration and are called grains. Sound is

generated in a granular synthesizer by looping playback around a grain. It

is common practice to use modulation to bring a granular synth to life

especially using grain position. Granular synths can still use the same

features as in subtractive synthesis including lter and envelopes.

Modulating grain position is at the heart of the Tracker Mini’s

implementation of granular synthesis where an LFO or envelope can be

used. Parameters exist to set the position and length with a range up to

1000ms. Also shape and loop direction of playback parameters can also be

adjusted manually in the Granular synth playback mode.

Current Instrument

Selected

Sample

Waveform Cycle.

Preview

Audition Grain.

Play Mode List.

How the sample will be

played in the instrument

Length

Grain length

Loop

Playback direction

Shape

Grain Envelope

Position

Grain position within sample,

also can be modulated.

133

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

132

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Granular Parameters

The granular play mode is a simplied application of granular synthesis and

consists of four core parameters. The grain length is duration of the small

slice of audio, while loop denes the direction of playback across the grain.

Shape is the envelope shape applied to the grain playback, recognised in

the attack phase. The position parameter is what brings out the its sonic

character. This can be manually adjusted to nd a sweet spot or modulated

with the envelope or LFO to introduce movement and interest. Tracker Mini

operates with a single grain.

Instruments

Position

(Blue Bar)

Length

Play Head

(Red Bar)

Shape will determine the

envelope of the playback

Grain

Direction will determine the

playback of the grain

Forward Reverse Pingpong

Square Triangle Gauss

Function Parameter

Screen

Button

Range Description

Edit Play Mode 7th & 8th

Modes

Selects the play mode to apply. Includes

Wavetable and Granular as well as 1-Shot and the

three loop modes.

Aid Preview 1st

Hold to play the grain from the current position

selected. Also hold while adjusting position to

‘scan’ for the desired sound.

Edit Position 2nd

Variable

Selects the grain playback position within the

sample. This can be manually adjusted to nd the

desired ‘sweet spot’ or modulated with an LFO or

Envelope for movement and interest.

Edit Length 3rd

1-1000ms

Sets the width in ms of the grain. This will be the

small slice of the sample that is played.

Edit Shape 4th

Square,

Triangle,

Gauss

Sets the envelope shape for the grain playback.

Particularly pertinent in the attack phase.

Edit Loop 5th

Forward,

Reverse,

Pingpong

Selects the grain playback direction.

Modulating Granular Position

The granular position can be modulated from within the instrument

automation page using an envelope or LFO. This adds movement and

interest and creates glitchy or textural sounds

Hold [Preview] in the granular page while the LFO is running will display the

animated position dynamically in real time.

The LFO Speed and granular parameters can have an affect on the sound

developed. Also the LFO amount will determine how much of the sample is

navigated with varying the position. Small amounts will be more predictable

textures and pad like sounds. Larger amount settings will move the position

wider in the sample creating more glitchy, less predictable sounds.

LFO

Sample

+ Grain

Select the ‘Sample playback’ page to view granular play mode.

Select ‘Instrument Parameter’ page 2 to

edit the LFO and instrument automation

Position

135

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

134

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Instruments

6.12 Sharing Instruments

Instruments can be shared either with other projects on the same device or

by transferring to another Tracker Mini. This is useful when developing new

instruments or to create instruments which will be reused, for example to a

develop a signature sound across multiple tracks of an album.

Instruments are saved with a project using a ‘.pti’ le format and are stored

in the project ‘instruments’ subfolder. The project and instrument folders are

accessible from all projects. This is ok if you know where to look and what

to look for. Remembering all projects and their instruments is not an easy

task. A few tips will help manage a library of instruments. Tracker Mini does

not have in depth le management functions on board so using a PC or

Mac to access the SD card is required.

• Create instruments as normal. Save a project which will also save

the instruments into the current project folder. Instruments created

or loaded from other projects will be saved with the current project.

• Consider creating a ‘user’ subfolder within the instruments folder.

This can be used to build a library of user instruments.

• A different folder cannot be selected in Tracker Mini when saving

Instruments. Periodically instruments can be manually copied using

a PC / Mac into the ‘user’ instrument folder on the SD card. This

would be a housekeeping task, maybe combined with backing up

the SD Card fully.

• Do not cut or delete the the original instrument from the project as

this is where the project recognises the original le to be stored.

• The user folder can easily be shared with collaborators or between

devices simply by copying between SD Cards with the PC / Mac.

Instrument.pti

Sample

Instrument Parameters and Settings.

PCM Sample 44.1kHz, 16 Bit

Header

Micro SD Can be connected to a

PC / Mac with the USB adapter.

Files can be copied (Do not Cut /

Paste or Delete) between SD Cards.

Periodically copy from the SD Card Project Instrument

Folder to a user created folder. This makes it easy to

use in other projects and share with other collaborators.

Consider a naming convention for user instruments. This is less important

when using project contained instruments, but this technique can be helpful

when managing a user library. Instruments can be renamed in the ‘sample

loader’ page. It is advised to always keep a discipline of naming

instruments in Tracker Mini rather than on the PC/Mac to protect the .pti le

integrity and to make future access easier.

Root

Synthdawg

Kits

A .pti le contains a header ~400 bytes

which handles the parameter settings.

In addition a sample is included which

can vary in size and which is packed

into the instrument le.

/Drum Kits

/ProjectName

/Instruments

/Samples

/Patterns

/Progressions

/Instrument Kits

/Synths

/Synthdawg Kits

/Instruments

/Projects

It is important to get a good understanding of

all four elements of a step. This will help to get

the most from step sequencing. This section

provides a deeper dive into the two FX slots.

FX slots have access to a library of 37 effects

that are applied in a somewhat different way to

the normal expectation. These can apply both

audio and MIDI applications to modulate and

control as well as traditional effects such as

delay. These can be applied step by step

giving intimate control over each step and

when built together with other steps offers a

very creative option in Tracker Mini. These are

very powerful and without doubt are worth the

time and learning investment to get to know

the range and application of effects available.

It is important to recognise that step effects are

different to the general instrument and master

effects provided. The normal effect convention

is to operate inline or as a send conguration

for the audio pathway. The Tracker Mini FX are

polarised to the step itself or to the pattern in

which it is operating. This offers a extremely

wide range of creative options at a per step

level. Some step FX are even applied to all

tracks for example Tempo. The FX browser

provides a quick reference for each effect.

These descriptions are found in the Tracker Mini

FX selection page and can be selected for each

component. The help guide is useful when

working in the box, offering a basic reference.

This section aims to take a FX focussed view

and gives a more detailed and in depth

reference along with some practical and simple

examples of applying FX into a pattern.

FX Steps

137

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

136

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

139

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

138

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

FX Steps

7.1 Step FX Descriptions

Step FX are a collection of 37 effect types that can be applied into one of

two step locations using the dedicated Step FX buttons. Creative step

patterns can be generated by applying and also combining. FX do not

always need a note and instrument in the same step event. For example,

lter cutoff can adjust the cutoff value, applied to previous triggered note.

The FX list also provides some brief information on each effect.

▌ ACCESSING THE EFFECT DESCRIPTIONS

1. Press [1] to select the ‘Pattern’ page. Also accessible from the [Menu].

2. Select a blank or existing step event.

3. Hold [FX1] or [FX2] + Press (Up) or (Down) to highlight an effect. The

[+] / [-] buttons can also be used to navigate in the list.

4. While still Holding [FX1] or [FX2] and the FX browser window open,

Press Screen Button 7 or 8. This toggles the description window open

or closed and shows the description for the highlighted effect.

5. If in [REC] mode the FX will also be selected for the step when

browsing within this menu list. Rec mode will show the step as red.

Use the [+] & [-] buttons in recording mode when editing FX parameter values. When

adjusting the value for an FX slot with an instrument loaded to the step, the audio

applied through the effect will be automatically previewed.

Render

Selection

1 1

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

C5 02 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- H-25

C4 12 ---- A 4

C5 40 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- P-25

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

9 9

11 11

13 13

15 15

8 8

10 10

12 12

14 14

Paste

Pattern

Expand

Pattern

Copy

Pattern

Duplicate

Pattern

Invert MoreShrink

Pattern

Pattern 1 0m:00s P1.008

- - None

Sets the Volume of an

Instrument. For MIDI

instruments this sends

the NOTE ON velocity

parameter

From 0% - 100%

! - Off

P - Panning

M - Micro Tune

G - Glide

T - Tempo

I - Swing

m - Micro Move

q - Gate Length

C - Chance

R - Roll

A - Arp

n - Random Note

i - Random Instrument

V - Volume

Description

FX1

FX2

7.2 Step FX Reference

The effects are contained into a library of 37 FX types which can be

selected into the step. The details for each effect varies depending on its

function. Also the interaction with other steps or the note or instrument may

be relevant for some effects. The descriptions are built into the FX menu,

but these are limited in the descriptions. A deeper understanding of the FX

is benecial and brings more clarity to what at rst glance can be confusing.

One effect can be loaded into a step FX slot. Each step has 2 FX slots so a

total of two FX are possible. While this may seem limiting it is worth

remembering that some traditional effects also exist in the audio signal chain.

For example delay. The FX should be considered more like mini applications

that not only affect the audio but also affect the behaviour of the step and

sometimes the pattern itself.

This section and following parts will hopefully demystify their use, especially

within pragmatic use case examples.

- None

! Off

C Chance

R Roll

f Random FX

S Slice Playback of Sample

T Tempo

I Swing

m Micro Timing

G Glide

q Gate Length

A Arpeggiator

a - f MIDI Out

F Slide Up

J Slide Down

0 MIDI Chord

V Volume

P Panning

M Micro Tuning

n Random Note

i Random Instrument

v Random Volume

r Reverse Sample

P Position in sample / wave

g Volume LFO Rate

h Panning LFO Rate

j Filter LFO Rate

k Position LFO Rate

I Finetune LFO Rate

D Overdrive amount

L Low Pass Filter

B Band Pass Filter

H High Pass Filter

s Delay Send

t Reverb Send

E Bit Depth

U Tuning

Affects Audio Sound.

Affects Step Behaviour. Affects Structure / Timing

141

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

140

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.3 None

D6 03

---- ----

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

N/A

No effect is applied and hence the sound for the step will purely be based on

the instrument and note. This is basically an empty effect.

Default state for any step is that the FX1 and FX2 are empty. This effect can

be applied to remove an existing FX and reset to the normal empty state.

None - No FX Applied

FX1 FX2

The last two slots are for FX. They will be

indicated with dashed lines when empty. This is

the default empty state of a step.

Selected step will be bounded green or red in

recording edit mode. The part of the step to be

edited is solid lled when selected as per

illustration where FX1, Step 1 is shown selected.

FX Steps

7.4 Off

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

Will deactivate an effect that has been triggered on a prior step.

A roll triggered on step 1 will be audible over the subsequent following steps.

Applying an !OFF step command afterwards will curtail the effect for the track.

Off

1 1

3 3

2 2

4 4

5 5

D6 03

----

RR 6 D6 03

----

RR 6

D6 03

----

!OFF D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

Effect Applied

Effect Curtailed

Effect in Play

(!OFF Pending)

Effect in Play

(No !OFF)

---- ----

----

---- ----

143

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

142

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.5 Volume

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

0 - 100%

Will apply a volume level for this individual instrument step.

For MIDI this will send a NOTE ON Velocity parameter.

To illustrate an example, 16 Steps with volume ramped up through the pattern

steps. This will be a stepped ramp. To create a smoother ramp try using the ll

function to populate all steps using ‘From-To’ or Live Rec. This will still be

triggered per step but will be audibly smoother.

Volume / Velocity

FX Steps

7.6 Panning

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

L -50 - R +50

Positions the audio within the stereo eld, panning the signal in the left / right

position. This is applied per step.

An example of 16 Steps panned left to right and then back to left. Triggered for

the stereo position per step. To create a smoother, less stepped transition use

ll to populate all steps using ‘From-To’.

Panning

D6 03

----

V 0

D6 03

----

V 0

D6 03

----

V 80

D6 03

----

V 94

D6 03

----

V100

D6 03

----

V100

D6 03

----

V 30

D6 03

----

V 6

D6 03

----

V 55

D6 03

----

V 13

Volume Level

100%

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

1 1

9 3

5 2

13 15

16 16

D6 03

----

P-50 D6 03

----

P-50

D6 03

----

P 0 D6 03

----

P-38

D6 03

----

P-50 D6 03

----

P-50

D6 03

----

P 0 D6 03

----

P-42

D6 03

----

P 50 D6 03

----

P-31

Panning

Left Right

-50 0 50

145

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

144

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

7.8 Glide

NOTESNOTES

7.7 Micro-Tune

C CB B

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

-99 to +99 Cents

Applies a ne tuning pitch adjustment for the step note or MIDI output.

Operates in cents, where 100 cents is one semitone

A semitone is 100 cents but as the tuning is so ne, the maximum range of

micro tuning is almost a full semitone. This can be used to add variation

especially with percussive sounds while still maintaining musicality.

Micro Tuning

1 Semitone Steps

(Half steps)

-100 to +100

Cents per Semitone

[Micro Tune]

1 Octave

(12 Semitones)

FX Steps

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

0 - 100%

Creates a smooth transition when the step is activated, from the pitch of a

previous note value to the current step note value over a time period based on

the glide time setting. Glide time is in percentage which represents time.

A short or long glide time transition can bring a creative effect using the pitch of

a step note. Try experimenting by using glides in combination with other steps.

Glide

D6 03

---- M-99

----

M-50

----

M 99

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

Pitch Tune

-1 Semitone +1 Semitone

-50 Cents

50 Cents

1 1

3 3

2 2

4 4

5 5

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D5 03

----

G 48 D5 03

----

---- -------- --

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

D6 03

----

---- ----

G 74

---- ----

---- --

Step Trigger

Glide from prior note D6 to Note D5 across the glide time duration.

Step Trigger

D6 > D5

Glide Time

~1sec

Glide Time

~8sec

D5 D5

Glide Time Converter (Estimated)

% 0 13 25 36 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100

Sec 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 2.4 3.8 5.2 6.6 8.0 9.4 10.8 12.2 13.6 15

147

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

146

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

7.10 Swing

1 1

9 9

5 5

13 13

16 16

D6 03

----

I 55 D6 03

----

I 45

D6 03

----

P 0 D6 03

----

D6 03

----

P-50 D6 03

----

D6 03

----

P 0 D6 03

---- ----

----

D6 03

----

P 50 D6 03

----

I 35

Swing

25%

On Grid 50%

Late

All Tracks

75%

Early

NOTESNOTES

7.9 Tempo

1 1

9 9

5 5

13 13

16 16

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

----

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

----

TSTP

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03 T 50

----

D6 03

----

T200 D6 03

---- ----

Tempo

120

240

Stop

Example 1.

Pattern will play rst cycle and trigger the

tempo change on step 9. The entire

pattern tempo will change and continue

through subsequent pattern cycles until a

new tempo is triggered or set.

Example 1. Example 2.

Example 2.

Pattern will play at the dened tempo,

change when triggered then the pattern

will stop when the TSTP event is activated.

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

10 - 400%

Applies a % tempo change triggered on the step. TSTP Tempo Stop - Stops

the sequencer running. Given that MIDI is synchronised to the project tempo,

this will also affect MIDI Out clock.

Tempo change is applied to the entire pattern from the step onwards. A TSTP

command will add a full stop step which will halt the sequencer. TSTP is an

available option when setting the value. Default tempo of 120 for this example.

Tempo Change

FX Steps

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

25 - 75%

Introduces a groove or shufe into the pattern timing. 50% is no swing. Range

is 25% to 75% of pattern swing. Also applied to MIDI Out.

Swing on a step track will apply across the pattern. These can create a groove.

Maybe experiment with variations. Adjust by ear rather than numbers.

Swing

149

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

148

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

7.12 Gate Length

D6 03

----

q 80

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

---- ----

Gate Full Range

100%0%

Gate Length

Note On

Envelope

The gate operates in

conjunction with the ADSR

instrument envelope.

NOTESNOTES

7.11 Micro Move

D6 03

----

m 0

D6 03

----

m 25

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

----

m 50

D6 03

---- ----

Nudge

Forward

(Later)

100%

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

Per Step

While the range is 0-100%, the actual shift of notes is only in small amounts.

The 0% setting is ‘On Grid’ while any nudge is forward in the pattern.

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

0 - 100%

Will apply a small offset to the note step. This will move the note forward by an

amount based on the setting.

Can be used to offset one part of a track step or provide minor step variations.

Think of this similar to swing, but applied to a step rather than pattern.

Micro Move

FX Steps

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

0 - 100%

Adjusts the length of the note gate and helps shape the sound. Operates in

conjunction with the instruments Envelope settings which are found in the

‘Instrument’s Parameters’.

Increases or reduces the gate for the note. This works with the envelope and

will determine length of note helping to shape the sound over time.

Gate Length

151

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

150

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

7.14 Roll

R - Regular Roll.

Rv - Decrease Volume.

RV - Increase Volume

Rn - Decrease Note*

RN - Increase Note*

RR - Random Note*

* Note Pitch

R - Regular Roll.

Rv - Decrease Volume.

RV - Increase Volume

Rn - Decrease Note*

RN - Increase Note*

RR - Random Note*

* Note Pitch

D6 03

----

RR 2

D6 03

----

RR 2

---- ----

--- --

D6 03

----

Rv 1

D6 03

----

Rn 1

Volume LevelNote Pitch

100%

NOTESNOTES

7.13 Chance

1 1

9 3

5 2

13 15

16 16

D6 03

----

V 0 D6 03

----

C 25

D6 03 C 50 V 80 D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

----

V100 D6 03

----

C 55

D6 03 C 50 V 30 D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

----

V 55 D6 03

----

C 85

Chance

100%

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

0 - 100%

Sets the chance condition for the step. This will apply a probability of whether

the step will play or not. Higher percentages means a higher chance of

playing. 100% will always play, 0% will never play.

Can add variation to a pattern. For example a percussive note sequence could

have some steps with a chance setting to dictate whether it will sound or not.

This can create interest and variety in melodies or beats.

Chance

FX Steps

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

0 - 16 per Type

Repeat of the note applied using a step division. This can be straight repeats

or evolving repeats depending on the roll type selected. The option for types

are R, Rv, RV, Rn, RN, RR with a step divider range of 0 - 16.

Rolls are extremely versatile and can be applied as volume or note pitch ramp

up / down or just to randomise notes.

Roll

153

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

152

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

7.15 Arpeggiator

FX Type Tag

Value Range

FX Description

Example

Effect

See Below

Example Tracker Mini Chords

Arpeggiator. This needs a note value and works in conjunction with the MIDI

chord which must also be assigned to the other FX slot

Set the FX1 slot to the Arp type. This can operate with a note melody:

Up / Rising ‘/’ or Down / Falling ‘\’ or Random ‘R’. The value is based on the

tempo divider as a number e.g. 6 or multiplier e.g. .6 (dot 6).

Set the FX2 slot to MIDI Chord. This is an effect used with MIDI but also

provides scale details for the Arp.

Arp

C4 03 A/ 4 047A

NOTESNOTES

Arp Type & Direction

A/ - Rising / Up.

A\ - Falling / Down.

AR - Random

Root Note

Based on the hexadecimal

code representing chord

notes / scale.

MIDI Chord Scale

Hex code represents

+ Semitones from root

Hex code represents

+ Semitones from root

Hex code represents

+ Semitones from root

Hex code represents

+ Semitones from root

Hex code represents

+ Semitones from root

Tracker Mini gives a series of scales in the MIDI Chord description. While these are useful

examples they do not fully cover all chords. Other chords are also available, represented by the

hexadecimal number in the MIDI Chord FX. Translating a chord to the hexadecimal code for the

MIDI Chord assignment will allow a wider range to be used. Alternatively, and a more practical

approach is trial and error and listening by ear of what sounds ‘right’ when selecting scales.

The Arp uses the Note as the root and the Arp effect sets the direction and

timing. This needs a MIDI Chord also in the other FX slot to create the chord

which will be arpeggiated. Setting the MIDI Chord to a value at ‘0’ will play notes

through a chromatic scale and is useful when setting up the Arp to get the

direction and timing right before applying a specic scale.

Arp direction plus intervals can range through the dividers of 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 and

also the .1, .2, .3, .4, .6, .8 where a dot value indicates a multiplier.

Other Examples

Hexadecimal to Decimal Converter

A/ would play C - D# - G Rising arpeggio

A\ would play G - D# - C Falling arpeggio

AR would play C - D# - G in Random order

Hex code represents

+ Semitones from root

A/ 4

Root + Arp Notes

A\ 4

e.g. 0 27 Sus2

e.g. 0 5A

e.g. 027A

e.g. 0 67 sus

e.g. 057B

0 5A

e.g. 0 37A Min7

A - Arp 0 - MIDI Chord

MIDI Chord

Hex Code

Scale

A/ Rising Chord

Example Root C

A\ Falling Chord

Example Root C

AR Random Chord

Example Root C

0 27 Sus2 C - D - G G - D - C Random order

0 57 Sus4 C - F - G G - F - C Random order

0 37 Min C - D# - G G - D# - C Random order

0 47 Maj C - E - G G - E - C Random order

0 5C Open4 C - F - C C - F - C Random order

0 7C Open5 C - G - C C - G - C Random order

0379 Min6 C - D# - G - A A - G - D# - C Random order

037A Min7 C - D# - G - A# A# - G - D# - C Random order

0479 Maj6 C - E - G - A A - G - E - C Random order

047B Maj7 C - E - G - B B - G - E- C Random order

C D G

C F

G B

D# A#

+7 +11

Semitones from the root

+3 +10

+10

+7 +10

+10

Hex 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Dec 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Semitones

Root

-12

+12

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

FX Steps

155

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

154

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.16 Random Note 7.17 Random Instrument

D6 04

----

i 2

D6 04

----

i 2

D6 04

----

i 2

D6 04

----

i 2

D6 04

----

i 2

1 2 3 4 5

-2

Current Instrument

1. HooverBass

2. ClosedHat2

3. LightHat

4. ClosedHat

5. Hat Rim

6. Hat3

7. StringPad

8. lead

Instrument List

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

----

n 8

D6 03

---- ----

D6 03

----

n 3

D6 03

---- ----

Intervals

Root

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

Notes ‘n’ will play randomly, through each pattern cycle. The selected range is set

by the +/- value in the FX. This is applied with reference to the root note (Example

D6) and determines the +/- offset from which the random note is selected.

Instrument ‘i’ will play randomly, through each pattern cycle. The selected range is set

by the +/- value in the FX. This is applied with reference to the current instrument

(Example 4) and determines the +/- offset from which the random note is selected. +2

is the Hat3 and -2 is ClosedHat2. LightHat and Hat Rim are included in this range.

Range is -3 to +3 deviation from root

Range is -2 to +2 deviation from current instrument

Range is -8 to +8 deviation from root

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

n i

0 to +/-100 0 to +/-47

Sets a range of notes from which a random selection will be made, for each

play cycle of the pattern. Interval are based on the selected scale for the pads

Sets a range of instruments from which a random selection will be made, for

each play cycle of the pattern. Intervals are based on the selected instrument

and the range before and after in the project instrument list.

The randomisation is applied within a range set by the value. By default this is

a +/- semitone range across a chromatic scale. However this is based on the

cong settings and can therefore be changed to another scale. Start with a

small range setting to keep things musical and then apply a different setting to

experiment with variations.

Try loading a cluster of samples into the instrument list. This will form the

range to select from. The step instrument being the central instrument for the

randomisation range. For example a variation of percussive hats or vocal

stabs. The random pick will select from these.

Random Note Random Instrument

FX Steps

157

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

156

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.18 Random FX

D6 03

----

V 0

D6 03 C 50 V 80

D6 03

----

V100

D6 03f 20 q 70

f 20 q 70

D6 03

----

V 55

90%50% 70%

q - gate length

randomisation

Note On

Gate Length

Gate length value is randomised by +/-20 applied by FX1 to the default of 70 in

FX2. Therefore gate length value variation will be a value selected between 50 -

90 over each pattern cycle.

7.19 Random Volume

Default Level

+/- Range of variation

D6 03

----

v 10

---- ----

--- --

D6 03

----

v 20

Volume Level

100%

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

Playback will be at the default volume until a random volume step is triggered. A value

somewhere in the range will then be applied.

FX1 Randomises the value for FX2 (q - gate Length)

Range is -10 to +10 deviation from current default

Range is -20 to +20 deviation from current default

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

f v

0 to +/-255 0 to +/-100

Selects a random FX value (not type) for the FX located in the other slot, same

step. Plays a random selection each pattern cycle based on the set range.

Creates a volume variation in each cycle of the pattern through randomisation

of velocity. This is a value which is randomly selected from within a +/- range

from the default volume level.

This feature can add a variation to a pattern. For example FX1 Random 20

applies to FX2 Gate length, which will be the value randomised. Gate length

full range is 0-100%. FX2 Functions other than Gate Length can also be used.

This is useful for creating accents and audible variations in volume level.

Random FX Value Random Volume

FX Steps

159

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

158

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.20 Reverse Sample 7.21 Position

Start position for sample used in instrument 22 only for this step

Position for steps in-between ‘p’ will operate at the normal start

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

r p

<<< Or >>> 0 - 100%

Reverses the sample playback. Simply plays the sample forwards as normal

or reverses its playback.

Sample start position for playback is set. This is based on the playback type

selected and better applied with one-shot samples, wavetables and granular.

When using sliced samples the ‘slice’ FX is an alternative option.

Reversing the sample playback is a simple application. The reverse will take

place only on the step activated. It is also important in practical applications to

know the sample length. If the ‘tail’ of a sample is long then reversing it may

mean no sound is heard. Adjusting the ‘end’ parameter of the sample playback

may also need to be changed.

Try experimenting with different samples and start points. Use full samples

(one-shots), wavetables and granular types for the full more pronounced

effect. Happy accidents to nd a ‘sweet spot’ in a sample are possible.

Automate the variation using individual steps to create movement and interest.

Reverses Sample Playback Position

FX Steps

<<<

1 1

9 9

5 5

13 13

16 16

D6 03

---- ----

F5 22

----

D6 03

----

r<<< F5 22

----

p 65

p 85

D6 03

---- ----

F5 22

---- ----

D6 03

----

r>>> F5 22

----

p 47

p 5

D6 03

---- ----

F5 22

----

1 5 9 13

5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

Start

(Default)

Normal Sample Direction.

Playback from ‘Start’ to ‘End’

parameters as set in the sample

playback settings.

Instrument Sample Type.

Will be dependant on sample

playback type. Use One-Shots,

Wavetable and Granular.

Steps with Dened Start Pos

Start in %

Reversed Sample Direction.

Playback from ‘End’ to ‘Start’ parameters

as set in the sample playback settings.

End may need to be adjusted to hear

audio within the step duration.

End

Playback Length

Position ‘p’ Range 0-100%

End

Start

161

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

160

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.22 Slice

Slice 2 (Wrapped 16+2) from beat sliced instrument 16.

Slice 5 from beat sliced instrument 16 only for this step

Slice 12 from beat sliced instrument 16 only for this step

Slice 8 from beat sliced instrument 16 only for this step

The last slice eg 16 is default if a slice selection is not dened.

F5 16

----

F5 16

----

S 12

S 8

F5 16

---- ----

F5 16

----

S 18

S 5

F5 16

----

18*

*18 = 16 Max Range + 2

3 4 5 6

10 11 12

15 15 16

Beat Sliced Sample.

For example 16 beat sliced ‘hits’

across a drum kit. The Steps ‘S’ FX

will trigger the dened slice.

Beat Slices

Slices Triggered

Step

Slice Selected

Slice ‘S’ Range 0-48

‘S’ is aligned for slices e.g. 0-16

‘S’ Exceeds available slices e.g. S 17-32 = Slice 1-16

7.23 Volume LFO

Speed 8

Instrument Vol

Cycle reset with a

new note step

Volume

Step g Rate

Speed 4

Rate 24

Rate 48

Step will trigger the LFO Rate change

Speed set in the Instrument Parameter Volume LFO will apply

Previous Step LFO Rate continues

g Rates

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

S g

0 - 48 Various

Plays a selected slice on the triggered step. While the FX range of steps is 1-

48 it is typical to apply slices smaller groups e.g. 16 Steps. If so the selected

step will wrap in the range.

Selects the rate for the instrument volume LFO. This setting is in increments

with respect to project tempo. LFO is found in the instrument parameters P2/2.

The LFO is triggered by each step either using the rate from the step LFO pan

or the default instrument parameter speed of no LFO FX is set. The LFO cycle

is reset each trigger..

The LFO is triggered by each step either using the rate from the step volume

LFO or the default instrument parameter speed if no LFO FX is set. The LFO

cycle is reset each trigger.

Slice Playback Volume LFO Rate

FX Steps

F5 16

---- ----

------- -- ----

F5 16

----

g 48

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

128 96 64 48 32 24 16 12 8 6 4 3

2 3/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 1/3 1/4

316

(3/16)

1/6 1/8

/12

(1/12)

Speed Default

Step Rate Trigger

Instrument Volume

Instrument

LFO

163

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

162

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.24 Panning LFO

Cycle reset with a

new note step

Instrument Pan

Instrument

Speed 16

Instrument Pan

Panning

L R L R

Step h Rate

Speed 8

Rate 16

Rate 8

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

Step will trigger the LFO Rate change

Speed set in the Instrument Parameter Panning LFO will apply

Previous Step LFO Rate continues

h Rates

F5 22

---- ----

------- -- ----

F5 22

----

h 16

Speed Default

Step Rate Trigger

LFO

128 96 64 48 32 24 16 12 8 6 4 3 2 3/2 1

3/4 1/2 3/8 1/3 1/4

316

(3/16)

1/6 1/8

/12

(1/12)

/16

(1/16)

/24

(1/24)

/32

(1/32)

/48

(1/48)

/64

(1/64)

7.25 Filter LFO

j Rates

128 96 64 48 32 24 16 12 8 6 4 3 2 3/2 1

3/4 1/2 3/8 1/3 1/4

316

(3/16)

1/6 1/8

/12

(1/12)

/16

(1/16)

/24

(1/24)

/32

(1/32)

/48

(1/48)

/64

(1/64)

Rate 2

Step j Rate

The impact of the LFO will depend on the type of lter selected and the

settings in the lter LFO and settings in the instrument parameters.

Default

Off

LFO will be applied to

the lter cutoff frequency.

OFF may be used to avoid lter state cutting out all audio

Speed set in the Instrument Parameter LFO will apply

Plays at default lter setting

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

h j

Various Various

Selects the rate for the instrument panning LFO. This setting is in increments

with respect to project tempo. LFO is found in the instrument parameters P2/2.

Selects the rate for the instrument lter cutoff LFO. This setting in increments

with respect to project tempo. LFO is found in the instrument parameters P2/2.

A lter type will need to be set which will effect the behaviour of the LFO.

The LFO is triggered by each step either using the rate from the step pan LFO

or the default instrument parameter speed if no LFO FX is set. The LFO cycle

is reset each trigger.

The LFO is triggered by each step either using the rate for the lter step LFO

or the default instrument parameter speed of no LFO FX is set. The LFO cycle

is reset each trigger. Higher rates 128-32 good for sweeps and mid range 4-

1/3 good for dubstep style wobble.

Panning LFO Rate Filter Cutoff LFO Rate

FX Steps

------- -- ----

F5 24

----

!OFF

F5 24

----

j 2

F5 24

---- ----

Speed Default

Step Rate Trigger

Instrument Cutoff

Instrument

LFO

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

165

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

164

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.26 Position LFO

Start

(Default)

Sample in Wavetable of

Granular play mode.

Start in %

End

Sample Position

Instrument

Step will trigger the LFO Rate change

Speed set in the Instrument Parameter Panning LFO will apply

Previous Step LFO Rate continues

h Rates

F5 22

---- ----

------- -- ----

F5 22

----

k 12

Speed Default

Step Rate Trigger

LFO

128 96 64 48 32 24 16 12 8 6 4 3 2 3/2 1

3/4 1/2 3/8 1/3 1/4

316

(3/16)

1/6 1/8

/12

(1/12)

/16

(1/16)

/24

(1/24)

/32

(1/32)

/48

(1/48)

/64

(1/64)

7.27 Finetune LFO

Pitch Tune

-1 Semitone +1 Semitone

-50 Cents

50 Cents

l Rates

128 96 64 48 32 24 16 12 8 6 4 3 2 3/2 1

3/4 1/2 3/8 1/3 1/4

316

(3/16)

1/6 1/8

/12

(1/12)

/16

(1/16)

/24

(1/24)

/32

(1/32)

/48

(1/48)

/64

(1/64)

Speed of LFO for the step.

Triggers note at correct pitch

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

Various Various

Selects the rate for the instrument wavetable / granular sample position LFO.

This setting is in increments with respect to project tempo. LFO is found in the

instrument parameters P2/2.

Selects the rate for the instrument netuning LFO. This setting in increments

with respect to project tempo. LFO is found in the instrument parameters P2/2.

The LFO will adjust the position in the wavetable or granular sample. One of

these play modes must be set to apply a position modulation from the LFO.

The step then can vary the speed of the LFO per step.

The LFO is triggered by each step applied. Slower rates are good to introduce

an evolving slight pitch variation.

Position LFO Rate Finetune LFO Rate

FX Steps

------- -- ----

F5 24

----

l 48

F5 24

---- ----

Speed Default

Step Rate Trigger

Instrument

Finetune

Instrument

LFO

167

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

166

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.28 Overdrive

Variation of overdrive instrument effect

Take care when working with overdrive, especially with headphones. This

can become loud. Start with smaller settings and expand as required.

F5 16

----

F5 16

----

D 10

D 5

F5 16

---- ----

F5 16

----

D 17

D 20

F5 16

----

7.29 Low Pass Cutoff

Note and Instrument triggered with no ltering

Sample triggered at step 1 will be fully ltered

F5 16

---- ----

----

---

L 60

L 40

L 0

----

L 80

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

0-100% 0-100%

Selects the amount of overdrive applied for the duration of the specic step.

Overdrive is found in the instrument parameters P1/2 - Effects.

Adjust the instrument cutoff frequency of the low pass lter. The instrument

lter is found in the instrument parameters P2/2 but can be disabled and this

effect will still operate.

Can be used simply to add overdrive for the specic instrument and create

variety across a pattern.

The cutoff frequency can be triggered by each step applied. This allows

sweeps using only FX steps with multiple steps ramping the value or glitchy

sequenced lter effects. 100% plays the sound as normal, all frequencies

present, while 0% will totally cutoff all frequencies.

Overdrive amount Low Pass Filter

FX Steps

Overdrive

100%

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

Per Step

< 20Hz > 20KHz

Frequency in %

100%

15913 26 37 4

Low Pass

Cutoff

Filter Sweep

169

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

168

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.30 Band Pass Cutoff 7.31 High Pass Cutoff

Note and Instrument triggered with no lteringNote and Instrument triggered

Sample triggered at step 1 will be fully ltered

Band sweeps through the frequencies

1313

1616

F5 16

---- ----

F5 16

----

---

H 50

H 75

H100

----

---

B 50

B 0

B 75

B100

----

H 25

---------

B 25

< 20Hz< 20Hz > 20KHz> 20KHz

0%0%

Frequency in %Frequency in %

100%100%

11 55 99 1313 22 66 1010 1414 33 77 1111 1515 44 88 1212 1616

High Pass

Cutoff

Band Pass

Cutoff

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

0-100% 0-100%

Adjust the instrument cutoff frequency of the band pass lter. The instrument

lter is found in the instrument parameters P2/2 but can be disabled and this

effect will still operate.

Adjust the instrument cutoff frequency of the high pass lter. The instrument

lter is found in the instrument parameters P2/2 but can be disabled and this

effect will still operate.

The cutoff frequency can be triggered by each step applied. This allows

sweeps using only FX steps with multiple steps ramping the value or glitchy

sequenced lter effects.

The cutoff frequency can be triggered by each step applied. This allows

sweeps using only FX steps with multiple steps ramping the value or glitchy

sequenced lter effects. 0% plays the sound as normal, all frequencies

present, while 100% will almost cutoff all frequencies.

Band Pass Filter High Pass Filter

FX Steps

Filter SweepFilter Sweep

171

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

170

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.32 Delay

Step Delay Send

Instrument

Master Delay

FX2

Time

Feedback

Sync / Rate

Type

7.33 Reverb

Delay send amount initiated with the note

Delay will have an audio tail beyond its step

F5 18

----

F5 18

----

F5 18

----

---- ----

----

---- ----

----

---

B 0

s 75

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

0-100% 0-100%

Sets the amount of the audio signal to send to the delay effect. The delay

effect settings are found in the Master section. Type of delay, feedback etc are

adjusted generically, for the project in master settings.

Sets the amount of the audio signal to send to the reverb effect. The reverb

effect settings are found in the Master section. Reverb size, damping, pre-

delay etc are adjusted generically, for the project in the master settings.

The effect is applied on the step triggered and the delay will be heard and

extended through the pattern. The sound will depend on the master effect

settings too. This step effect only controls the audio amount sent to the delay.

The effect is applied on the step triggered and the reverb will be heard and

extended through the pattern. The sound will depend on the master effect

settings too. This step effect only controls the audio amount sent to the reverb.

Delay Effect Send Reverb Effect Send

FX Steps

Step Reverb Send

Instrument

Master Reverb

FX2

Size

Damping

Predelay

Diffusion

Reverb send amount initiated with the note

Reverb will have an audio tail beyond its step

F5 16

---- ----

F5 16

----

F5 16

----

---- ----

----

---- ----

----

---

t 50

173

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

172

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.34 Bit Depth 7.35 Tune

Root Note

Semitones

Note C4

-12

+12

1 5 9 132 6 10 143 7 11 154 8 12 16

C C

C6C3 C5C2

CC CB

1 Octave

(-12 Semitones)

2 Octaves

(-24 Semitones)

1 Octave

(+12 Semitones)

2 Octaves

(+24 Semitones)

Set to 4 Bit reduction to create a noisy texture.

F5 18

----

F5 18

----

F5 18

----

---- ----

----

---- ----

---

E 4

E 12

FX Type Tag FX Type Tag

Value Ranges Value Ranges

FX Description FX Description

Example Example

Effect Effect

4-16 Bits -24 to +24

Semitones

Sets the bit depth for the step. This can range from 4 Bits to 16 Bits Normal

maximum setting). Lower rates create a more LoFi grainy sound texture.

Adjusts the step tuning across a 4 Octave range. Introduce a variation from

the step note between -24 Semitones to +24 Semitones.

The effect is applied on the step triggered and will apply a LoFi sound. This is

great to create chip tune and classic video game like sounds and LoFi and

glitchy emulations.

The tuning parameter transposes the current step from it’s actual ‘note’ setting.

Bit Depth Tuning Adjustments

FX Steps

Note C4 Transposed up 12 Semitones

Note C4 Transposed up 5 Semitones

Note C4 played with no transposition

C4 09

---- ----

C4 09

----

C4 09

----

C4 09

----

---- ------- --

U 12

U 0

U 5

175

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

174

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.36 Slide Up

7.37 Slide Down

Step 5 Trigger

Step 13 Trigger

Step 1 Trigger

Slides the pitch from the current note up in 1/16

of a

semitone iterations. A value of 16 will slide 1 Semitone.

Slides the pitch from the current note up in 1/16

of a

semitone iterations. A value of 16 will slide 1 Semitone.

Value 16 = 1 Semitone

Value 80 = 5 Semitone

Value 32 = 2 Semitones

Value 112 = 7 Semitones

C#6

Slide Range Converter (Estimated)

Value 0 16 32 64 80 112 128 192 224 255

Semitones 0 1 2 4 5 7 8 12 14 16

Triggers a C5 Note

Triggers a C6 Note which slides up 1 Semitone i.e. 16/16

Triggers a C6 Note which slides down 5 Semitones i.e. 80/16

Triggers a C6 Note which slides up 2 Semitones i.e. 32/16

Triggers a C6 Note which slides down 7 Semitones i.e. 112/16

C5 18

----

C5 18

----

C6 18

----

C6 18

----

C6 18

----

C6 18

----

---- ----

----

---- ----

---

F 16

F 32

---- ----

----

---- ----

---

J 80

F112

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

0-255

Creates a pitch slide up from the current note as the starting reference. The

intervals are in 1/16

Semitone mapped across the 0-255 range.

Creates a pitch slide down from the current note as the starting reference. The

intervals are in 1/16

Semitone mapped across the 0-255 range.

While the glide effect operates on a time based pitch change and is referenced

from the previous step, the slide function operates using semitone increments

to control pitch from the current step note value. Values in denominations of 16

represent semitones.

While the glide effect operates on a time based pitch change and is referenced

from the previous step, the slide function operates using semitone increments

to control pitch from the current step note value. Values in denominations of 16

represent semitones.

Slide Up - Pitch

Slide Down - Pitch

FX Steps

Value 0 16 32 64 80 112 128 192 224 255

Semitones 0 1 2 4 5 7 8 12 14 16

177

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

176

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

7.38 MIDI Messages

7.39 MIDI Chords

Hexadecimal to Decimal Converter

Hex 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Dec 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Mod Wheel.

The destination parameter is dened in the instrument

parameter settings when a MIDI Instrument is used.

MIDI Message to control external device.

0 Bank

1 ModWh

2 Brth

4 Foot

5 Glide

6 Data

7 ChVol

8 Balnc

10 Pan

11 Exp

CC A

MIDI Channel 1

Instrument

Max 16 MIDI Instruments, each

can host up to 6 CC Values

Range 0 - 127

FX1 or FX2 + Value

CC Value to send

M01

a 24

Triggers a Major Chord: C5 + 4 Semitones + 7 Semitones.

Sends a CC Value of 24 to MIDI Channel 1.

Parameter to control is set in ‘Instrument Parameters’

Triggers a C6 Note.

C5 18

----

C5 18

----

C6 18

----

C6 18

----

C6 M01

----

C6 18

----

---- ----

----

---- ----

---

a 24

F 32

---- ----

----

---- ----

---

0 47

F112

FX Type Tag

Value Ranges

FX Description

Example

Effect

a - f

0-127

Various

Issues MIDI output messages. These can be CC (Control Change), PC

(Program Change), Polyphonic Aftertouch or Channel Aftertouch selectable in

the Instrument Parameters. Requires a MIDI instrument set with the channel.

Sends MIDI Chords out which are a combination of notes based on the

numerical (Hex) value of the step FX. MID Chord is also used in conjunction

with Arp step FX.

While the glide effect operates on a time based pitch change and is referenced

from the previous step, the slide function operates using semitone increments

to control pitch from the current step note value. Values in denominations of 16

represent semitones.

The chord is derived from the hexadecimal value applied in the MIDI Chord

step and selected from a dened library of chords. The rst ‘0’ represents the

MIDI Chord effect other digits the chord notes, offset from the root note.

MIDI CC A-F Messages

MIDI Chords Out

FX Steps

Hex code represents

+ Semitones from root

e.g. 0 47 Maj

Tracker Mini Chords (Root C Examples)

MIDI Chord

Hex Code

Scale

Chord

Example from Root C

0 27 Sus2 C - D - G

0 28 Sus2 #5 C - D - G#

0 36 DimTriad C - D# - F#

0 37 Min C - D# - G

0 47 Maj C - E - G

0 48 AugTriad C - E - G#

0 57 Sus4 C - F - G

0 5A Stack4 C - F - A#

0 5C Open4 C - F - C

0 67 Sus #4 C - F# - G

0 7C Open5 C - G - C

0 7E Stack5 C - G - D

0279 Sus2Add6 C - D - G - A

027A Sus2 b7 C - D - G - A#

027B Sus2Maj7 C - E - G - B

MIDI Chord

Hex Code

Scale

Chord

Example from Root C

0368 Dim7 C - D# - F# - G#

036A Half Dim C - D# - F# - A#

0378 Min b6 C - D# - G - G#

0379 Min6 C - D# - G - A

037A Min7 C - D# - G - A#

037B MinMaj7 C - D# - G - B

0479 Maj6 C - E - G - A

047A Dom7 C - E - G - A#

047B Maj7 C - E - G - B

0489 Aug Add6 C - E - G# - A

048A Aug b7 C - E - G# - A#

048B Aug Maj7 C - E - G# - B

057A Sus b7 C - F - G - A#

057B Su4Maj7 C - F - G - B

Audio is the central element in Tracker Mini

and at the heart of almost everything. The end

to end process of Sampling - Editing -

Performing carries many sub topics that

involve audio. Patterns are made with

instruments and notes that trigger sounds. The

process starts with the procuring, capturing or

recording of audio. Multiple audio sources are

available from which to sample. It is possible to

connect external line level gear or the internal

microphone. In addition the ability to render

internal audio is also a useful feature. Tracker

Mini works with PCM WAV les and converts

automatically to use 44.1kHz, 16bit. Samples

in the pool are interpolated. Anti-aliasing option

is available in the ‘Cong’ menu. Many options

exist to render and export either parts of

patterns, full songs or track stems. Be aware

rendering may take some time as it

sequentially renders to audio almost real time.

A toolkit of destructive editing features helps to

prepare audio for use in instruments and

patterns and for further integration with other

features such as the play modes and routing

through effects. Each Project can hold almost 12

minutes of mono or almost 6 minutes of stereo

audio samples although the available memory

may be reduced by using higher quality audio.

Tracker Mini already is supplied out of the box

with a number of samples and instruments pre-

loaded to the supplied SD Card. These are great

to get things started and additional user samples

or third party sample packs can be added and

imported. It is important to state that adherence

to copyright laws and original material

ownership should be respected when recording

and sampling audio. Take care to operate within

any relevant laws especially if considering to

commercially release a track.

Audio

179

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

178

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

181

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

180

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

8.1 Master Pages - Audio Control

Audio is controlled in the Master pages of which 3 are available and

selected by default with button [4]. This is where the Tracker Mini mixer is

found to control the audio levels and also the master effects. This section

will concentrate on the audio level and routing controls. The Master effects

are covered in another section.

Master - Page 1

The Master mix is the rst page in the master pages and contains the main

output level as well as a series of effects and gives access to the master

reverb and delay effects. Rendered audio exports of the ‘master’ i.e. all

tracks, uses the volume level and functions in Master page 1.

Master Page

Page 1 of 3

Master Effect Pages

Access to the master delay,

reverb, limiter & EQ

parameter pages.

Master Output Effects

Bass boost, Space and

Saturation single parameter

effect settings.

Volume

Master output level

applied to the main

‘Out’ connection

Volume

-33.08 dB

Reverb Delay EQ Saturation

Soft Clip

Hard Clip

Soft Clip

Saturate

Overdrive

Drive+

Bass Boost

Limiter Space

Master 1/3 0m:00s P1.008

0.00 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Mute

Track 2 Track 6Track 3 Track 7Track 4 Track 8Track 1 Track 5

Track Mixer 2/3 0m:00s P1.008

Track Mixer - Page 2

This Master page controls the track volume levels. Press [4] to cycle

through each page. Each of the 8 tracks is displayed with a real time bar

meter with the current setting in the bar and the specic value shown in the

track label. Tracks rendered as individual stems will use the levels set for

tracks. Note that track names can be edited in this page by pressing [Rec].

Function

Command

Adjust Track Level Hold Track Screen Button 1-8 + Press (Up) or (Down) or [+] / [-]

Mute Track Press Track Screen Button 1-8 to toggle Mute / Unmute

Unmute Track Press Track Screen Button 1-8 to toggle Mute / Unmute

Solo Track Hold [Shift] + Press Track Screen Button 1-8 to toggle Solo on/off

Edit Track Names Press [Rec], Edit Mode. Press Track Screen Button 1-8 for track to rename.

Function

Command

Navigate Options Press (Left) or (Right)

Edit Parameter With option selected, Press (Up) or (Down) or [+] / [-]

Select Effect Page Press the Screen Buttons 2 [Reverb], 3 [Delay], 4 [Limiter] or 5 [EQ].

Quick Level Adjust Hold [4] + [+] or [-]. Button [4] is by default, assigned to Master Page.

Tracks & Track

Names

Muted tracks are dimmed

Track Mixer

Page 2 of 3

Mute State

Screen button sets mute /

unmute state. Also sets solo

/ un-soloed with shift.

Mute Button Behaviour.

In the master section mute is applied when the button is released after being pressed. This is different to muting

in the Pattern section where mutes are applied immediately when the button is pressed.

Level Adjustment

Adjustable level setting for

track. Bar graph and value

displayed. Also controllable

by MIDI CC71-CC82

Actual Level

Actual audio level for track. High

levels indicate red, medium

yellow, lower levels green.

183

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

182

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

Global Mixer - Page 3

The Global Mixer is the third page in the master pages and contains the line

in level and line in delay / reverb send levels for the pass through. Also the

overall master delay, reverb level and dry / wet mix are available. These

can all be muted and all soloed, with the exception of the line delay and

reverb which can only be muted / unmuted. Press button [4] to cycle pages.

Mute Button Behaviour.

In the master section mute is applied when the button is released after being pressed. This is different to muting

in the Pattern section where mutes are applied immediately when the button is pressed.

Actual stereo level.

Centre + Right bars

Global Mixer

Page 3 of 3

Line Input Passthrough

Line In level, Delay and

Reverb Send amounts.

Level

Left bar is the level setting

also displayed in the label

area. Also controllable by

MIDI CC79-82

-4.50 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Mute

1.80 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Unmute

Reverb Line RvbDry Mix Line InDelay Line Dly

Global Mixer 3/3 0m:00s P1.008

Function

Command

Adjust Level Hold Option Screen Button 1-6 + Press (Up) or (Down) or [+] / [-]

Mute Option Press Option Screen Button 1-6 to toggle Mute / Unmute

Unmute Track Press Option Screen Button 1-6 to toggle Mute / Unmute

Solo Option Hold [Shift] + Press Option Screen Button 1-4 to toggle Solo on/off

Delay

Displays and adjusts amount of

master (all tracks) delay amount.

Reverb

Displays and adjusts amount of

master (all tracks) reverb amount.

Dry / Wet

Displays and adjusts mix level of

the delay and reverb and the

unaffected dry signal.

8.2 Audio Sources

There are a number of sources where Tracker Mini can access audio.

Some of which are ‘live’ sources and can easily be sampled. Others are

manually managed or rendered within the device.

SD Card Samples

Audio samples

Line Input

External audio gear connection.

Line Input

3.5mm Input jack which allows Stereo (TRS) and Mono (TS) audio inputs. Stereo

signals are converted to mono when recorded and the L & R channels can also

be selected individually.

Render

A feature which is available with the internal functions is render. This bounces or

exports an audio le based on the selected pattern / tracks which can then be

made immediately available as a sample or to use from the instrument list.

Microphone

The Tracker Mini has an internal microphone located on the front panel. This

allows direct recording of vocals, environmental sounds and general audio.

SD Card

Audio samples are stored on the SD Card. These can be sampled and stored

from within Tracker Mini but also can be manually transferred onto the SD card

from and external source using a PC or Mac.

Tracker Mini is supplied with a 3.5mm Stereo Male Jack to 2 x 6.3mm Mono Female Socket

adapter to allow interfacing with external gear and using the more common 6.3mm mono cables.

Microphone

Internal Microphone.

Render

Bounce Internal Audio.

Folder

185

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

184

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

8.3 Audio Inputs

Tracker Mini has two audio inputs that provide a source to sampling and

recording from external sources. Internal microphone is on the front plate.

The physical audio inputs are located on the bottom of the device and

provide access for line in either using TRS Stereo or TS Mono jacks by

using the supplied 3.5mm to 2 x 6.3mm adapter.

Line Input

The input can be selected between Left, Right or Stereo. While these are

selectable options Tracker Mini records in mono. Tracker Mini can record

audio or play a pattern audio but not both at the same time. Patterns when

playing will output MIDI but not audio if sample recording is in progress.

Left

Line In Out

Internal Mic

Right

Stereo

Stereo Stereo

[Sample Recorder]

All Samples are Recorded in Mono

[Master]

Global Mixer - Page 3 of 3

Line In

Mute On / Off

Send FX

Gain

Delay Reverb

Monitor On / Off

SD Card Instrument List

Master Output

Page 1 of 3

Line In Pass Through

Recording

Audio saved to SD Card and / or

directly to the instrument list

OP Z

The sample recorder page can select sampling input, but the general input

is dened in the ‘Cong’ parameter settings. The Mixer passthrough audio

operates in stereo.

▌ SETTING THE SAMPLER LINE IN STEREO / MONO OPTION

1. Press [Shift] + [4] or use [Menu] to open the conguration settings.

2. Navigate with the 1

and 2

Screen buttons to select ‘General’.

3. In the central window pane, Press the 4

or 5

Screen buttons to

navigate to ‘Line in channel’.

4. Press [Change], 6

Screen button to select the options. The pop-up

window will appear.

5. In the middle page pane, Press the 4

or 5

Screen buttons to navigate

to select ‘Stereo’, ‘Mono Left’ or ‘Mono Right’.

6. Press [Apply], 6

Screen Button or [Cancel], 3

Screen button to exit

without changing.

▌ SETTING THE MIXER LINE IN PASS THROUGH PARAMETERS

1. Open the Master pages, Press [4]. Navigate to the Global Mixer, Page 3

of 3. Press [4] to cycle through pages.

2. Line In by default is muted. Press [Unmute] 4

Screen button for the

Line In channel to mute or unmute. If unmuted this will state [Mute].

3. Line In can be soloed. Press [Shift] + [Solo] 4

Screen button for the

Line In channel to toggle solo on or off.

4. Hold [Mute], 4

Screen button + Press [+] / [-] or (Up) or (Down) to

adjust the level. This will adjust the ‘Line In’ setting.

5. The Line in signal can also be sent to the master Delay and Reverb

effect. These channels may also be muted. Press [Mute] / [Unmute] to

toggle the Mute / Unmute State of the respective screen button.

6. To adjust the Delay and Reverb send amount, Hold [Mute] for the

respective effect screen button + Press [+] / [-] or (Up) or (Down).

7. The Mixer bar graphs will show the audio in real time for the level,

dimmed if muted and bright if audible / unmuted. The level and send

amount settings are also shown on the bar and in the label.

187

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

186

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

Microphone

Tracker Mini has an internal microphone which allows capturing of live

vocals or sounds directly into the device. The mic is located on the lower

front panel of Tracker Mini and is a stereo input. A microphone can also be

connected via the audio input and the 3.5mm jack but this performance will

depend on the microphone, pre-amp and associated signal path. A few

things should be considered when using a mic.

• Tracker Mini does not supply 48V Phantom power normally used for

condenser microphones. Dynamic mics are therefore advised.

• The Mic selection input in the sample recorder refers to the internal

microphone audio.

• A microphone can be connected on the line input, however

recording from a microphone will always be in mono. The actual

audio chain and performance will depend on the external

conguration (Pre-amp, mic type etc)

• Recording with a microphone follows similar principles to line-in. The

gain may need more pre-adjustment before recording due to the

nature or microphones and recording.

8.4 Sample Formats

The general principle when using Tracker Minis is to use short samples.

Creativity often is inspired by limitations. While SD Card size is large and

can hold a lot of high quality samples, Internal memory in Tracker Mini is at

a premium. The balance between quality and le size is an important one.

Project Sample Time

Up to 12 Minutes per Project (Mono) or almost 6 Minutes per Project (Stereo) at

standard quality audio imports.

Individual Sample Recording Time

Maximum sample length is approx 45 seconds per sample

Sample Format

The internal sampler engine operates at 44.1kHz, 16, 24, oat 32 Bit, Mono or

Stereo, WAV audio les

Instrument List

Samples can be loaded from the SD Card and into Tracker Mini memory. A

sample loaded to the internal list becomes an instrument.

Browser Import Format

Uncompressed Wav les. Imported audio operates at 44.1kHz, 16, 24 oat 32

Bit, Mono or Stereo, WAV audio les.

Browser Import File Size

Large les can be trimmed to import. Low quality import mode also possible to

reduce the le size.

Rendered Output Files

Stems created are PCM Wav les. The exported audio le is 44.1kHz, 16 bit.

189

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

188

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

8.6 Sampling

Everyone will develop a personal workow for sampling and the process

may differ due to the source to be recorded. Polyend Tracker Mini allows

approx 45 seconds of recorded audio time per sample and each project has

a total of over 700 Seconds, almost 12 Mins of mono sample time or 6 mins

of stereo sampling time. The internal sampler engine operates at 44.1kHz,

16, 24, oat 32 Bit, Mono or Stereo, WAV audio les

The main page used at the sampling stage is the ‘Sample Recorder’

accessed via the [Menu]. Here the parameter settings can be adjusted pre

sampling. The selected source will determine the available options.

Controlling the start and stop recording process is triggered from this page.

Source

Line In

Gain

Monitor

RecordLevel

Metronome

Cong

Off

Line In

Mic

Sample Recorder 0m:00s P1.008

Monitor.

Will allow the audio source to

be previewed at the output.

Source

Select the input to record

in the sampler.

Gain

Boosts the signal

level

Recording

Starts Recording [Record].

Also button becomes [Stop] while recording in is in progress.

Metronome Cong

The metronome cong screen button gives direct access to the metronome settings. This page can also be

accessed from the [Menu] option > Cong > Metronome.

Level

Visual indicator of source

volume level.

8.5 Recording Audio Workow

Sampling in Tracker Mini takes place in the ‘Sample Recorder’ page. This is

the rst step in the process and is followed by editing the audio captured.

Sampling in this page can be from the Line In or Mic audio sources.

Connect an external synth,

audio source or microphone.

Open the [Sample Recorder]

page to set up for sampling.

Select the source to record from.

Options are; Line In or Mic.

Save Only to the SD

Card.

Save to the SD Card

and also load into the

instrument list.

Program using the

instrument into a pattern.

Adjust gain to set to a

suitable level.

Play the connected

audio source.

Press [Record] to capture

the audio sample.

[Stop] sampling.

Max 45 sec audio sample.

Save the sample. Trim the start and end

of the sample to select

the area to save.

Connect Gear Sample Recorder

Gain

Play

Save

Record

Crop

Stop

Select Source

Save to SD

Save & Load

Pattern

191

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

190

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

Sampling Process

Starting by selecting the ‘Sample Recorder’ page within the [Menu].

As pre-recording optional actions, select the

audio [Source], set [Monitor] to on and adjust

the [Gain] to establish a suitable recording

level. External devices should be auditioned

while adjusting the gain to hear the impact.

Press [Record]. 8th Screen Button, to start

sampling the incoming audio.

Play the external device.

Trim the [Start] and [End] points of the

recorded sample while previewing the audio

to get the positions correct. Also [Zoom] in or

out as a visual aid for precise editing.

If required use [Crop] to edit to the start and

end points selected.

The [Undo] option can reset previous state.

Press [Save] when editing is complete.

Alternatively Press [Cancel] to exit without

saving. Conrm cancel with [Yes].

The sampler will capture the audio into the

Tracker Mini memory buffer and display the

recording time. Recording will automatically

stop if the memory is full at ~45 Secs.

Press [Stop]. 8th Screen Button, to manually

stop the sampling process.

Type in a name for the sample or use [Auto

Name] to generate a system name. Pads act

as the qwerty keyboard, [Enter] will enter a

highlighted character.

Press [Save], 8th Screen Button, to save the

le into the SD Card ‘Recordings’ folder.

Press [Save & Load], 7th Screen Button, to

save the le into the SD Card ‘Recordings’

folder and also load the sample into the

instrument list. The instrument list will open

with this option.

78 8 109

14 13

Source

Line In

Gain

Monitor

RecordLevel

Metronome

Cong

Off

Line In

Mic

Sample Recorder 0m:00s P1.008

Start Point

0.428s

Preview UndoCrop Cancel Save

End Point

5.038s

Zoom

1.00

Sample Recorder 0m:00s P1.008

2.038s

Stop

Sample Recorder 0m:00s P1.008

Enter CancelAuto Name

Save & Load

Save

Sample Recorder 0m:00s P1.008

recording001

p - +

Backspace

Caps Lock

Space

▌ SAMPLING IN THE SAMPLE RECORDER

1. Press [Menu] then select ‘Sample Recorder’ to open the sampler page.

2. Setup the input and levels.

• Ensure the correct input to record is selected, Press [Source], 1

Screen button to toggle selections.

• Select monitoring ON, Press [Monitor], 7

Screen button to toggle.

• It may be useful to play the device to make it audible to record

before starting to record to allow the setting up of the level.

• Adjust gain to suit input level. Press [Gain] and Press (Up), (Down)

or [+] / [-] buttons. The Level meter should not be lit red but green /

amber, approx 70%.

3. Press [Record], 8

Screen button to start sampling. The recording time

that has lapsed will be displayed.

4. Press [Stop], 8

Screen button to stop sampling. It may be useful to

also stop playing the recorded device. If stop is not initiated, sampling

will continue until the memory is full.

5. The sample can be cropped before saving. This allows removal of any

gaps or unwanted audio at the start end. The [Zoom], 4

Screen Button

+ [+] / [-] may help to get close up to areas to trim.

6. Press [Start], 2

Screen button, then Press [+] / [-] to set the start point.

Press [End], 3

Screen Button, then Press [+] / [-] to set the end point. It

may be an iterative process to set both as desired.

7. Press [Crop], 5

Screen button to trim the sample to the selected start

and end points. The sample is cropped.

8. Save the sample, Press [Save], 8

Screen button.

9. The sample can be manually named in the text editor window.

Alternatively, Press [Auto Name], 5

Screen Button to set a system

generated name.

10. Press [Save & Load], 7

Screen button. This saves to the SD Card

‘recordings’ folder, selects the instrument and opens the instrument list.

11. Alternatively, Press [Save], 8

Screen button. This saves directly to the

SD Card ‘recordings’ folder only.

193

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

192

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

▌ RENDERING SELECTION IN A PATTERN

1. Press [1] to select the pattern mode page.

2. Press [Rec] to select record edit mode.

3. Hold [Shift] + (Up), (Down), (Left), (Right) to select the range to render.

For example, select across 3 tracks, 8 steps, of a percussion sequence.

4. Press [More]. The 8

Screen Button to select more pattern options.

5. Press [Render Selection], the 1

Screen Button. This will be dimmed

and unavailable if [Rec] is off.

6. The naming page appears. A name can be edited or press [Auto Name],

Screen Button to automatically apply a name. Manually editing the

name offers an opportunity to make the name relevant, although a

longer process. Auto name may be less relevant in terms of the name,

but is a faster process.

7. When the name is entered, Press [Render & Load], 7

Screen Button.

This option will not only render the audio but also automatically load the

sample into the instrument list. The pattern will halt playback if playing.

When the le has been ‘exported’, the instrument list will open ready to

preview and the sample selected.

8. Alternatively, Press [Render Selection], 7

Screen Button. This option

will render the audio. The pattern will halt playback if playing. This will

render and save onto the SD Card.

9. The SD Card save location is in the ‘Export/ ProjectName/ Selection’

folder for both render options. Rendered les are 44.1kHz, 16 bit. Files

are accessible from sample loader.

8.7 Rendering and Exporting Internal Audio

Sampling is the process of recording and capturing audio, typically from

external sources in the ‘Sample Recording’ page. Sampling of internal

audio is performed through a different process where the audio is rendered.

Rendering is available in two levels:-

• Pattern Level. The render function is available from within the ‘Pattern’

pages and is performed on selected parts of a pattern. This is useful to

lock in FX1 / FX2 and send effects into an audio sample or to combine

multiple note tracks, rendered together as a chord sample.

• Project Level. The export function is accessible in the ‘File’ pages. This

will allow rendering of complete patterns, individual tracks, samples or

entire songs, saving directly to an SD Card. This is useful to create full

stems and to later mix / remix in a DAW or for use in another package

or to simply distribute to others.

Quick Rendering a Pattern Selection

D6 D603 03

---- -------- ----

D6 D403 05

---- -------- ----

E6 D603 03

---- -------- ----

E6 D602 03

---- -------- ----

D6 D403 04

---- -------- ----

D6 D403 04

---- -------- ----

F6 D602 03

---- ----

m 5 ----

D6 D602 03

---- ----

D6 D403 05

---- -------- C 75

D6 D603 03

---- -------- ----

E6 D602 03

---- ----

F 4 TSTP

D6 D603 03

---- ----

TSTP TSTP

D6 D403 04

---- -------- ----

D6 D403 05

---- -------- C 75

E6 D602 03F 4 T 50

---- ----

F6 D602 03m -5 T 50

---- ----

D6 D403 04

---- ----

V80 C 50

D6 D403 04

---- ----

V 60 C 50

F6 D602 03

---- -------- ----

F6 D602 03

---- -------- ----

Track 1 Track 3Track 2 Track 4

Step Selection

A number of steps in a pattern, across various tracks can be rendered into

one single sample. The pattern page is used with [Rec] mode on.

Folder location when using the render option in the pattern page.

/Export/ ProjectName/ Selection - Will save to current project name

Sub Folders

Represents the Project

Rendered Audio le for the selected part of the pattern

Folder for selected partial pattern renders

SD Card

/Root Directory

/Export

/ProjectName

Selection0001.wav

/Selection

Pattern Selections Project

195

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

194

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

▌ RENDER AND EXPORT A FULL PATTERN

1. Press [Shift] + [3] or Press [Menu] to select the le options page.

2. Press [Export], 7

Screen button to select the export specic options.

3. Press [Export Pattern], 3

Screen button to render and export.

4. The currently active pattern will be rendered and exported. Any muted

tracks are not rendered and will remain silent in the exported audio le.

5. A folder is created on the SD Card that represents the render. This is

located in the /Export sub folder. The le itself will be called ‘master.

wav’. Each time the pattern is exported a new folder is created. The

folder naming convention is:-

Project name_P Pattern number_Sequential render number

▌ RENDER AND EXPORT ALL PATTERN STEMS

1. Press [Shift] + [3] or Press [Menu] to select the le options page.

2. Press [Export], 7

Screen button to select the export specic options.

3. Press [Export Patt Stems], 3

Screen button to render and export.

4. All tracks plus the delay and reverb audio will be rendered in mono and

exported. Also a stereo master le is rendered of all tracks. Any muted

tracks are not rendered and will remain silent in the exported audio le.

5. A folder is created on the SD Card that represents the render. This is

located in the /Export sub folder. The 11 les will be called ‘track 1.wav’

etc, ‘delay.wav’, ‘reverb.wav’ and ‘master.wav’. Each time the pattern is

exported a new folder is created. The folder naming convention is:-

Project name_P Pattern number_S for Stems + Sequential number

Rendering and Exporting Stems

The function to render and export full stems for tracks or full songs and

patterns is found in the ‘File’ options. MIDI Clock IN must be set to Internal

in the Cong settings in order to render stems.

Hold [Shift] + [3] or Access ‘File’ in the [Menu]

Function

Screen

Button

Description

Export Song 1st

Renders an individual audio les for the selected song. Muted tracks

are not rendered. The stem will cover the entire song length and are

44.1kHz, 16 Bit PCM Wav les.

Export Song Stems 2nd

Renders individual audio les for each of the 8 unmuted tracks and 2

effects, delay and reverb, all in stereo. Muted tracks are not

rendered. In addition a stereo mix of the complete song is created as

an audio le. The stems will cover the entire song length and are

44.1kHz, 16 Bit PCM Wav les.

Export Pattern 3rd

Renders an individual audio le for the selected project pattern.

Muted tracks are not rendered. The stem will cover the entire pattern

length and are 44.1kHz, 16 Bit PCM Wav les. A unique folder is

created to represent the render.

Export Patt Stems 4th

Renders individual and complete audio les for the project patterns.

Muted tracks are not rendered. The stems will cover the entire

pattern length and are 44.1kHz, 16 Bit PCM Wav les. This will

render 11 stems (Tracks, Delay, Reverb and Master). A unique folder

is created to represent the render.

Export Samples 6th

Exports the project .pti instrument les as .wav les. This captures

instruments to audio. Exported to the SD Card within the folder,

Projects/ProjectName/samples, named by the instrument name.

New

Project

Open Save AsSave Export Games

Export

Song

Export

Song Stems

Export

Pattern

Export

Patt Stems

Export

Samples

Cancel

Folder location when using the render option in the le page.

/Export/ ProjectName/ Selection - Exports to the folder named for the current project

The rendering process is almost real-time based on the project duration (in fact song stems render approx

20% faster of the time duration of the playback) and operates by rendering stems one by one. This means

when exporting stems the render time can be 2-3 times, maybe even longer than the original song

duration. The render progress is displayed when in operation.

197

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

196

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

Rendered Pattern Locations

Rendered les are exported to the /export folder and new sub-folders are

created for patterns and pattern stems. These are accessible from the

sample loader function pages.

Full Pattern ExportsPattern Stem Exports

Sub Folders

Represents the Project

Project, Pattern number, Sequential render number

Rendered Audio le for the selected project, pattern

Stems Render 11 Audio Files.

Rendered Audio stems for each track in stereo,

also the delay and reverb send audio in stereo.

Additionally a stereo master track is rendered.

Rendered les are 44.1kHz, 16 bit.

Project, Pattern number, Sequential render number

Project, Pattern number, S = Stems + Sequential number

SD Card

/Root Directory

/Export

/ProjectName

/ProjectName_P3_0001

Master.wav

delay.wav

track 1.wav

track 4.wav

master.wav

track 2.wav

track 5.wav

track 7.wav

reverb.wav

track 3.wav

track 6.wav

track 8.wav

/ProjectName_P3_0002

/ProjectName_P3_S0001

▌ RENDER AND EXPORT A FULL SONG

1. Press [Shift] + [3] or Press [Menu] to select the le options page.

2. Press [Export], 7

Screen button to select the export specic options.

3. Press [Export Song], 1

Screen button to render and export.

4. The current song will be rendered and exported. Any muted tracks are

not rendered and therefore remain silent in the exported audio le.

5. A folder is created on the SD Card that represents the render. This is

located in the /Export sub folder. The le itself will be called ‘master.

wav’. Each time the song is exported a new folder is created. The folder

naming convention is:-

Project name_Song_Sequential render number

▌ RENDER AND EXPORT ALL SONG STEMS

1. Press [Shift] + [3] or Press [Menu] to select the le options page.

2. Press [Export], 7

Screen button to select the export specic options.

3. Press [Export Song Stems], 2

Screen button to render and export.

4. All tracks plus the delay and reverb audio will be rendered in stereo and

exported. Also a stereo master le is rendered of all tracks. Any muted

tracks are not rendered and will remain silent in the exported audio le.

5. A folder is created on the SD Card that represents the render. This is

located in the /Export sub folder. The 11 les will be called ‘track 1.wav’

etc, ‘delay.wav’, ‘reverb.wav’ and ‘master.wav’. Each time the pattern is

exported a new folder is created. The folder naming convention is:-

Project name_Song_S for Stems + Sequential number

Project

199

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

198

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

Rendered Song Locations

Rendered les are exported to the /export folder and new sub-folders are

created for songs and song stems. These are accessible from the sample

loader function pages.

Song ExportsSong Stem Exports

Sub Folders

Represents the Project

Project, song, Sequential render number

Rendered Audio le for the selected song

Stems Render 11 Audio Files.

Rendered Audio stems for each track in stereo,

also the delay and reverb send audio in stereo.

Additionally a stereo master track is rendered.

Rendered les are 44.1kHz, 16 bit.

Project, Song, Sequential render number

Project, Song, S = Stems + Sequential number

SD Card

/Root Directory

/Export

/ProjectName

/ProjectName_Song_0001

Master.wav

delay.wav

track 1.wav

track 4.wav

master.wav

track 2.wav

track 5.wav

track 7.wav

reverb.wav

track 3.wav

track 6.wav

track 8.wav

/ProjectName_Song_0002

/ProjectName_Song_S0001

Project

8.8 Advanced Audio Editing

Sampling captures audio using the ‘Sample Recorder’ and provides basic

editing features for quick and easy use of the sample in the project. An

instrument can be selected from within the sample editor by holding

[Instrument] to open the browser. A more advanced set of editing features

exists in the ‘Sample Editor’ which focuses on the currently selected

sample. Press the D-Pad (Enter) button to preview the audio.

Select

Effect

Start

0.000s

Zoom

1.00

UndoEnd

32.000s

Effect

Sample Editor

Normalizer

Overdrive

Limiter

Crop

Delay

Compressor

Reverse

Flanger

Bitcrusher

WT Smoother

Amplier

Equalizer

Chorus

Timestretch Beat

8.beats

Effect

List of effect options to select ready

to apply to the current sample

Start

Adjusts the starting point

marker in the sample.

Start

Adjusts the starting point

marker in the sample.

End

Adjusts the ending point

marker in the sample.

End

Adjusts the ending point

marker in the sample.

The start and end points determine the region of the sample which will

be affected by the applied effect. The sample can be cropped to the

desired positions and save memory by discarding unwanted audio.

Select / Apply

Applies or selects options for

application of the highlighted effect.

Sample

Current Sample

Undo

Restore last command

Zoom

Zoom closer up to aid

precise editing.

201

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

200

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Audio

Audio Effects Overview

These effects are applied destructively and baked into the selected audio

sample in project memory. The undo command can restore a prior state

unless saved. The original SD Card le remains intact and is unaffected.

Effect

Description

Normalizer

Adjusts the gain on the selected sample or part of the sample between the start / end

point. Gain will be based on the normalizer 0-100% level and will boost or attenuate the

selected audio consistently across the selection.

Crop

Trims the audio at the start and end points and discards any audio outside of these

settings. Useful to manage sample size and create samples with precise duration.

Reverse

Reverses the audio between the selected start and end point settings.

Amplier

Amplies the audio within the start and end points by the selected ‘amplier’ level 0-5 in

the effect. Effectively multiples the sample or selection.

Overdrive

Adds distortion into the audio sample for the selected audio between start and end.

Three model types 0,1,2 are selectable as well as a gain adjustment.

Delay

Introduces delay into the audio sample or selected audio between start and end.

Feedback and time parameters are adjustable before applying.

Bitcrusher

Bitcrushes the audio sample or selected audio between start and end. The number of

bits can be adjusted between 1-16. Also sample rate can be adjusted.

Chorus

Chorus effect giving a classic multi layered instrument sound can be applied to the

audio sample or selection. Number of chorus voices 1-8 and length between 2-92ms

can be adjusted before applying the effect into the audio.

Flanger

Flanger effect giving a classic out of phase layered sound can be applied to the audio

sample or selection. Several parameter settings can be adjusted before applying the

effect into the audio. These include Length, Offset, Depth and Rate.

Equalizer

Equalizer also called EQ affects the frequency bands in an audio signal by boosting or

attenuating. The 3-Band EQ can be adjusted before applying into the sample or

selected part of the sample.

Limiter

A limiter is used to control or tame dynamic peaks by reducing or limiting the transients.

Normally used as a corrective or control function and associated with loudness rather

than a creative effect. Includes Threshold, Attack and Release parameters.

Compressor

A compressor is used to manage and reduce dynamic range. In this application it is

used as a control function. The typical parameters of Threshold, Ratio, Attack and

Release are adjustable before applying to the audio sample or selection.

WT Smoother

This is a tool used to optimise and convert audio into a sample more compatible with

the wavetable play mode function. The wavetable window settings are adjustable

before applying to the audio sample or selection.

Timestretch Beat

Creative manipulation tool to stretch the sample time which in turn affects the sound.

Used more for beat based material. The tempo, steps, micro-step and granule are

adjustable before applying to the audio sample or selection.

Timestretch Note

Creative manipulation tool to stretch the sample time which in turn affects the sound.

Used more for melody based material. The length and granule are adjustable before

applying to the audio sample or selection.

Fade In

Quick and easy application of a fade in to the audio sample or a selected part. This

operates at a xed setting across the start / end selected part of the sample.

Fade Out

Quick and easy application of a fade out to the audio sample or a selected part. This

operates at a xed setting across the start / end selected part of the sample.

8.9 Sample Editor Effects

The Sample Editor pages have more advanced destructive editing options.

A comprehensive range of effects can also be applied to affect the audio

either to correct or adjust or to create new sounds. Some effects are

applied directly, while others have parameters and settings

The preview option found in the selected effect sub-page will render the

effect and audition the sample with the effect applied. In the main ‘Sample

Editor’ Page, Pressing the D-Pad (Enter) button will preview the audio.

The effect is applied to the audio sample or the audio selected between the

start and end points.

▌ APPLYING AN AUDIO EFFECT

1. Press [Menu] and select ‘Sample Editor’ options page.

2. Press [Start] or [End] and Press [+] / [-] or (Up) (Down) to adjust the

sample selection area or simply leave the start and end points at the

edges to cover the complete sample.

3. Press [Effect], 7

or 8

Screen Button to navigate to the effect to apply.

4. With the desired effect highlighted, ie bounding box selection, press

[Select Effect] or [Apply], 6

Screen Button.

5. The effect will either be immediately applied by pressing ‘Apply’ or will

open the effect page options if pressing ‘Select Effect’.

6. If an effect page and its parameters are available, adjust as desired

using the Screen and [+] / [-] Buttons. Press [Back] to return to page.

• Press [Preview] 7

Screen Button to hear the newly affected audio

• Press [Apply], 8

Screen Button, to conrm and render.

Select

Effect

Start

0.000s

Zoom

1.00

UndoEnd

32.000s

Effect

Sample Editor

Normalizer

Overdrive

Limiter

Crop

Delay

Compressor

Reverse

Flanger

Bitcrusher

WT Smoother

Amplier

Equalizer

Chorus

Timestretch Beat

8.beats

Back

ApplyPreview

Select Effect

Opens the parameter options

for the effect before

presenting the option to apply

Apply

Immediately applies the

selected effect. No parameter

settings are provided.

203

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

202

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Normalizer and Amplier

Both the Normalizer and Amplier apply similar effects in that they adjust

the gain across the audio sample or region. Normalizer gain will be based

on the level setting where 100% will maximize the audio level across an

entire sample by using the highest peak point as reference. This is a typical

normalised application. Think of the Amplier as a multiplier of the audio

gain where 1 would be the current state and numbers below 1 will attenuate

and above 1 will boost. Amplied audio can exceed the normal range

Crop and Reverse

Both the crop and reverse functions apply an immediate edit to the selected

or the entire audio sample. Reverse simply reverses the audio playback

direction while crop will trim and discard the audio outside of the start / end

markers. Zoom may help focus on more precise marker setting locations.

Audio

Original audio sample and

start / end selection.

Original audio sample cropped to

start / end selection and auto

zoomed to view in the full window.

Original audio sample reversed

based on the approximate start /

end selection and aligned for

smooth transition.

BackLevel

100%

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Normalizer

8.beats

BackAmplier

1.000

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Amplier

8.beats

Normalizer

Gain adjustment based on the 0-100% Level

Amplier

Gain is based on the 0.01 - 5 amplication range

Overdrive and Bitcrusher

Overdrive is a classic distortion effect based on driving the analog audio

signal into an amplier hard. This gives a grungy, edge to the sound or full

on distortion. Given the aggressive nature of overdrive the gain adjustment

is a welcome feature. Bit crushing is a process which also gives a distortion

like effect and is based on lowering the digital quality down from a standard

16bit, 44.1kHz and introduces a LoFi style sound.

Delay and Chorus

The classic time based effects include delay and chorus. Delay creates an

echo by delaying the audio signal and feeding back into the input. Chorus is

similar to delay in that instead of feeding back it layers slightly delayed

versions of the signal creating a thicker, wider sound.

BackGain

3.000

Type

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Overdrive

8.beats

BackFeedback

95 %

Time

50 ms

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Delay

8.beats

BackBits

Rate

44100 Hz

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Bitcrusher

8.beats

BackLength

20 ms

Voices

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Chorus

8.beats

Overdrive

Three overdrive types are available.

Gain control from 0.01 to 5.000.

Delay

Delay time 50ms to 5000 ms.

Feedback from 1% - 95%.

Bitcrusher

Bit reduction from 16 bit down to 1, sample rate also

can be adjusted from 44100 Hz down to 500 Hz.

Chorus

Length has a range of 2 ms - 92 ms.

Voices refer to the layers of audio 1 - 8.

205

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

204

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Flanger

Flanger follows similar principles to delay by doubling the audio and

introducing a slight phase shift and delay between the audio signals when

playing back. Flangers offer an evolving sweeping sound.

Equalizer, Compressor and Limiter.

The three effects, Equalizer, Compressor and Limiter are used for mixing

and nalising a sample rather than creative variations. In music production

they often nd themselves towards the end of a signal chain and are used

to polish and nish off a track, gluing tracks together, developing a

combined tonal balance, managing loudness and mastering a nal release.

In the context of Tracker Mini sample editing, the process operates at an

individual sample level. However the same principles can be applied as

those in general music production, to nish off and generate a nal output

sample. While these effects are applied individually they can also optionally

be performed sequentially in order depending on what the objective is. An

example shown below.

Balances tonal elements in

a sound.

Provides harmonic

emphasis to elements and

makes space for others.

Can x stray frequencies

that affect the sound

Reduces dynamic range between

high peaks and low troughs,

allows overall level adjustment.

Can help sounds sit into a mix

better. Layered compressed /

uncompressed adds punch.

Create headroom.

Restricts and tames excessive

audio peaks in a sound.

Maximises output levels and

introduces a perceived loudness.

Protects digital integrity of a

sample by avoiding clipping.

Equalizer Compressor Limiter

Example of Effect Chain / Order

Audio

BackLength

2 ms

Depth

Rate

1.000 Hz

Offset

50 %

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Flanger

8.beats

Depth

Amount of anger effect applied.

Tweak by Ear

While the anger and perhaps other effects have labelled functions, it is much more useful to tune these

parameters by ear rather than by numerical positioning. The application of each parameter will give a different

output depending on the source audio material. Sounds ranging from subtle tremolo to glitchy rhythms can be

found by tweaking the anger parameters by ear. The same applies to all of the creative audio effects.

Rate

Speed of effect modulation.

Length

Length of delay line between signals.

Offset

Offset percentage of delay in signal

Tweaking and trying different settings is encouraged on creative audio

effects. While this is also possible on the process orientated tools, it is also

recommended to get to know these parameters functions and purposes and

have a basic understanding of their operation.

Equalizer

The purpose of an equalizer, also called EQ, is to boost or attenuate

frequencies in an audio signal to either adjust the tonal characteristics or to

x unwanted frequency elements. Equalizers are typically used to shape a

sounds character but also to allow a sound to sit comfortably alongside

another. The sample editor EQ effect has 3 frequency bands. More

coverage of general EQ functions is provided in the Master Effects section.

Low

High

MID

BackLow

-3.000 dB

Low Width

1.00

Mid

0.00 dB

1 of 3

Low freq

80 Hz

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Equalizer

8.beats

BackMid freq

800 Hz

High

0.00 db

High freq

12000 Hz

2 of 3

Mid Width

1.00

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Equalizer

8.beats

Back

High Width

1.00

3 of 3

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Equalizer

8.beats

Frequency bands 1,2 (adjustable) & 3 (xed) positioned across the spectrum.

Normal human hearing is in the range of 20Hz - 20KHz

Width

Freq

Page 1 of 3 Page 2 of 3

Page 3 of 3

20Hz

-12dB

0dB

+12dB

20KHz

BoostAttenuate

12KHz200Hz 500Hz 800Hz 1KHz 5KHz 8KHz

EQ Function

Description

Low Low attenuation or boost amount, -12 dB to + 12dB.

Low Freq Low Frequency range, 10Hz - 200Hz

Low Width Width of EQ, also called Q. Range 0.5 to 5.

Mid Mid attenuation or boost amount, -12 dB to + 12dB.

Mid Freq Low Frequency range, 100Hz - 8KHz

Mid Width Width of EQ, also called Q. Range 0.5 to 5.

High High attenuation or boost amount, -12 dB to + 12dB.

High Freq High Frequency range, 8KHz -20KHz

High Width Width of EQ, also called Q. Range 0.5 to 5.

207

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

206

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Compressor

A compressor essentially works on a signals dynamic range (difference

between audio peaks and lows). Often a compressor is used to reduce the

dynamic range and then allow an increase of the overall signal gain to give

more punch and impact. It can also sound dull if overdone as the nuances

of the dynamics are reduced. Compression techniques can extend further

when layering a compressed sound (to give the impact) with an

uncompressed sound (to give the dynamic subtly). This technique is

sometimes called Parallel or New York Style Compression. In Tracker Mini

this can be created with two tracks one with compressed and other

uncompressed then rendering to a single stem or sample.

How does a compressor work?

In basic terms a compressor reduces the level of any audio that exceeds a

threshold. Think of this as an automatic volume control. The amount of gain

reduction is determined by the ratio parameter. A ratio of 1:1 has no gain

reduction while a gentle 2:1 will reduce by 1dB for every 2dB above the

threshold. Higher ratios are more aggressive. The speed and reaction of

the compressor is also governed by an envelope, in Tracker Mini this is an

Attack and Release envelope.

Audio

Tracker Mini has ratio

settings between 1 - 8

Threshold

Audio over Time

Dynamic Range

Gain Reduction

(Ratio)

Make Up

Gain

Signal is attenuated when

crossing the threshold.

Tracker Mini threshold

range is 0% - 100%

1:1

2:1

4:1

8:1

∞

Limiting

Threshold

Output (dB)

Input (dB)

Equalizer Frequency Ranges

An equalizer can boost or attenuate frequencies across a range. The range

of normal human hearing considered in music production is 20Hz to 20kHz.

The character and tonal shape of a sound can be affected by the

adjustment either boosting or attenuating at points on the frequency range.

This is possible within Tracker Mini using the EQ function.

SUB BASS

High levels of energy, often a low cut removes some ‘unheard’ energy and helps create

headroom.Typically frequencies would be cut in this area to create clarity. Emphasis for Sub

Bass, Bass and Kick Drums. Sub bass is considered the low frequencies up to 80Hz.

BASS

Typically an area which contains melodic and rhythmic elements. The mix can be changed to

be fat or thin by adjustments around this area. Muddiness occurs around 300Hz so a small

cut can help clarity of the mix. The mix can be warmed up around 120Hz.

MIDS

Low Mids can be overloaded with frequencies as many instruments cover this range and

muddiness is a common outcome. Honkyness can creep in around 500-1K and tinniness 1-

2K. Cuts can help. Vocal frequencies appear in the high mid range around normal words. 3K

boost on vocals can help push through the mix. Ensure the balance between instruments

and vocals is correct.

HIGH

Sibilance occurs between 5-10K and letters such as S, T can stand out. De-essing can help.

Typically a high shelf can add air and presence to the mix around 6K+. EQ’ing around 4-6K

will affect the denition and bring the sound closer or push them further back.

Low

High

MID

Frequency bands 1,2 (adjustable) & 3 (xed) positioned across the spectrum.

Normal human hearing is in the range of 20Hz - 20KHz

Width

Freq

20Hz

-12dB

0dB

+12dB

20KHz

BoostAttenuate

12KHz200Hz 500Hz 800Hz 1KHz 5KHz 8KHz

209

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

208

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Tracker Mini’s limiter has the basic features of threshold which is where

limiting will kick in and also an attack / release envelope which shapes the

behaviour of the limiter function.

WT Smoother

The WT Smoother is a utility for converting normal audio samples into a

format more compatible with the wavetable play mode synth. Essentially

this optimises the interpolation between waves in a sample giving a

smoother transition across the sample. More details of the Wavetable synth

is provided in the instrument section.

While compression is normally seen as a master effect on many devices

and in DAW’s, Tracker Mini does not have a compressor in the master

chain and relies on the master limiter. A compressor does however exist in

the audio effects which can be rendered into the sample.

Limiter

A limiter is a similar utility to a compressor. In fact when high ratios are used

in a compressor, say 20:1, it is considered to be limiting. A limiter essentially

protects audio integrity and avoids excessive peaks by attenuating any

peaks above a dened threshold.

How does a limiter work?

Audio

BackThreshold

-12 dB

Attack

10.00 ms

Release

50 ms

Ratio

4.00

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Compressor

8.beats

BackThreshold

-6 dB

Release

300 ms

Attack

3.00 ms

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Limiter

8.beats

Threshold

Point in the audio level at

which the compressor is

activated

Threshold

Point in the audio level at

which limiting is applied

Ratio

Controls the amount of gain

reduction above the threshold

Release

Release time when

compression drops out

Release

Release time when limiter

drops out

Attack

Attack time when

compression kicks in.

Attack

Attack time when the limiter

kicks in.

Threshold

Audio over Time

Dynamic Range

Gain Reduction

Peak Limiting

Signal is attenuated when

crossing the threshold.

Tracker Mini threshold

range is 0% - 100%

211

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

210

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Fade In and Fade Out

The fade in and fade out utilities create a ramp up of audio level or a ramp

down of audio level. The effect is applied to the audio selected between the

start and end markers. Typically this would be applied at the start or end of

an audio sample but equally can be applied anywhere based on the

selected part of the audio sample. The effect is applied immediately with no

adjustable parameters.

Examples

Original audio sample

Fade Out applied at the end of the

audio to create a smooth volume

transition to conclude.

Fade In applied at the start of the

audio to create a smooth volume

transition to begin.

Fades can be applied at any part

of a sample that the start and end

marker is covering eg Fade Out.

Timestretch Beat and Note.

Two timestretch functions are available in the sample editor toolkit.

Timestretch is a feature that adjusts the time of an audio sample, extending

or reducing its duration without affecting pitch. Timestretch beat has

parameters that are better applied to rhythmic material such as drums and

percussion. Timestretch note is more aligned with melodic material.

Examples

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

0.1s 0.5s 1s 1.5s 2s 2.5s 3s 3.5s 4s 4.5s 5s 5.5s 6s 6.5s

Steps

Max 64

Longer / Slower

Shorter / Faster

Max 8s

Length

Original Sample

Stretched Sample

BackTempo

150 BPM

Micro-step

0.000

Granule

1.000

Steps

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Timestretch Beat

8.beats

BackLength

3.198 s

Granule

100 ms

ApplyPreview

Sample Editor Timestretch Note

7.Tune

Timestretch Beat

Tempo and Steps are used to dene the duration of

the affected sample. Granule will affect audio quality.

Timestretch Note

Length is used to dene the duration of the affected

sample. Granule will affect audio quality.

Audio

213

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

212

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Audio

8.10 Audio Output Over USB

The Tracker Mini can send audio out over a connected USB connection.

This will send 12 stereo channels out to the connected device. The

conguration is automatic within the Tracker Mini and any compatible

device connected to the USB connection will be able to access the audio

channels from Tracker Mini.

Aggregate Device

To ensure compatibility with the USB Audio features of Tracker Mini it is

highly recommended to use a Mac or PC set up with an aggregate device.

An aggregate device is a virtual interface created on the PC or Mac to

integrate several audio in and out elements together. This overcomes any

issues with multiple / separate devices used for inputs and outputs to a PC

or Mac and allows audio software such as a DAW to connect seamlessly.

The process of setting up an aggregate device may differ depending on the

OS of the PC or Mac and also the connected devices. A general guide is

provided here as reference only.

Channel Outputs

Command

1 1 & 2 Master Output

2 3 & 4

Track 1 Stereo Audio Output

3 5 & 6

Track 2 Stereo Audio Output

4 7 & 8

Track 3 Stereo Audio Output

5 9 & 10

Track 4 Stereo Audio Output

6 11 & 12

Track 5 Stereo Audio Output

7 13 & 14

Track 6 Stereo Audio Output

8 15 & 16

Track 7 Stereo Audio Output

9 17 & 18

Track 8 Stereo Audio Output

10 19 & 20

Reverb Stereo Audio Output

11 21 & 22

Delay Stereo Audio Output

12 23 & 24

Reserved

▌ CREATING AN AGGREGATE DEVICE - MAC

1. Ensure Tracker Mini is connected to the Mac via the USB connection.

2. Select and open the ‘Finder’ function on the Mac.

3. With the nder page open and selected, choose from the main header

menu ‘Go’ > ‘Utilities’.

4. Double click on the ‘Audio MIDI Setup’ icon from within the presented

utility options page.

5. The audio device page will open. This should show all connected

devices in the left window pane and will include the Tracker Mini as well

as the Mac’s integrated speakers and microphone.

6. Click ‘+’ in the lower left corner and choose ‘create aggregate device’.

7. A new device is created and the selection boxes will be presented.

Check the boxes of the devices to add to the aggregated device. For

example Tracker Mini and Speakers.

8. Click the name in the left window to rename the device if required.

9. Once the device has been created this will appear in a DAW’s audio

interface options, for example ‘Audio input’ and ‘Audio output’ options in

Ableton Live Audio settings.

10. This aggregated device should be the chosen option to interface the

Tracker Mini to the Mac Audio. This will handle all the available inputs

from Tracker Mini as well as the audio outputs on the Mac for example

output audio to the internal speakers.

NOTES

215

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

214

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

Audio

▌ CREATING AN AGGREGATE DEVICE - PC

1. A PC has no native options to aggregate devices. It is recommended to

use an up to date audio compatible driver on the PC. The ASIO4ALL

driver is a commonly used 3

party option with PC’s for audio

applications. The guide below assumes using ASIO4ALL.

2. Ensure Tracker Mini is connected to the PC via the USB connection.

3. Ensure the ASIO4ALL driver is selected in your chosen DAW as the

audio interface and open the driver to set up the options.

4. In the ASIO4ALL window the left window pane should show all the

available input and output devices.

5. Check the devices to integrate together. There may also be options to

aggregate only specic inputs rather than an entire device. This is

usually available when ASIO4ALL is not in ‘simple view’ mode.

6. Once the devices have been selected the associated inputs will appear

in a DAW’s audio interface options, for example ‘Audio input’ and ‘Audio

output’ options in Ableton Live Audio settings. Remember that the

ASIO4ALL must be the driver selected.

7. This aggregated device should be the chosen option to interface the

Tracker Mini to the Mac Audio. This will handle all the available inputs

from Tracker Mini as well as the aggregated audio I/O functions.

The ability to connect audio via USB is possible. An example is when using

a PC or Mac via USB which hosts a compatible application, for example

Ableton Live DAW. It is recommended to connected directly between

devices and not through a USB hub for best results.

Note Instr

FX1

FX2

Play Rec

Master Volume

Insert Menu

Delete Copy

Shift

Line In MIDI InLine Out MIDI Out

21 3 4

Master Volume

1 Audio

Audio From

Ext In

Master

1 & 2

Auto

Monitor

Audio To

Sends

1.53

USB Audio

PC/Mac Ableton Live preferences / settings for the ‘Audio Input Device’

and ‘Audio Output Device’ set to the created aggregate device.

Audio from Tracker Mini over a

USB connection.

Example Conguration: Tracker Mini out to Ableton Live.

USB

Off

NOTES

Steps are the most rudimental part of Tracker

Mini, bringing together an instrument, effects

and a note. Steps are combined with others to

create beats and melodies within a pattern.

Patterns are the snippets that form a small

tune or riff. A song is the highest level of

structure in Tracker Mini and allows the

combination of patterns to play a full ‘song’ and

all of its components. Each project can have 1

song, which can hold a maximum of 255

pattern slots. Song mode is the environment in

which to therefore arrange patterns to form the

end to end song as well as re-arranging tracks.

It allows, for example the positioning of

patterns to create an introduction, build ups,

breaks, drops, bridge, and outro also to

introduce new elements through an ambient

track. Song mode can be selected from within

the [Menu] or by pressing [Shift] + [1] which is

the default function button conguration. Song

mode is the last part of arranging a full track. In

summary song mode operates in partnership

with patterns to create a full song. It also

operates in conjunction with Perform mode for

live improvisation. Song stems can also be fully

rendered out as audio to be used in another

application to nalise a mix or for mastering or to

be used to create remixes. This can be used to

develop a sample library. The entire song, all

tracks can also be rendered out as the nal

version too. These can also be nalised or

developed further in other applications. As a

reminder, as well as having the features for

building song arrangements, song mode is also

where the master tempo of the entire track is

located.

Song Mode

217

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

216

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

219

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

218

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

9.2 Arrangement Overview

An entire song track consists of a number of variations that maintain the

listeners interest and dene its style and even its genre. Patterns are where

the variation in sound, tone, key etc are made and the song mode is where

variations in the structure are created. There is no xed model and

creativity comes from how songs are arranged as much as the instruments

and melody applied. The example is used for illustration purposes.

Example: A typical EDM song structure + Example Patterns

Song Mode

9.1 Tempo

While tempo has been covered earlier, it is a good reminder that the tempo

setting also resides in the song mode pages.

▌ SETTING THE TEMPO

1. Hold [Shift] + Press [1].

2. Hold [Tempo] + Press [+] / [-].

3. The Inner [+] / [-] buttons adjust the tempo in small increments, also

applied with (Up) (Down). The outer [+] / [-] adjust in larger steps.

4. Note that tempo changes can be applied also at step level using the

step effects.

Play

Pattern

Play

Song

Undo Add

Slot

Delete

Slot

Pattern Tempo

130.0 BPM

Track 1 Track 5Track 3 Track 7Track 2 Track 6Track 4 Track 8 Slot

Pattern

Song 0m:00s P1.008

Tempo

Adjusts the project Tempo

Start

Intro 1

Starts sparse, maybe kick, snare only. Other elements added ie

bass as intro progresses. Length allows initial DJ ‘Mix In’ time.

Main ‘verse’ with melody hints or vocal clues to

the full production. Leaves space and elements

to build up the anticipation or tension.

Breakdown pause and chance to reset on

energy. Thins some elements out to take a time

out breather until the tension starts to rebuild.

Bridge will give one

section for something

different.

Full on main track. All elements kick in and the

tension built up is released during this section.

First drop doesn't overdo things time wise.

Full on main track maybe octave change. All

elements kick in and the tension is released again.

Possibly repeated after a bridge for continuity.

Final full on section which can

optionally repeat.

Track breaks-down gradually to the end. Elements

are removed and a section to allow DJ transition to

‘Mix out’ is considered, possibly kick only.

Breakdown 1

Breakdown 2

Bridge

Outro 1

4 Bars per ‘block’

Tracker Mini Slot Row

Outro 2

End

Build Up 1

Build Up 2

Drop 1

Drop 2

Drop 3

16 Steps

P16

16 Steps

P16

16 Steps

P13

16 Steps

P13

16 Steps

P13

16 Steps

P11

P12

16 Steps

P10

16 Steps

P15

16 Steps

P17

16 Steps

P14

16 Steps

P14

16 Steps

P14

16 Steps

221

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

220

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

9.3 Song Mode Interface

Select the song page by pressing [Shift] + [1] or hold [Shift] + [1] to

temporarily display the page from within another page, reverting back to

when buttons are released. The interface for song mode is by default empty

other than a single slot 1 with pattern 1. Up to 255 Song slots are available.

Pressing [Play] in song mode will play the song not just individual pattern.

Tracks in a pattern for the slot are represented as cell clips.

Song Mode

The song mode utility will help construct the patterns into a full song

arrangement, recognising muted and empty tracks.

In order to use song mode a collection of patterns will be required to select

from. Typically this may be newly created patterns or patterns edited as a

variation from a base pattern. For example the same pattern can be copied

then transposed and parts muted then saved as an alternative version.

Patterns cannot be named in Tracker Mini and are managed in the pattern

page as Pattern 1, Pattern 2 etc, loaded into the song utility as 1,2 etc and

stored on the SD Card as pattern_01.mtp, pattern_02.mtp etc. It is advised

to adopt some form of noting each pattern and it’s function and features.

16 Steps

Rec

Play

Pattern

Play

Song

Undo Add

Slot

Delete

Slot

Pattern Tempo

130.0 BPM

Kick BassOHat PadSnare LeadCHat Accent Slot

Pattern

Song 0m:00s P1.001

Play

Pattern

Play

Song

Undo Add

Slot

Delete

Slot

Pattern Tempo

130.0 BPM

Kick BassOHat PadSnare LeadCHat Accent Slot

Pattern

Song 0m:00s P1.001

Play

Pattern

Play

Song

Undo Add

Slot

Delete

Slot

Pattern Tempo

130.0 BPM

Track 1 Track 5Track 3 Track 7Track 2 Track 6Track 4 Track 8 Slot

Pattern

Song 0m:04s P2.004

Song slots represented by the rows, with the

pattern assigned to the slot.

Each project can have 1 song, which can contain a maximum of 255 slots.

Play Direction

Pattern

Pattern number assigned

to the song slot

Slot

Each slot row hosts a pattern

and plays top to bottom

‘Green’ Mode - [Rec] Off.

Only playback options are available

‘Red’ Mode - [Rec] On.

Playback and edit options are available

Dark Tracks

Track has no steps in the selected pattern.

There are no steps to play in a song.

White Tracks

Track is unmuted and has active steps in the pattern.

These will be audible in the song.

Muting Tracks

Muting is not performed in song mode. Use the Pattern page or the Track Mixer - Master Page 2/3 to mute / unmute.

Dimmed Tracks

Track is muted and has active steps in the pattern.

These will not be audible in the song.

Play

Pattern

Play

Pattern

Play

Song

Off

Play

Song

Undo Add

Slot

Delete

Slot

Pattern

<< >>

Tracks

Columns represent each of

the tracks in a pattern

Track Cell Clips

223

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

222

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Song Mode

9.4 Song v Pattern Relationship

Patterns can be arranged into a song in the song mode utility. Patterns

selected in a song will also be available in the pattern mode and will appear

in song mode as muted / unmuted inline with the status in pattern mode.

Editing tracks in song mode will reect in pattern mode. Tracks and patterns

can be copied and pasted within song mode which will also edit or copy /

paste the pattern.

Pattern

Unmuted

Pattern

Unmuted

Pattern

Muted

Empty

Unmuted

Play

Pattern

Play

Song

Undo Add

Slot

Delete

Slot

Pattern Tempo

130.0 BPM

Track 1 Track 5Track 3 Track 7Track 2 Track 6Track 4 Track 8 Slot

Pattern

Song 0m:04s P2.004

C3 04 ---- P-20

D3 04 ---- P-10

C4 12 ---- A 4

Pattern

1 1

C5 40 ---- P-25

C5 40 ----

C5 40 ---- P-25

-- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ----

P 25

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

-- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ---- -- --- ---- ----

C5 02 ---- P-20

C5 40 ---- H-25 C5 40 ---- P-20

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

9 9

11 11

13 13

15 15

8 8

10 10

12 12

14 14

Length

Step Jump

Fill Preview Undo Redo More

Track 2 Track 3 Track 4Track 1

Pattern 1 0m:00s P1.008 1.Analog 3 18p

Patterns in Song Mode will reect the track condition from the pattern view including mute

states, step position etc. This is shown by the shade of the track slot and the header position.

Tracks can be re-ordered by copy / paste in Song Mode. This in turn will edit the actual pattern

and as such also be reected in the pattern view.

When pressing [Play] in Song mode, switching to pattern mode will show each pattern as it is

being played in the song structure.

Patterns are muted in pattern or master pages and are reected in the song mode clip shade

as ar empty clips.Tracks edited in Song Mode will in turn edit and reect in the actual pattern.

When pressing [Play] in Pattern mode, switching to Song Mode will only show the selected

pattern being played.

Pattern - Press [1]

Song - Hold [Shift] + Press [1]

Also available from the [Menu]

Song Mode and Pattern Mode can

be in the same or different ‘Red’ -

Edit On or ‘Green’ - Edit Off States.

While in the another page, Hold [Shift] + Hold [1] with

a long press will temporarily display song mode.

9.5 Creating and Editing a Song

The pre-requisite to creating a song is to have a series of patterns

available, although technically blank patterns can also be added to a song

slot. Editing and creating a song is performed in ‘Red’ recording mode i.e.

when the [Rec] mode is selected as on. Otherwise the song mode page just

presents the playback of patterns and the song as options. Track muting is

not applied in Song Mode, but is set in the Pattern or Track Mixer Pages.

▌ CREATING A BASIC SONG FROM SCRATCH

1. Hold [Shift] + Press [1] or access the [Menu] to select song mode. The

step / pattern cursor will be displayed by a green bounding box. Also

only 1

and 2

screen buttons to control play are available in ‘green’

mode, i.e. [Rec] off.

2. Press [Rec] to toggle editing on, ‘red’ mode. The step / pattern cursor

will be displayed by a red bounding box. Also all of the screen button

options are shown as available in recording, ‘red’ mode - [Rec] on.

3. Navigate to the location desired:-

• The location selected is shown with the green or red bounding box

over the slot & pattern number.

• Press (Up) and (Down) or [+] / [-] to navigate slots.

• Press (Left) and (Right) to select tracks.

• Press [Shift] + [Insert] to jump to the top slot row.

4. To add a new song slot, Press [Add Slot], 4

Screen button. Song slots

represent a pattern and are displayed as a row on the song mode page.

5. When adding a new slot row, it will;

• Be added directly below the currently selected row.

• The newly added slot replicates the previously selected row.

• The new slot row is also automatically selected.

6. To change the pattern on the selected row, Press the (Left), 6

Screen

button or (Right), 7

Screen button. All 255 patterns that are available in

a project will be selectable in a song, even if no steps or data has been

created in the chosen pattern.

7. More slots can be added to develop the song further and expand its

length and duration.

225

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

224

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Song Mode

Creating a basic song is a starting point, but a number of additional editing

features are also available within Song Mode. Individual tracks can also be

re-positioned. Be careful when editing patterns as the song structure and

patterns are directly linked and edits can affect each other.

▌ BASIC EDITING OF AN EXISTING SONG

1. Press [Shift] + [1] or [Menu] to select song mode. The slot and pattern

selection bounding box may be green. Only the 1

and 2

Screen

buttons are available in ‘green’ mode i.e. [Rec] off to control play.

2. Press [Rec] to toggle to editing ‘red’ mode. The slot and pattern

bounding box will be displayed red. Also all of the screen button options

are shown as available in ‘red’ mode - [Rec] on.

3. Navigate to the slot location desired using the (Up), (Down) or [+] / [-]

buttons. The location selected is shown with the red bounding box over

the slot number and pattern number when editing.

4. To delete the currently selected song slot, Press [Delete Slot], 5

Screen button. The selected song slot is deleted and the other slots will

move up the order.

5. Press [Add Slot], 4

Screen button to add a new song slot row.

6. The undo command does not restore deleted slots so be careful when

editing songs.

Track 1

Adding a slot replicates the current

slot on a row below. Also selects

the new slot.

Deleting a slot removes the current

slot and moves the below slots up

in the order.

Track 4Track 2 Track 5 Track 7Track 3 Track 6 Track 8 Step Pattern

1 3

2 4

3 8

4 8

5 2

▌ EDITING TRACK CLIPS IN A SONG

1. Press [Shift] + [1] or [Menu] to select song mode. The step and pattern

cursor will be displayed by a green bounding box. Also, only 1

and 2

screen buttons to control play are available in ‘green’ mode - [Rec] off.

2. Press [Rec] to toggle editing to ‘red’ mode. The step and pattern cursor

will be displayed by a red bounding box. Also, all of the screen button

options are shown as available in ‘red’ mode - [Rec] on.

3. Navigate to the desired track clip. Navigate to the Track by pressing

(Left) or (Right). The selection is shown with the red bounding box over

the pattern for the track.

4. To select multiple track clips, Hold [Shift] + (Left), (Right), (Up) or

(Down). A red bounding box will show the selected range of tracks

5. To delete selected track clip(s), Press [Delete].

6. Press [Copy] to copy the highlighted and selected track(s). To Navigate

to the target track clip location, Press (Up) (Down) or [+] / [-]. Navigate

to the Track by pressing (Left) or (Right). The selection is shown with

the red bounding box over the pattern for the track.

7. Press [Shift] + [Copy] to paste the previously copied selection into the

location selected. When pasting multiple tracks the highlighted track

location will anchor at the top left corner of the copied selection of tracks

and as such will paste into the adjacent track locations.

8. The copy / paste edits in song mode will also be performed

automatically in the pattern itself and reected back into the same

pattern in other slots. Switching to pattern mode will view any edits

made. Care must be taken to remember that the song mode and pattern

mode are directly linked. Previous edits can be restored by pressing

[Undo], 3

Screen button.

Track 1

Copy one or more slot tracks

Paste the previously copied

tracks to another location.

Track 4Track 2 Track 5 Track 7Track 3 Track 6 Track 8 Step Pattern

1 3

2 4

3 8

4 8

227

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

226

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Song Mode

9.6 Playing Songs and Patterns

Playing songs within song mode performs differently to playing patterns in

the pattern view. It is however also possible to play only patterns from

within Song mode. The dedicated, physical [Play] button will play a song in

song mode and will play the pattern only when in pattern mode.

Song Mode Playback Options

Play

Pattern

Play

Song

Undo Add

Slot

Delete

Slot

Pattern Tempo

130.0 BPM

Track 1 Track 5Track 3 Track 7Track 2 Track 6Track 4 Track 8 Slot

Pattern

Song 0m:04s P2.004

Time

Total play time in

Minutes : Seconds

Progress Bar

Progress indicator of

steps within pattern slot

Playback Loop

Songs will play on loop.

Playback will restart when the

last slot row is completed.

Progress Marker

Progress indicator of

current pattern slot

Screen Buttons

Dedicated Buttons

Pattern

Currently played pattern

number it’s step

Transport

Playback status symbol. Also

shown in pattern slot and

across various pages.

Mode Symbol Screen Button State Button Description

Song [Play Song] Play Song

Will play the song. Changing to pattern

mode will play and display patterns in sync

with song. Same as pressing [Play]

Song [Stop] Pause

When playing, button will toggle pause.

Press again to commence from the start of

the paused pattern. Same as pressing [Play]

Song to

Pattern

[Play Pattern] Play Pattern

Play the currently selected pattern in a loop.

Same as pressing [Shift] + [Play]

Pattern

to Song

[Continue Song] Play Song

Switches from playing pattern to play song

from current position. Same as pressing

[Shift] + [Play]

Song to

Pattern

[Loop Pattern] Loop Pattern

Switches from playing song to play and loop

pattern from current position. Same as

pressing [Shift] + [Play]

[Play Song]

[Loop Pattern]

[Play Pattern]

[Play]

PLAY

SONG

PLAY

PATTERN

[Play] [Stop]

[Continue Song]

Playback Behaviour.

Playing a song in song mode can be performed from the dedicated play

button or the screen buttons. Songs will play in loop meaning the song will

continue to play from the start after the last slot row is completed. Patterns

can also be played and looped from song mode. Switching between pattern

and song playback is possible using the screen buttons, which change

function to reect the current status.

PlayShift + Play

229

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

228

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Song Mode

Previewing Tracks in Song Mode

While songs and patterns can be played from within song mode, the ability

to preview only individual track clips is possible. This can only be performed

in ‘Red’ [Rec] Mode and with an individual track clip selected.

▌ PREVIEWING A SONG TRACK CLIP

1. Press [Shift] + [1] or use [Menu] to select song mode.

2. Press [Rec] to toggle to editing in ‘red’ mode. The slot and pattern

bounding box will be displayed red. Also all of the screen button options

are shown as available in ‘red’ mode - [Rec] on.

3. Navigate to the track clip location desired, Press (Left), (Right), (Up)

and (Down) to also navigate through the slots. Select a single track clip.

Multiple selections cannot be previewed.

4. With the track clip selected and highlighted red, Press [Shift] + [Play].

The clip will play once fully.

5. Alternatively, with the track clip selected and highlighted red, Press

[Shift] + [Preview Track], 1

Screen button. The clip will play once fully.

6. To stop playback immediately while playing from either option, Press

[Play] or Press [Stop], 1

Screen button to stop playback.

Track 1

Selected Track Clip.

Example Pattern 8, Track 2

[Shift] + [Play] or [Shift] + [Preview Track].

Previews the individual track clip

Clip will play through fully once, unless the

[Play] or [Stop], 1

Screen button is

pressed which then will immediately stop.

Track 4Track 2 Track 5 Track 7Track 3 Track 6 Track 8 Step Pattern

1 3

2 4

3 8

4 8

9.7 Link between Song and Performance Mode

Songs and patterns are integrated and linked to work together. In addition

songs work in conjunction with ‘Perform’ - Performance Mode which allows

live punch in effects and improvisations. Perform is covered in detail in a

later section of the notebook.

Song - Hold [Shift] + Press [1]

Perform - Hold [Menu] + ‘Perform’

Play

Pattern

Play

Song

Undo Add

Slot

Delete

Slot

Pattern Tempo

130.0 BPM

Track 1 Track 5Track 3 Track 7Track 2 Track 6Track 4 Track 8 Slot

Pattern

Song 0m:04s P2.004

Track 1

Patt: 1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

>>>

/16

---

-1

Track 2

Patt: 1

Track 3

Patt: 1

Track 4

Patt: 1

Track 6

Patt: 1

Track 5

Patt: 1

Track 7

Patt: 1

Track 8

Patt: 1

Performance FX

Volume

High-pass cutoff

Sample end

Tune

Delay send

Sample Playback

Panning

Band-pass cutoff

Low-pass cutoff

Sample position

Reverb send

Volume LFO

0m:00s P1.028

The ‘Random’ symbol in the header of a page will demonstrate that tracks from various

patterns can be selected for mixing in performance mode.

Press [Play] in Performance Mode to play the current pattern as set in the pattern page or set

in song mode, whichever is the most recent pattern played. Press [Shift] + [Play] in

Performance Mode to play the full song.

Songs can be played in Song Mode which will play through all slots and the patterns assigned.

When switching to performance mode the song will continue playing.

While in the another page, Hold [Shift] + Hold [1] with

a long press will temporarily display song mode.

A number of effects are available in Tracker

Mini. Some can be set in the FX1 and FX2

slots and some used in Performance Mode.

Also the instrument parameters give access to

instrument level effects. This section covers

the Master Effects. These are the common

effects that are available in the main audio

chain and are located in the master pages.

Effects in the primary audio chain are called

insert effects. Effects are not available on an

individual track basis so all tracks are routed

through the master section. The track mixer is

also a page in the master section. An example

of an insert effect is the EQ effect which

operates in series to the main audio. Send

effects allow variable amounts of audio to be

channelled in parallel to the main audio and

then the affected audio is mixed back in to the

main output. Essentially these are the reverb

and delay effects. The main reverb and delay

effect settings are accessible from the master

page and the send amounts in the global mixer.

The three pages including the main mix page,

track mixer page and global mixer functions are

available by pressing button [4], by default

assigned to Master pages and also accessible

via the [Menu]. Sub pages are also contained

within these pages. Parameters are also

available in the sub pages or directly from the

master page depending on the effect. The pages

can be cycled through using [4]. The master

effects have a number of parameters and

dened functions. It is always worth

remembering that adjustment by ear is usually a

more appropriate method when adjusting effect

settings. While theoretical numbers and

applications are good starting points, there is no

better method than to hear how the sound is

affected by the changes made as they are

applied.

Master Effects

231

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

230

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

233

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

232

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

Master Effects

10.1 Effects Overview

Tracker Mini has 8 voices. Each voice is represented by each of the 8

tracks when playing. The common processing of the voices comes together

at the master stage where the voices are mixed and the master effects

applied. Also any Delay and Reverb ‘send’ audio is mixed into the main out.

The diagram shown is for illustration purposes and does not constitute an

exact or ofcial schematic of Polyend’s Tracker Mini circuitry. It does

however serve to give an insight into the signal path and identify the seven

master effects covered in this section.

The reverb and delay send effects can be sent pre-fader or post-fader in the

global mixer. This is set in the ‘Cong’ settings accessed with the [Menu].

This means the effect audio is sent before being adjusted by the the volume

fader or after the volume fader adjustment.

10.2 Master Pages

The 7 master effects are located in the master section of Tracker Mini. This

is accessible with the assigned button [4] which opens to 3 mixer / master

pages. The [Menu] can also be used to access the Master section. The

main effects settings are contained within this pages.

To adjust the effect parameters, select the page then use the screen

buttons or use (Left) or (Right) to select the parameter. Screen buttons

select some pages such as delay, reverb etc. Press [+] / [-] or (Up), (Down)

to change the selected parameter value. Multiple track mixer levels can be

adjusted when holding the screen buttons simultaneously.

Volume

-33.08 dB

Reverb Delay EQ Saturation

Soft Clip

Hard Clip

Soft Clip

Saturate

Overdrive

Drive+

Bass Boost

Limiter Space

Master 1/3 0m:00s P1.008

0.00 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Mute

Track 2 Track 6Track 3 Track 7Track 4 Track 8Track 1 Track 5

Track Mixer 2/3 0m:00s P1.008

-4.50 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Mute

1.80 dB

Mute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Unmute

0.00 dB

Unmute

Reverb Line RvbDry Mix Line InDelay Line Dly

Global Mixer 3/3 0m:00s P1.008

Press [4] to select the Master section.

Each Press of [Master] will cycle through 3 master pages:

Page 1 is Master; Page 2 is Track Mixer and Page 3 is Global Mixer.

Master - Page 1/3

Direct access to the master output Volume level,

Saturation, Bass Boost and Space effects. Each

of which is directly adjustable when selected

using the [+] / [-] or the (Up) or (Down) Buttons.

The Delay and Reverb send effect, Limiter and

EQ parameter pages are accessible when using

the respective screen buttons.

Track Mixer - Page 2/3

Access to all of the individual track levels to allow

mixing of the entire song. Hold one or more

screen buttons and us [+] / [-] or (Up) (Down)

buttons to adjust the setting.

Mute and Solo can be set here. Editing the track

names when [Rec] is active is also possible.

Global Mixer - Page 3/3

The main output delay and reverb levels are

visible and can be adjusted. The main dry and

wet mix between the main audio and effect audio

is also provided.

Control for pass through of line inputs. Reverb

and Delay can be applied to this audio signal.

Pre-fader or post-fader options are congurable.

All settings accessible with the screen buttons

Limiter

Saturation

Space

Bass Boost

Sends

Inserts

Sends

Out

Voice

Left Right

Master

Delay

Reverb

Panning

21 3 4

235

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

234

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

10.3 Master Delay

Delay is one of the two send effects. A send effect basically routes an

adjustable amount of audio in parallel to its main signal path and is sent to

a common audio effect. In this case delay. This delay affected audio is then

returned back to the main audio path. The effect itself is a common

function, managing several send / return signals. Any common delay

parameter adjustments will therefore also affect other send signals. The

‘Send / Return’ conguration is a common application for delay effects.

What is a delay effect?

A delay is a common production effect used to delay an incoming signal to

the output. While this is a simple principle there are many effects that use

delay as a foundation. Some examples are echo (creating dened repeats)

and chorus (short delay taps to give a thicker rather than echo style feel) as

well as specic delay types such as ping-pong delay, spreading the delay

points across the stereo eld left to right and slap-back delay emulating old

tape delays which are used successfully to thicken vocals.

Delay is a time based effect and synchronisation (or not) with the track

tempo should also be considered depending on the output required.

▌ ACCESSING MASTER DELAY PARAMETERS

1. Press [4] or use [Menu] to select master section. Press again if needed,

until the ‘Master’ Page 1/3 is displayed.

2. Press [Delay], 3

Screen button.

3. The six delay parameters are presented on the master delay page.

4. Press [Back], 8

Screen button to return to the master page.

Master Delay Page

Accessed via the Master page 1/3 and selected from the screen buttons.

Rate Options

8 6 4 3 2 3/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8

1/3 1/4 3/16 1/6 1/8 1/12 1/16 1/24 1/32

Option Range Description

Pingpong On, Off

Toggles the pingpong mode on or off. This will

set the delays to be generated across the

stereo eld left to right

Sync On, Off

Toggles synchronisation to the project tempo

on or off. When on, the rate with respect to

tempo is used for the delay. When off, the time

parameter is used.

Rate See Rate Table

The rate divider / multiplier, synchronised to

project tempo, used for the delay time.

Available when sync is set to on.

Time 1 - 3500ms

The time used for the delay. Only available

when sync is set to off.

Feedback 0-99

Amount of delay output signal that is fed back

into the delay input. This parameter is what

increases the number of delays in the audio.

Filter 100Hz - 20000Hz

Applies a lter to the delay and helps shape

the sound tone more appropriately.

Master Delay Settings.

PingPong

Off

Rate

Time

500 ms

Feedback

Filter

20000Hz

Sync

Off

Back

Master Delay 0m:00s P3.002

On On 8

3/4

1/4

Off Off

1/2

3/16

1/3

3/2

3/8

1/6

Pingpong

Selects a pingpong (left / right

stereo effect) or standard

when off, delay.

Filter

Filter applied to the

delay effect

Sync

Synchronisation to project tempo.

If on rate is used to sync to

tempo. Specic time is used if off.

Feedback

Amount of delay output fed

back into the delay line input

Rate

Synchronisation to tempo,

used when sync is on.

Time

Stand alone delay time, used

when sync is off.

Input Output

Delay Time

Time delay between input and output.

Connecting the output to the input creates feedback

and increases the delay ‘events’.

Delay Line

Master Effects

237

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

236

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

10.4 Master Reverb

Reverb is the second of the send effects. As stated a send effect routes an

adjustable amount of audio in parallel to its main signal path and is sent to

a common audio effect. In this case reverb. This reverb affected audio is

then returned back to the main audio path. The effect itself is a common

function, managing several send / return signals. Any common reverb

parameter adjustments will therefore also affect other send signals. The

‘Send / Return’ conguration is a common application for reverb effects.

What is a reverb effect?

A reverb is a common production effect used to replicate the audio

behaviour of spaces. A normal space such as a small or large room will

reect audio differently. Think of how the sound reects in a large cathedral

compared to a small bathroom. The sound will bounce and reect between

the walls and other elements in the room. These reections arrive at the

human ear at different times and different levels. Reverb is an effect that

replicates this behaviour.

Reverb parameters mainly focuses on the space / room characteristics.

▌ ACCESSING MASTER REVERB PARAMETERS

1. Press [4] or use [Menu] to select master section. Press again if needed

until the ‘Master’ Page 1/3 is displayed.

2. Press [Reverb], 2

Screen button.

3. The four reverb parameters are presented on the master reverb page.

4. Press [Back], 8

Screen button to return to the master page.

Master Reverb Page

Accessed via the Master page 1/3 and selected from the screen buttons.

Option Range Description

Size 0-100 Replicates a physical room size.

Damping 0-100

Sound is reected with walls, furniture and

ttings etc. However it is also absorbed into

walls and materials. This emulates the

absorbent part of sound in a space.

Predelay 0-100

The time from the initial original sound being

triggered to the rst reections being heard.

Diffusion 0-100

Diffusion emulates how much sound is

dissipated. Essentially this is based on the

time period between the early reections. The

wider, the thinner the reverb effect.

Master Reverb Settings.

Size

Predelay

Diffusion

Damping

Back

Master Reverb 0m:00s P3.002

Size

Emulates the size of a room and

how it behaves.

Diffusion

Amount that the sound

dissipates in the early reections

Damping

Represents how sound is

absorbed rather than reected.

Predelay

Represents the time between the

initial sound and rst reections.

Size

Emulates the physical room size

Predelay

Time from initial sound to early reections

Diffusion

Time between early reections.

Closer together thickens the sound.

Damping

This replicates ‘softer’ environments where

sound is absorbed rather than reected.

Initial Sound Early Reections Subsequent Reections Reverb Tail

Master Effects

239

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

238

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

10.5 Limiter

Tracker Mini’s limiter operates as the second insert effect in the master

effect chain. This is not a typical conguration as most applications have a

limiter as the last effect in a chain. Insert effects in Tracker Mini route the

entire, main audio signal prior to the output.

What is a limiter?

A limiter is normally used at the end of an audio chain and is used to protect

the digital integrity by taming signals beyond a threshold, keeping levels

within a dened limit and usually avoid digital clipping. Limiters are useful to

develop a sounds level and increase the perceived loudness.

Tracker Mini’s limiter also has a sidechain function. The Limiter threshold is

based on the main audio (sidechain off). Sidechain options will route an

alternative audio signal to trigger the gain reduction instead of the main

audio. This can be used creatively and triggered by a track or an external

audio signal

▌ ACCESSING MASTER LIMITER PARAMETERS

1. Press [Master] to select master section. Press again if needed until the

‘Master’ Page 1/3 is displayed.

2. Press [Limiter], 5

Screen button.

3. The ve limiter parameters are presented on the master limiter page.

4. Press [Back], 8

Screen button to return to the master page.

Master Limiter Page

Accessed via the Master page 1/3 and selected from the screen buttons.

The behaviour of the limiter as extreme or subtle can be set in the ‘Cong’

[Menu] options.

Setting a limiter is an iterative process. Set up the source and fast attack

and release then make small incremental adjustments while playing the

song, starting with threshold. Once an appropriate gain reduction is

reached tweak the attack and gain to further shape the sound.

Option Range Description

Limiter Att 0.001 - 1.000s

Envelope attack time which controls the limiter

behaviour as the limiter kicks in.

Limiter Rls 0.001 - 1.000s

Envelope release time which controls the

limiter behaviour as the limiter drops out.

Limiter Thr -Inf dB to 0dB

The threshold level at which gain reduction

and hence limiting is applied. Source is based

on the audio source - Main or Sidechain.

Gain Reduce

Visual, real time indicator of gain reduction

being applied. Does not offer any parameter

settings - indication only.

Sidechain

Disable, Track

1-8, Line In L R

Selects the alternate audio signal used as the

trigger. The normal state is disabled and uses

the main audio. Alternatively individual tracks

or line in L or R can be selected.

Master Limiter Settings.

LimiterAtt

0.369s

LimiterThr

0.00 dB

Gain Reduce Sidechain

Disable

LimiterRls

0.001s

Back

Master Limiter 0m:00s P3.002

Disable

Track 1

Track 4

Track 8

Track 2

Track 5

Line in L

Track 3

Track 7

Track 6

Line in R

Attack

Envelope attack time as the

limiter kicks in.

Gain Reduction

Visible indicator which shows the

gain reduction applied in real time

Sidechain

Sets the alternate audio source

used for triggering gain reduction.

Release

Envelope release time as the

limiter is released

Threshold

Audio level at which the limiter will

kick in and apply gain reduction

Gain ReductionThreshold

Sidechain

Peak Limiting

Signal is attenuated when

main or sidechain audio

crosses the threshold.

Tracker Mini threshold

range is 0% - 100%

Audio over Time

Main Audio

Master Effects

241

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

240

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

10.6 Saturation, Space & Bass Boost

Saturation, Space and Bass Boost are simple effects each carrying one

parameter that adjusts the amount of effect applied into the main audio out

or in the case of saturation, sets the dened preset.

Saturation is the rst effect in the entire master chain. This is selects from 5

preset options for subtle distortion. The space option, ranges 0-8 and is a

widener enhancing the stereo image. Bass boost has a 0-100% range with

represents approx 0-5 dB. This enhances the bass frequencies around 80

Hz, which can be subtle on some material. Both will be applied based on

taste so try tweaking and adjusting on different songs to nd the sweet spot

for the material and track.

▌ ADJUSTING SATURATION, BASS BOOST & SPACE VALUES

1. Press [4] or use [Menu] to select master section. Press again if needed

until the ‘Master’ Page 1/3 is displayed.

2. To select the effect:-

• Press [Saturation], 6

Screen button

• Press [Bass Boost], 7

Screen button

• Press [Space], 8

Screen button

• The (Left) or (Right) buttons also navigate and select.

3. Press [+] / [+] or (Up), (Down) to adjust the setting value.

Volume

-33.08 dB

Reverb Delay EQ Saturation

Soft Clip

Hard Clip

Soft Clip

Saturate

Overdrive

Drive+

Bass Boost

Limiter Space

Master 1/3 0m:00s P1.008

Saturation

Distortion Preset

Bass Boost

Bass Enhancer

Space

Stereo Enhancer

10.7 EQ

Equalization, also called EQ, is an effect which allows the adjustment of

specic frequency bands to shape the sound spectrum. This can adjust the

tone and have an audible creative effect for sound design.

What is a EQ?

An EQ is set up with a number of frequency bands. Many models have

adjustable frequency, width of band and the ability to boost or attenuate at

the given frequency. Tracker Mini’s EQ is the last master effect in the chain

and has 5 xed frequency bands.

The adjustment is based on a dB Boost or Attenuation with a range of -

12dB to +12dB. A setting of 0.00dB across the range mans no EQ is

applied and the audio will be unaffected.

A normal human hearing range is 20Hz to 20kHz. This is the range an EQ

therefore operates with specic ranges affecting sound elements. Some

examples are:-

• Vocal sibilance occurs around 3-7kHz. Try cutting at 3kHz or 9.9kHz

to de-ess and remove any stand out ‘S’ elements.

• Mic rumble can be removed around 70-150Hz.

• Boost around 9kHz to give a sound more ‘air’ and brilliance.

• A cut at 1kHz can help vocals by removing ‘honkiness’

• Cut at 300Hz to remove muddiness

• Boost at 115Hz to add warmth.

Band 1

115 Hz

Band 3

990 Hz

Band 5

9900 Hz

Band 2

330 Hz

Band 4

3000 Hz

Fixed frequency bands, adjustable +/-12dB

Normal human hearing is in the range of 20Hz - 20KHz

20Hz

-12dB

0dB

+12dB

20KHz

BoostAttenuate

12KHz200Hz 500Hz 800Hz 1KHz 5KHz 8KHz

Master Effects

243

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

242

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

▌ ACCESSING MASTER EQ PARAMETERS

1. Press [4] or use [Menu] to select master section. Press [4] again until

the ‘Master’ Page 1/3 is displayed.

2. Press [EQ], 6

Screen button.

3. The ve EQ parameters are presented on the master EQ page.

4. Press [Back], 8

Screen button to return to the master page.

115 Hz

0.00 dB

990 Hz

0.00 dB

3000 Hz

0.0dB

9900 Hz

0.0dB

330 Hz

0.00 dB

Back

Master EQ 0m:00s P3.002

10.8 Effect Cong Options

Several options can be set in the ‘Cong’ [Menu] for master effects. The

behaviour of the limiter can be changed between extreme and subtle. Also

the master mix reverb and delay can be congured to send before / pre the

volume level fader of after / post fader.

▌ SETTING THE CONFIG OPTIONS FOR MASTER EFFECTS

1. Press [Menu] the select ‘Cong’ to open the conguration menu.

2. In the rst column, select ‘Project Settings’. Use the 1

and 2

Screen

button to navigate. Alternatively use (Left) or (Right) to navigate menus

and Press (Up) or (Down) to select a function.

3. In the ‘Project Settings’ Sub menu the ‘Limiter mode’ and the ‘Sends

mode’ can be adjusted. Select the option from the central sub-menu

with the 4

or 5

Screen button.

4. The Limiter options are:

• Subtle: Will affect how aggressive the envelope attack and release

operates. Subtle will give a gentle, transparent style and will be slow

in catching fast transients.

• Extreme: Will provide a more aggressive model. Will catch all of the

transients but will also affect the sound adding colour.

5. The Send effects:

• Pre-fader: Will send the audio to the effect irrespective of the

instrument volume. The effected signal may be louder as it is

independent of the volume control.

• Post-fader: Will send the audio after it has been adjusted by the

instrument volume and therefore ensures the effect is more

proportionally consistent with the level, especially when modulated

6. Press [Change], 6

Screen button to change the option.

7. Navigate with the 4

or 5

Screen button and press [Apply], 6

Screen

button to accept the option.

Master Effects

While working with audio has been covered

extensively, Tracker Mini also has a set of

comprehensive MIDI features. MIDI is the

protocol which allows devices to communicate

together, for example where one device

controls sequencing to send to another synth.

A lot of the processes and instructions for

audio also apply to MIDI, for example, steps in

a pattern can be set to send MIDI rather than

trigger an audio sample instrument. MIDI

conguration of steps is handled just like an

instrument. Tracker Mini therefore can control

external gear from its sequencer. In addition

external gear can also be set up to control

Tracker Mini. A few fundamental things should

be considered when working with MIDI. The

clock in a multi gear setup will control timing

between devices. As such it is recommended

to only set one main clock as the primary lead.

Also consider the transport control of which

device will stop and start the sequencing.

These of course are design choices taken when

organising a collection of equipment to work

together with MIDI and should be considered at

the outset. MIDI into Tracker Mini can be set up

through the USB connection or the MIDI

interface which uses an adapter cable to convert

the 3.5mm connection to standard 5-Pin DIN

style MIDI connections. Audio, controlled by

Tracker Mini from external devices can also be

sampled back into Tracker Mini, making it a

perfect t for the centre piece of a setup. MIDI

expands the landscape of sound design when

using Tracker Mini in a multi device setup and

enables a collection of instruments to operate

together in sync.

MIDI

245

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

244

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

247

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

246

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

MIDI

11.1 MIDI Denitions

To clarify some of the terminology and technology around MIDI with respect

to Tracker Mini a summary of key denitions is provided. Tracker Mini uses

a TRS to Type B MIDI Adapter. Also MIDI over USB is possible.

5 PIN MIDI 5 PIN to TRS MIDI

MIDI DIN 24

This is often found for MIDI

Out and Thru and enables

syncing of classic devices.

This uses 0v & 5v messages

as sync signals at 24 pulses

per quarter note (PPQN).

Tracker Mini uses 192 PPQN

Internally and can also

transmit and receive via USB.

MIDI CC

MIDI Control and Note

change messages are used

to communicate messages

across MIDI with values of 0-

127. Control Changes (CC)

affect parameter values while

note data triggers notes.

Tracker Mini has some

dened CC Assignments.

SYSEX

System Exclusive. This is an

expansion of the normal MIDI

communications set up and is

typically used for transferring

data such as back ups,

patches, presets and

rmware updates to and from

devices.

MIDI

Musical Instrument Digital

Interface. A protocol for

communicating between

electronic musical gear.

Never connect MIDI gear to

incompatible DIN signals.

Tracker Mini has USB MIDI

but also an interface for 5 Pin

DIN In and out.

MIDI STANDARDS

While there are MIDI

standards dened, many

synth developers interpret

this in slightly different ways.

Its always worth reviewing

the documentation with each

to fully understand each

device level implementation.

SDS

Sample Dump Standard. This

is an older transfer protocol

used for transferring data to

and from devices. This is

rarely seen nowadays.

MIDI DIN 48

This is often found for MIDI

Out and Thru and enables

syncing of classic devices.

This uses 0v & 5v messages

as sync signals at 48 pulses

per quarter note (PPQN).

Tracker Mini uses 192 PPQN

Internally and can also

transmit and receive via USB.

MSB & LSB

Most Signicant Byte and

Least Signicant Byte. MSB

provides the 128 data

resolution which is ok for

most MIDI applications. More

advanced devices use MSB

and LSB values increasing

resolution to 16,384 steps.

NRPN

Non-Registered Parameter

Number is part of the MIDI

standard. CC and NRPN are

technically very similar but

NRPN is less well dened in

the standards. NRPN uses

more data and can give

better control.

The term ‘primary lead’ will refer, in this guide to a device that has the main control responsibility.

For example controls the clock and transport and is the central lead. A device which will be

controlled by, and follow the primary lead device and which will be subservient by responding to

the main control messages will be called a ‘secondary follower’.

11.2 MIDI Conguration

A pre-requisite when working with MIDI is to ensure that the conguration

settings in the ‘Cong’ options accessed by [Menu] are applied for the

desired MIDI gear setup. These will dictate if Tracker Mini leads on

functions like clock and transport or if it acts as a secondary follower,

responding to control and synchronisation from another primary device

control. Also Note and CC behaviour can be set.

Velocity can be recorded from an external MIDI controller, but this must be

set in the recording options.

Menu Option Description

MIDI Clock In

Sets the Tracker Mini clock between the internal

generated clock (default) or an external clock

received through the USB or MIDI In jack.

MIDI Clock Out

Sends the Tracker Mini clock output to other

devices. Off, USB, MIDI Out jack or USB+MIDI

jack options.

MIDI Transport In

Sets the source of transport control commands,

Internal (default), or control from an external

device received through the USB or MIDI In jack.

MIDI Transport Out

Sends Tracker Mini transport control commands to

other devices. Set to Off, USB, MIDI Out jack or

USB+MIDI jack options.

MIDI Notes In

Sets the input of how notes are received from an

external device. Set to Off, USB, MIDI In jack or

USB+MIDI jack options.

MIDI Notes Input Channel

Sets the MIDI channel for external note inputs.

Select All channels or Ch 1-16.

MIDI MIDI Out

Sets the output routing of MIDI to communicate to

other devices. Set to Off, USB, MIDI Out jack or

USB+MIDI jack options.

MIDI CC In

Denes how the CC (control change) input from

external devices is handled. Set to Off, USB, MIDI

In jack, USB+MIDI In jack.

MIDI CC In channel

Sets the MIDI channel that is used to receive CC

(control change) messages. Select All channels or

Ch 1-16.

MIDI Middle C

Sets Tracker Mini’s middle C as C-3, C-4, C-5, C-6.

This will calibrate the note ranges to external gear

if this does not naturally match.

MIDI Clock Sync Delay

Latency compensation for incoming clock

synchronisation. Options range from -50 to +50

with each unit = 1/250 of pattern step. Leave at the

default 0.0 unless there are synchronisation errors.

Menu Option Description

Project Recording Options

This option sets the recording options for the

project. To record velocity from an external

controller one of the velocity inclusive options

should be selected.

249

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

248

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

MIDI

11.3 Typical MIDI Congurations

There are many congurations that can be set up with MIDI gear. Some are

complex and involve multiple devices while a simple set up can have two

devices communicating. Some typical examples are shown.

Tracker Mini: Cong > MIDI

Tracker Mini: Steps Set for MIDI

Output

USB MIDI

Instrument; M01 = MIDI Channel 1

FX1; a 50 = MIDI CC A, Value of 50

Clock In

Clock out

Transport in

Transport out

Notes In

Notes in channel

MIDI out

CC in

CC in channel

Middle C

Clock sync delay

Internal

MIDI Out jack

Internal

MIDI Out jack

Off

ALL

MIDI Out jack

Off

ALL

C-5

0.0

Example Conguration 1: Tracker Mini as the primary lead.

MIDI OUT

Note Instr

FX1

FX2

Play Rec

Master Volume

Insert Menu

Delete Copy

Shift

Line In MIDI InLine Out MIDI Out

21 3 4

Master Volume

C5 M01 a 50 - - - -

The settings in the cong menu will depend on:-

• How the devices are connected together? Are the devices

connected by USB? Which will transmit and receive MIDI with the

MIDI 5 Pin connection using the MIDI Jack adapter?

• Which device will be a primary leader (main controller e.g. main

clock) or a secondary follower (will respond to other gear as the lead

control e.g. synchronised to another clock)?

• Will MIDI note data (melodies, chords, etc) be communicated?

• Will MIDI CC continuous control change data be communicated (to

change parameters like delay level or trigger performance effects)?

▌ ACCESSING THE MIDI CONFIG OPTIONS

1. Press [Shift] + [4] or [Menu] to select ‘Cong’ conguration menu.

2. In the rst column, select ‘MIDI’. Use the 1

and 2

Screen button to

navigate. Alternatively use (Left) or (Right) to navigate across menus

and Press [+] / [-] or (Up), (Down) to select a function.

3. The ‘MIDI’ Options will be available in the central menu window. Use the

and 5

Screen button to navigate. Alternatively use (Left) or (Right)

to navigate across menus and Press [+] / [-] or (Up), (Down) to select a

function.

4. Press [Change], 6

Screen button to edit the option that is highlighted.

5. Use the 4

and 5

Screen button to navigate to the desired parameter

setting. Alternatively use (Left) or (Right) to navigate across menus and

Press [+] / [-] or (Up), (Down) to choose a setting.

6. Press [Apply], 6

Screen button to conrm the option that is highlighted.

CC D

Velocity

127

CC A

CC B

CC C

Offset

CC F

117

CC E

Prg Chg

Chan AT

64 Sust

65 Port

CC A can be set in the instrument

parameter page. CC A set to 40 for

control change in this example,

transmitted with the value in the step

HY B R I D S Y N T H E S I Z E R

OSCILLATO RS PLAY MOD E

FILTER

ENVELOPE

MIXER

VOLUME

LFO

Transport control e.g. Play, Stop and

Clock is dictated by Tracker Mini

and its current Tempo.

Polyend Medusa will follow the lead

of Tracker Mini as will other devices.

Devices should be congured to receive clock and transport and the MIDI Channel which Tracker

Mini communicates, for example, Channel 1. CC 40 In Medusa represents the Filter Cutoff

frequency in this example each step in Tracker will set the lter cutoff.

A 2

device as an extended part of

the MIDI Network.

Drum Machine

MIDI IN

MIDI THRU MIDI IN

251

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

250

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

The ability to connect to a PC or Mac via a MIDI connection is possible, which can allow software

synths and plug-ins to be controlled by Tracker Mini. Tracker Mini will need a hub or will need to be

Note Instr

FX1

FX2

Play Rec

Master Volume

Insert Menu

Delete Copy

Shift

Line In MIDI InLine Out MIDI Out

21 3 4

Master Volume

An external device, keyboard or drum pads can be connected to control

Tracker Mini by MIDI either by USB or via the 5 Pin MIDI dongle. Notes can

be played or recorded and CC messages controlling assigned parameters.

MIDI

Link EXT TAP

102.00

1 Plugin A 2 MIDI

MIDI From MIDI From

Tracker Mini

Master Tracker Mini

Ch. 2

In In

Auto Auto

Monitor Monitor

Audio To MIDI To

Sends

1.53

Tracker Mini: Cong > MIDI

Tracker Mini: Steps Set for MIDI Output.

Instrument; M02 = MIDI Channel 2

Notes out melody to the PC or Mac.

USB MIDI

Tracker Mini can also record MIDI Incoming ie from a DAW using in live recording

mode, [Rec] + [Play]. Tracker Mini Middle C adjusted from C-5 to C-3 to match

Ableton Live and Channel 5 set for Notes In

Clock In

Clock out

Transport in

Transport out

Notes In

Notes in channel

MIDI out

CC in

CC in channel

Middle C

Clock sync delay

Internal

USB

CH5

USB

Off

ALL

C-3

0.0

Transport control e.g. Play, Stop can be set

by DAW or Tracker Mini. It is advised to

dened which device controls the clock.

MIDI settings in the Live preferences page will need to be

set ‘On’ for MIDI Ports, Input & Output. When controlling to/

from Tracker Mini. External function, in Live should be on to

use external sync settings and tempo is synchronised from

Tracker Mini.

MIDI on Channel 2 from Tracker

Mini’s steps, controls the plugin

synth in the Live track.

MIDI on Channel 5 from Lives

track notes, controls the

instrument in Tracker Mini.

Example Conguration 2: Tracker Mini in / out with Ableton Live.

USB

MIDI OUT

C5 M02 - - - - - - - -

E5 M02 - - - - - - - -

G5 M02 - - - - - - - -

Ch. 5

Off

Tracker Mini: Cong > MIDI

The keyboard will control the current

instrument in Channel 1.

USB MIDI

Notes can be recorded in live

recording mode. The note and note off

messages are captured in the steps.

Control change (CC) assignments

Clock In

Clock out

Transport in

Transport out

Notes In

Notes in channel

MIDI out

CC in

CC in channel

Middle C

Clock sync delay

MIDI In jack

Off

MIDI In jack

Off

MIDI In jack

CH1

Off

MIDI In jack

CH2

C-5

0.0

Transport control e.g. Play, Stop and

Clock is dictated by an external

devices as is current Tempo.

Optional controller used for control

change (CC) messages on channel 2

Keyboard or Pad controller used for MIDI note information on

channel 1. To record variable velocity into Tracker Mini make sure

the [Menu] >Cong > General > ‘Recording Options’ have a Velocity

option enabled. Otherwise velocity is recorded at xed value.

Example Conguration 1: Tracker Mini as the secondary follower.

MIDI OUT MIDI OUT

Function CC #

Performance Mode Tracks CC41 - CC48

Performance Mode Effects CC51 - CC62

Master Mixer Levels CC71 - CC78

Delay & Reverb Mix CC79 & CC80

Dry Mix CC81

Line In Level CC82

A#3 16 - - - - - - - -

OFF -- - - - - - - - -

ARTURIA

YOUR EXPERIENCE - Y OUR SOUND

PITCH MOD

RESET

Transpose

Append Clear Last Restart

Keyboard MIDI CH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

10% 25% 50% 75% 90% Off 53% 55% 57% 59% 61% 64% 67% 70% 73% 75%

Gate Swing

Rest / TieSeq / Arp Mode Time Div Rate

1/4

1/Up

1/8

2/Dwn

1/16

3/Inc

1/32

4/Exc

1/4T

5/Rand

1/8T

6/Order

1/16T

7/Up x2

1/32T

8/Dwn x2

Chord

KEYSTEP

CONTROLLER & SEQUENCER

Seq

Arp

Kbd Play

(C)

HOLD SHIFT

Tap

Note Instr

FX1

FX2

Play Rec

Master Volume

Insert Menu

Delete Copy

Shift

Line In MIDI InLine Out MIDI Out

21 3 4

Master Volume

MIDI IN

253

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

252

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

MIDI

11.4 MIDI Instrument Overview

Tracker Mini has a series of MIDI Instruments that can be assigned to steps

in a pattern. MIDI is dened per step, not per track, so MIDI and Audio

instruments can reside on the same track in the same pattern. A MIDI

instrument essentially denes the MIDI channel on which to transmit data

out and also gives access to the instruments MIDI parameters.

The Instrument parameters will reect the MIDI output options available

when selecting a step with a MIDI instrument congured. The Note is set in

the step and will be sent on the channel dened in the MIDI instrument. The

default velocity can also be set for MIDI out.

The same general process is followed when working with MIDI steps as

with audio steps. More details are covered in a prior section.

▌ CREATING A MIDI NOTE OUTPUT STEP

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern Mode page.

2. Select the target step to edit. Use (Up), (Down) to scroll top to bottom.

Press (Left), (Right) to select a track. Example Row 1 of Track 1. The

step should be highlighted with the green bounding box.

3. Press [Rec] to switch to recording mode. The step bounding box will

turn red and allow editing of the step.

4. Note: Hold [Note] + [+] / [-] to set a note for the step.

Also with the note already selected, use [+] / [-] to change it’s value.

5. Instrument: Hold [Instrument] + [+] / [-] or (Up) (Down) to change to an

instrument from the 51 to 61 list. Each one will represent a MIDI

channel where the step messages will be transmitted. The Instrument

will be indicated with an ‘M’ in the instrument slot for the step.

CC D

Velocity

127

CC A

CC B

CC C

Offset

CC F

117

CC E

MIDI Instrument Parameters 51. MIDI Channel 1

116

117

120 SOff

124

127

118

121 Rst

125

Prg Chg

119

123 NOff

122 Locl

126

Chan AT

64 Sust

65 Port

0 Bank

1 ModWh

4 Foot

8 Balnc

11 Exp

2 Brth

5 Glide

7 ChVol

6 Data

10 Pan

0 Bank

1 ModWh

4 Foot

8 Balnc

11 Exp

2 Brth

5 Glide

7 ChVol

6 Data

10 Pan

0 Bank

1 ModWh

4 Foot

8 Balnc

11 Exp

2 Brth

5 Glide

7 ChVol

6 Data

10 Pan

84 Porta

CC Outputs

Congure the 6 CC Outputs A-F,

used from a step FX1 or FX2

The instrument selection has a dedicated

button when working in the pattern.

Instruments 51-66 constitute the preset MIDI Instruments. Each of

these represents a MIDI channel 1-16. A MIDI instrument is tagged

with an ‘M’ in the step conguration.

The default velocity to send out can be applied as well as MIDI Latency compensation in the Offset parameter

This illustration shows several MIDI instruments set for MIDI Channel 2. The notes values will be sent on the

dened channel to a connected device such as another synth or DAW. MIDI Out would need to be set correctly

in the Cong > MIDI parameters to transmit the note values over MIDI.

The MIDI transmitted will be based on the project tempo. Also remember that tempo FX can be applied to steps

which would also affect the MIDI output timing.

The instrument parameters are accessible directly and are specic

to the currently selected instrument and it’s MIDI Channel.

C5 M02

----

-- --- ---- ----

----

-- --- ---- ----

A 4

P-20

Track 4

52. MIDI Channel 2

Instr

C5 M02 - - - -- - - -

M02

Instrument # Name Step Tag MIDI Channel

51 MIDI Channel 1 M01 1

52 MIDI Channel 2 M02 2

53 MIDI Channel 3 M03 3

54 MIDI Channel 4 M04 4

55 MIDI Channel 5 M05 5

56 MIDI Channel 6 M06 6

57 MIDI Channel 7 M07 7

58 MIDI Channel 8 M08 8

59 MIDI Channel 9 M09 9

60 MIDI Channel 10 M10 10

61 MIDI Channel 11 M11 11

62 MIDI Channel 12 M12 12

63 MIDI Channel 13 M13 13

64 MIDI Channel 14 M14 14

65 MIDI Channel 15 M15 15

66 MIDI Channel 16 M16 16

255

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

254

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

MIDI

11.6 MIDI CC Out

Continuous Control Change messages, also called CC, can be sent from

Tracker Mini on a step by step basis. While note message will trigger the

notes on other gear, CC initiates a parameter change, for example to adjust

Pan or Filter Cutoff on another device. These would need to be matched at

Tracker Mini end to align to the parameter on the external device. Six CC

parameter slots A-F exist in Tracker Mini that can be allocated a CC and

then used in FX1 or FX2 of a step.

CC D

Velocity

127

CC A

CC B

CC C

Offset

CC F

117

CC E

MIDI Instrument Parameters 51. MIDI Channel 1

116

117

120 SOff

124

127

118

121 Rst

125

Prg Chg

119

123 NOff

122 Locl

126

Chan AT

64 Sust

65 Port

0 Bank

1 ModWh

4 Foot

8 Balnc

11 Exp

2 Brth

5 Glide

7 ChVol

6 Data

10 Pan

0 Bank

1 ModWh

4 Foot

8 Balnc

11 Exp

2 Brth

5 Glide

7 ChVol

6 Data

10 Pan

0 Bank

1 ModWh

4 Foot

8 Balnc

11 Exp

2 Brth

5 Glide

7 ChVol

6 Data

10 Pan

84 Porta

11.5 Handling MIDI Velocity

The velocity of notes triggered by steps is set by default in the MIDI

instrument parameter page. This ranges from 0-127. An FX1 or FX2, ‘V’

Step effect can also be applied which will dene the velocity specically for

the step. External gear will receive the note message with the dened

velocity transmitted.

Recording of note data can be performed from external gear into Tracker

Mini in Live Recording mode using [Rec] + [Play]. To be able to record

velocity, the Cong > General > ‘Recording Options’ would need a velocity

option to be set i.e. 3 or 4 from the lost below. The options are:-

1. Only Notes: Records only quantized notes into a pattern.

2. Microtiming: Records notes with microtiming into a pattern.

3. Velocity: Records quantized notes and velocity into a pattern.

4. Microtiming + Velocity: Records notes with microtiming and velocity

into a pattern.

Note D2 recorded for instrument 8 at a recorded

velocity of 47. Note Step FX Velocity range is 0-100.

Recording options set to ‘Velocity’

Note E1 recorded for instrument 8 at a recorded

velocity of 100. Note Step FX Velocity range is 0-100.

Recording options set to ‘Velocity’

D2 08

- - - - V 47

E1 08

- - - - V100

The instrument will assign the MIDI Channel on

which to communicate Note and CC messages.

For example MIDI Channel 2

FX1 or FX2 can be assigned by a CC command a-f

representing the 6 CC slots setup in the instrument

parameters A-F. Also a value to send is applied.

CC Numbers are assigned to a CC slot A-F in the

instrument parameter page.

Sends Note C5 across MIDI Channel 2 at the

default velocity in the MIDI Instrument parameters

Sends Note C5 across MIDI Channel 2 at the

velocity value of 23.

The FX value in Tracker Mini is based on a range of 0-100, however most devices and DAWs use a

velocity range of 0-127. Bear this in mind when applying and recording FX velocity

a - MIDI CC A

b - MIDI CC B

c - MIDI CC C

d - MIDI CC D

e - MIDI CC E

f - MIDI CC F

This illustration shows that Control Change 74 is assigned to CC A, which in turn is assigned as FX2

with a value of 23. If, for example, Elektron Digitakt is the receiving device, this step will send a

message to control the lter cutoff.

MIDI Note Data MIDI Comms Channel MIDI CC Number MIDI CC Value

Step NOTE Step Instrument Instrument Parameters Step FX Value

C5 M02 - - a 23- -

C5 M02

- - - - - - - -

C5 M02

- - - -

V 23

Instr

FX1

FX2

257

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

256

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

MIDI

▌ CREATING A MIDI CC OUTPUT STEP

1. Ensure the Cong > MIDI settings are set to send MIDI. Use [Shift] + [4]

or [Menu] to select the conguration options.

2. Press [1] or select from [Menu] the Pattern Mode page.

3. Select the target step to edit. Use (Up), (Down) to scroll top to bottom.

Press (Left), (Right) to select a track. Example Row 1 of Track 1. The

step should be highlighted with the green bounding box.

4. Press [Rec] to switch to recording mode. The step bounding box will

turn red and allow editing of the step.

5. Hold [Instrument] + Press [+] / [-] or (Up) (Down) to select a MIDI

instrument from listed options 51 to 66. Each will represent a MIDI

channel to transmit the step messages. The Instrument will be indicated

with an ‘M’ in the instrument slot for the step. Example M01.

6. Hold [FX1] or [FX2] + Press [+] / [-] or (Up) (Down) to set a CC for the

step. This will be one of the 6 options a-f. The selected option will show

as a lower case letter in the step FX slot. Example: ‘a’ is MIDI CC A.

7. With the FX selected, Press [+] / [-] to set it’s CC value. A series of steps

could for example be lled with a ramp up of values. This can be

changed later. Example: Set to 50.

8. Press [2] to select the ‘Instrument Parameter’ page. MIDI message

options are presented given the instrument is a MIDI Channel.

9. Press a screen button to select a CC Slot that matches the FX

selection. Example, Press [CC A], 3

Screen button to match the MIDI

CC A selected in step 6 above.

10. Press [+] / [-] or (Up) (Down) to scroll the CC parameter lists. Highlight

with the bounding box the CC number to assign. This would typically be

based on the MIDI CC conguration on a receiving device. Example:

CC 74 is Filter Cutoff on Elektron’s Digitakt.

11. In this example, CC Number 74 (set in step 10 above) will transmit a CC

value of 50 (set in step 7 above) over MIDI Channel 1 (set in step 5

above) when the selected step is triggered.

The MIDI CC outputs in the Instrument Parameters list follows MIDI standards. Many of the CC’s

are undened. Check the MIDI conguration for any connected devices to know what CC will affect

which parameter. This list is available for each of the 6 CC Assignments A - F. Also the Program

Change 128, Channel Aftertouch 129 and Polyphonic Aftertouch 130 can also be congured here.

CC # Function CC # Function CC # Function CC # Function

Bank (MSB)

Bank (LSB)

Sustain

Data Increment +

Mod Wheel (MSB)

Mod Wheel (LSB)

Portamento

Data decrement -

Breath Control (MSB)

Breath Control (LSB)

Sostenuto

NRPN LSB

3 35 67

Soft Pedal

NRPN MSB

Foot Pedal (MSB)

Foot Pedal (LSB)

Legato

100

RPN LSB

Glide (MSB)

Portamento Rate

Glide (LSB)

Portamento Rate

Hold 2

101

RPN MSB

Data Entry (MSB)

Data Entry (LSB)

70 102

Channel Volume (MSB)

Channel Volume (LSB)

71 103

L/R Balance (MSB)

L/R Balance (LSB)

72 104

9 41 73 105

Pan (MSB)

Pan (LSB)

74 106

Expression Pedal (MSB)

Expression Pedal (LSB)

75 107

12 44 76 108

13 45 77 109

14 46 78 110

15 47 79 111

16 48 80 112

17 49 81 113

18 50 82 114

19 51 83 115

20 52 84

Portamento Amount

116

21 53 85 117

22 54 86 118

23 55 87 119

24 56 88

High Denition Velocity

120

All sound off

25 57 89 121

Reset all

26 58 90 122

Local On / Off

27 59 91 123

All notes off

28 60 92 124

29 61 93 125

30 62 94 126

31 63 95 127

259

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

258

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

MIDI

11.7 MIDI CC In

Control change messages can be received by Tracker Mini. The CC In

would need to be set in the [Menu] > Cong > MIDI menu along with the CC

In channel for the MIDI channel. The MIDI CC Mapping within Tracker Mini

has a set of pre-dened destinations for CC messages.

CC # Function CC # Function

Performance Effect Track 1 Pattern Select

Master - Track Mixer Track 1 Volume Level

Performance Effect Track 2 Pattern Select

Master - Track Mixer Track 2 Volume Level

Performance Effect Track 3 Pattern Select

Master - Track Mixer Track 3 Volume Level

Performance Effect Track 4 Pattern Select

Master - Track Mixer Track 4 Volume Level

Performance Effect Track 5 Pattern Select

Master - Track Mixer Track 5 Volume Level

Performance Effect Track 6 Pattern Select

Master - Track Mixer Track 6 Volume Level

Performance Effect Track 7 Pattern Select

Master - Track Mixer Track 7 Volume Level

Performance Effect Track 8 Pattern Select

Master - Track Mixer Track 8 Volume Level

Performance Effect Slot 1 Value - Top Row

Master - Global Mixer Delay Mix

Performance Effect Slot 2 Value - Top Row

Master - Global Mixer Reverb Mix

Performance Effect Slot 3 Value - Top Row

Master - Global Mixer Dry Mix

Performance Effect Slot 4 Value - Top Row

Master - Global Mixer Line Input

Performance Effect Slot 5 Value - Top Row

Performance Effect Slot 6 Value - Top Row

Performance Effect Slot 7 Value - Top Row

Performance Effect Slot 8 Value - Top Row

Performance Effect Slot 9 - Top Row

Performance Effect Slot 10 Value - Top Row

Performance Effect Slot 11 Value - Top Row

Performance Effect Slot 12 Value - Top Row

11.8 Program Change

Tracker Mini has the ability to send program change messages. These are

MIDI standard messages which trigger a change to the current ‘program’ of

an external device by switching presets or congurations. This of course

will be dependant on the program / bank / preset structure and operation of

the receiving device. Often synths use banks and presets so the behaviour

of the device from a program change may vary.

Program change is congured as a CC parameter using number 129.

NOTESNOTES

----

M01

----

V 65

----

M01

a 01

V 50

a 02

a 03

m 50

----

------

----

C 50

M01

----

Track 3

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Example

Track 4

MIDI Channel 1, with a Program Change, 129

assigned to CC A. The value will trigger the

program selection, in this example 01.

A Program Change is activated slightly ahead of

the note. However it may be better to trigger the

program change on a step prior to the note step

or at the end of a previous pattern sequence and

use micro move ‘m’ to adjust the timing.

The receiving device may have a conguration

that is not an exact match. For example a

program may start at 1 rather than 0. The offset

may need to be taken into account in the Tracker

Mini step program change message.

MIDI Channel 1, with a Program Change, 129

assigned to CC A. The value will trigger the

program selection, in this example 02.

261

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

260

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

MIDI

While integration with Polyend Play is a build in feature for mapping Play’s

controls, other MIDI controllers can also be used with an Instrument

Synthesiser accessed through the Instrument Parameter page.

Instrument Synthesizer Mode

Notes on using MIDI Synthesiser Mode:-

• The external device must be congured to match the MIDI

Synthesizer CC controls and general Tracker Mini MIDI

conguration, i.e. Channel etc.

• Tracker Mini’s sequencer must be stopped to use as a MIDI

synthesizer.

• The Instrument Synthesizer mode page does not have to be

displayed to operate. The last selected instrument will be the one

used for the synthesizer control from an external controller.

InstrumentsCC List

Note: To use Tracker as a synthesizer, the sequence must be stopped.

Instrument Synthesizer 2. Guitar0m:00s P1.008

1. Strange Sample Number 1Tune = 5

2. GuitarFineTune = 3

4. Snare OnePanning = 10

5. Closed Hat 1Filter type = 9

6. Selection0001Cutoff = 1

7.Resonance = 11

8.Overdrive = 12

9.Bit Depth = 13

10.Reverb Send = 14

11.Delay Send = 15

12.Volume Automation Type = 20

13.Volume Attack - Shape LFO = 21

3. Transient KickVolume = 7

Volume

10.00 dB

Panning

-25

Tune

Cutoff

100

Finetune

Resonance

Filter Type

Low-pass

Instrument Parameters 1/2 0m:00s P1.008

Disabled

Low-pass

High-pass

Band-pass

1.Analog 3 18p

Overdrive

Bit depth

Reverb send

-inf dB

Delay send

-inf dB

Instrument

Synthesizer

Back

Instrument Effects

0m:00s P1.008

11.9 MIDI Synthesizer

The MIDI synthesizer mode is a feature that allows integration when

controlling Tracker Mini from an external MIDI device and by controlling up

to 8 voices across MIDI. Tracker Mini will operate as a secondary follower

to an external controller which will be able to play and control Tracker Mini’s

instruments. This also brings a tight integration between Tracker, Tracker

Mini and Polyend Play, where the MIDI CC is pre-mapped.

Select the Instrument Parameter page using [2] or from the [Menu]. The

Instrument Synthesizer, accessed with [More] then [Instrument Synthesizer].

The right window will allow selection of

the instrument to control. The instrument

selected will be shown in the top bar.

The left window will display, as a

reference, the Tracker Mini parameter

MIDI CC numbers.

Instrument Parameters 1/2

Instrument Effects

Other MIDI Devices can be used with Tracker Mini’s

MIDI Synthesizer mode to control the instruments.

The rotary controls in play will be automatically

mapped to have full integrated over MIDI CC with

Tracker Minis selected instruments. Play can

control Tracker Mini with the pads.

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT

Beatstep Pro

Tracker Mini:

[Menu] > Cong > MIDI

Play:

Menu > MIDI > CC Mapping > Jack Channel 1

Choose: Set Values for Polyend Tracker Mini

Clock In

Clock out

Transport in

Transport out

Notes In

Notes in channel

MIDI out

CC in

CC in channel

Middle C

Clock sync delay

MIDI In jack

Off

MIDI In jack

Off

MIDI In jack

CH1

Off

MIDI In jack

CH1

C-5

0.0

Note Instr

FX1

FX2

Play Rec

Master Volume

Insert Menu

Delete Copy

Shift

Line In MIDI InLine Out MIDI Out

21 3 4

Master Volume

21 3 4

263

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

262

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTESNOTES

MIDI

Synthesizer Mode - MIDI CC Congurations

CC # Function CC # Function

5 Tune 83 Cutoff Automation Type

3 Finetune 84 Cutoff - Attack - Shape LFO

7 Volume 85 Cutoff - Decay - Speed LFO

9 Filter Type 86 Cutoff Sustain

1 Cutoff 87 Cutoff Release

11 Resonance 88 Cutoff Amount

12 Overdrive 102 Wavetable Position Automation Type

13 Bit Depth 103 Wavetable Position - Attack - Shape LFO

14 Reverb Send 104 Wavetable Position - Decay - Speed LFO

15 Delay Send 105 Wavetable Position Sustain

20 Volume Automation Type 106 Wavetable Position Release

21 Volume - Attack - Shape LFO 107 Wavetable Position Amount

22 Volume - Decay - Speed LFO 108 Granular Position Automation Type

23 Volume Sustain 109 Granular Position - Attack - Shape LFO

24 Volume Release 110 Granular Position - Decay - Speed LFO

25 Volume Amount 111 Granular Position Sustain

26 Panning Automation Type 112 Granular Position Release

27 Panning - Attack - Shape LFO 113 Granular Position Amount

28 Panning - Decay - Speed LFO 114 Finetune Automation Type

29 Panning Sustain 115 Finetune - Attack - Shape LFO

30 Panning Release 116 Finetune - Decay - Speed LFO

31 Panning Amount 117 Finetune Sustain

118 Finetune Release

▌ SETTING UP A MIDI SYNTHESIZER

1. Ensure the external device is congured to set MIDI CC as per the

Tracker Mini CC assignments in the MIDI Synthesizer page. Also that

the MIDI conguration is matched, for example same MIDI channel.

2. Connect the external controller to Tracker Mini, for example using the

MIDI In connection and a MIDI cable between devices. Tracker Mini

uses a MIDI dongle to convert between MIDI 5 Pin DIN and Mini Jack.

3. To get the reference of CC congurations set up as default for Tracker

Mini, Press [2] for the Instrument Parameter page 1 or use the [Menu].

4. Press [More] which is the 8

Screen button to display the Instrument

effects page.

5. Press [Instrument Synthesizer] Screen Button.

6. The CC’s are displayed in the left window as a reference. There is no

selection in this page window as this is shown only as a guide.

7. To select an instrument as the destination target from the MIDI

controller and as the synthesizer instrument, scroll the right window to

select the desired instrument. This is also displayed in the top row.

8. The lists can be scrolled with the screen buttons. If the window is

selected, highlighted red, the (Up) and (Down) or the [+] / [-] buttons.

9. The instrument parameters will adjust when controlled by the external

MIDI controller. The changes are animated real time on the instrument

parameter displays.

Performance mode is a special Tracker Mini

feature which creates an environment aimed at

live and real-time performances. Ideal when

playing a live gig or improvising and showing

off skills of live remixing, performing and on-

the-y creativity. These variations and punch-

in effects bring fun and challenge in a live

performance environment and expand the

creativity in using Tracker Mini. Perform mode

can be accessed from the [Menu] options. The

perform page has 12 effect slots. Think of the

performance effects as presets where a

dened offset from the default parameter value

can be applied either momentarily or as a xed

change. Up to 21 effects are available for

loading into the 12 available slots. The effect

slot is selected with (Right) (Left) buttons to

select from the 12 effects, giving 4 value

options per effect. The four effect values are

then triggered by using the four [+] / [-] buttons.

These can be applied when playing patterns or

a complete song. Muting can also be managed

for tracks in perform mode. Track patterns can

be remixed and combined together with the

performance effects and with instrument

adjustments. This can create a comprehensive

basis for live performance. A dedicated ‘top row’

of values can also be controlled externally using

MIDI. This MIDI option can also be used to

control the effect values and the track pattern

selection. The performance template by default

is saved globally. However this can be set in the

‘Cong’ menu to be saved on a per project basis.

Perform brings a different dimension to Tracker

Mini, taking the handheld ‘programming’ of

songs or patterns into a more live performance

and improvisation environment.

Performance Mode

265

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

264

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

267

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

266

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Performance Mode

12.1 Performance Mode Overview

Performance mode allows real time improvisation control over tracks,

patterns and songs adding variation and interest when playing live. This is

normally handled in the [Menu] ‘Perform’ page although MIDI Input can also

be set to control the performance parameters.

Rec

Track 1

Patt: 1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

>>>

/16

---

-1

Track 2

Patt: 1

Track 3

Patt: 1

Track 4

Patt: 1

Track 6

Patt: 1

Track 5

Patt: 1

Track 7

Patt: 1

Track 8

Patt: 1

Performance FX

Volume

High-pass cutoff

Sample end

Tune

Delay send

Sample Playback

Panning

Band-pass cutoff

Low-pass cutoff

Sample position

Reverb send

Volume LFO

0m:00s P1.028

Punch In Effects

12 Congurable

performance effect slots

MIDI CC

Indicates the top row, MIDI

CC controllable values.

Track Selection

Selects which tracks will be

affected by the performance

effects applied, indicated red.

Punch In Parameters

4 Effect parameter values.

Triggered by [+], [+], [-], [-]

Perform Slot Trigger

Each [+] / [-] buttons trigger the respective effect value row.

The effect values are congurable with row 1, by default set to off (- - -).

Performance Mode

Press [Menu] to access and navigate the options. Select the ‘Perform’ option and display the performance mode

screen. Editing parameters and conguring the effects is handled in [Rec] record mode]. It is possible to cycle

between pattern and song pages while performance mode is active.

REC Mode

Press [Rec] to edit the perform conguration. The selections will be

indicated red as will the effect selection bounding box. Effects can

be congured and the values edited when in Rec mode of Perform.

Track 1

Patt: 1

---

-100

+100

-50

---

-1

---

-5

-7

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

>>>

/16

---

-1

Track 2

Patt: 1

Track 3

Patt: 1

Track 4

Patt: 1

Track 6

Patt: 1

Track 5

Patt: 1

Track 7

Patt: 1

Track 8

Patt: 1

Performance FX

Volume

High-pass cutoff

Sample end

Tune

Delay send

Sample Playback

Panning

Band-pass cutoff

Low-pass cutoff

Sample position

Reverb send

Volume LFO

0m:00s P1.028

Selected effects are indicated green or red (if editing) on the Tracker Mini screen

Playback Status

Shows pattern loop playback

or full song playback

Perform Status

Shows Performance Mode

is active.

12.2 Perform - Quick Start

Assuming the effects are set up, values in place then real-time

improvisations can be performed. Think of performance effects as applying

parameter value variations as an offset from the current setting.

▌ WORKING LIVE WITH THE PERFORM

1. Press [Menu] and open the ‘Perform’ Page for Performance Mode.

2. Press [Track 1] - [Track 8], screen buttons to select the tracks for

applying effects On (red) or Off. Only the selected, red lit tracks will be

affected by the triggered performance effects.

3. Press [Play] to play a pattern or [Shift] + [Play] to play a song, also

toggles between song and pattern play. The display header will show

the pattern or song playback symbol and the perform mode symbol.

4. To punch in an effect:-

• Select an effect slot to punch in, Press (Left] (Right) to navigate to

the target effect column.

• Press one of the four [+] [+] [-] [-] buttons to apply the effect value

change. The buttons represent top to bottom, the effect row values.

The top [+] represents top row 1 and the lower [-] represents bottom

row 4.

• Multiple effect values can be applied at the same time by selecting

the column slot and and value for triggering using [+] / [-]

5. The effect is retained once pressed. To clear the effect, Press the upper

[+] button for the effect, row 1. Top row 1 is reserved for restoring the

default, i.e. effect off. The top row value cannot be changed.

6. To temporarily play and adjust a value on the y ensure [Rec] mode is

off. Hold [+] / [-] for any of the 4 values to change then (Up) or (Down).

The value is reset to its original state when the buttons are released.

7. The effect will apply an offset to the current value of the parameter

affected. The value to apply will be as stated in the parameter row. For

example, set pitch offsets for lead or bass tracks.

8. Hold [Shift] + Press [Track x], Screen buttons to Mute / Unmute.

0m:00s P1.028

Pattern Play

Song Play

NOTESNOTES

- - -

-5

-7

Row 1 Value

Row 2 Value

Row 3 Value

Row 4 Value

269

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

268

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Performance Mode

12.3 Selecting Tracks

Effects triggered in performance mode will only affect selected tracks.

These are selected using the screen buttons and will be indicated in red.

Tracks can also be muted from within the perform page.

▌ SELECTING TRACKS TO APPLY PERFORMANCE EFFECTS

1. Press [Menu] and open the ‘Perform’ Page for Performance Mode.

2. Press [Track 1] to [Track 8], these are buttons that are represented by

the 8 screen buttons. This will toggle selection on or off.

3. A selected track will be lit red in the screen button label. Any

performance effect triggered will apply to only the selected tracks.

Tracks showing unlit will be audible but the effect will not be applied.

▌ MUTING TRACKS IN THE PERFORM PAGE

1. Press [Menu] and open the ‘Perform’ Page for Performance Mode.

2. Press [Shift] + [Track 1] to [Track 8], represented by the 8 screen

buttons. This will toggle mute on or off.

3. A muted track will be labelled to reect the state when pressing [Shift].

In the normal display a muted track screen button text label is shown in

black, while text for an unmuted, audible track is displayed in white.

-1

/16

-1

Track 4

Patt: 1

Track 6

Patt: 1

Track 5

Patt: 1

Track 7

Patt: 1

Track 8

Patt: 1

NOTESNOTES

Track 7

Red = Effect will be applied

White Text = Unmuted

Track 5

Red = Effect will be applied

Black Text = Muted

Track 8

Unlit = Effect not applied

White Text = Unmuted

Track 6

Unlit = Effect not applied

Black Text = Muted

12.4 Perform Effect Values

Each of the congured effects has four slots which hold the value for the

effect. These are triggered by the four [+] / [-] buttons. The top row is

reserved as a default ‘off’ and the other three values are set relative to the

current effect parameter value. In addition a ‘top row’ of values are available

to be controlled by MIDI CC inputs from external gear if desired.

---

-100

+100

-50

Volume

Value 2 - Pad Row 2

Triggers the chosen effect

value for the selected tracks

---

-5

-40

Value

Value is referenced as an offset applied to the current setting for the effect. The rst row,

value offset is off by default to allow a quick revert to the default state.

For example, with volume set at -10dB, the values are offset by each value, when triggered.

To temporarily edit and play an effect

With [Rec] Mode OFF, Hold [+] / [-] for the desired row and press (UP) or (Down). The value

will change and effect applied temporarily. The value is reset to its original value when the

buttons are released.

Current Volume = -10dB

-15dB

-5dB

-50dB

Value 1 - Pad Row 1

Sets the chosen effect to ‘off’.

MIDI CC Option

Controlled by external gear.

Triggered Effect Value. Actual Value.

Value 3 - Pad Row 3

Triggers the chosen effect

value for the selected tracks

Value 4 - Pad Row 4

Triggers the chosen effect

value for the selected tracks

[+] / [-] are used to trigger the effect value

271

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

270

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Performance Mode

▌ SETTING A TRACK PATTERN

1. Playback stopped.

2. Press [Menu] and open the ‘Perform’ Page for Performance Mode.

3. Hold [Track 1] to [Track 8] Screen button + Press (Up) or (Down). This

selects the pattern assigned to the chosen track. These can also be

changed during playback as a real-time performance and remix

technique.

▌ CHANGING PERFORM TEMPLATE SAVE BEHAVIOUR

1. Hold [Shift] + [4] or use [Menu] to select the ‘Cong’ Menu.

2. Ensure the left window is highlighted red i.e. in focus. Navigate windows

by pressing (Left) or (Right). Menu windows will automatically be

selected when pressing the relevant screen keys below the window to

navigate (Up) or (Down).

3. Press (Up) (Down) highlight with the bounding box over the ‘Project

Settings’ option. Alternatively press the relevant screen keys below the

left window to navigate (Up) or (Down).

4. Press (Up) (Down) to highlight with the bounding box over the

‘Performance presets’ option in the central window. Alternatively press

the relevant screen keys below the central window to navigate (Up) or

(Down).

5. To change the selected parameter / setting, Press [Change]. The

parameter pop-up window listing the available options will appear.

6. Press (Up) / (Down) or (Up) / (Down) Screen buttons to highlight the

desired option. The ‘Global’ setting will save the perform template for all

projects while ‘Per Project’ will save on an individual project basis.

Global is default.

7. Press [Apply] - 6

Screen button to conrm selection or [Cancel] - 3

Screen button to exit without changing.

NOTESNOTES

12.5 Conguring Effects

Effects can be setup in record mode with up to 12 effects being congured

from a library of 21 performance effects. By default the performance preset

is saved on a global basis, but can be changed to be saved ‘per-project’ in

the ‘Cong’ settings.

▌ CREATING AN EFFECT TEMPLATE

1. Press [Menu] and open the ‘Perform’ Page for Performance Mode.

2. Press [Rec] to select record mode. Values and bounding box are red.

3. Navigate between effect slots, Press (Left) or (Right).

4. To cycle the effect selected for the chosen column slot, Press (Up) or

(Down) while in Rec mode. A total of 21 effect options available.

5. To swap effects, Hold [Shift] + (Right) or (Left). This will swap the

currently selected effect along with the values with the slot chosen. This

can be used as a creative option.

6. Hold [+] / [-] for one of the 4 slot rows to edit then Press (Up) or (Down)

incrementally change the value of the selected effect row. Press [+] / [-]

+ Hold (Up) (Down) to continuously increase or decrease. Top row 1 is

reserved to reset the default value and cannot be permanently changed

for many effects.

7. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for other effect slots. 12 slots are available.

8. Press [Rec] to turn record mode off.

Swap Effects

Hold [Shift] + (Right) / (Left)

Select Slot

Press (Right) / (Left)

Pad Row 1

MIDI CC Row

Pad Row 2

Pad Row 3

Pad Row 4

Change Effects

Press (Up) / (Down)

Track 1

Patt: 1

---

-100

+100

-50

---

-1

---

-5

-7

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

>>>

/16

---

-1

Track 2

Patt: 1

Track 3

Patt: 1

Track 4

Patt: 1

Track 6

Patt: 1

Track 5

Patt: 1

Track 7

Patt: 1

Track 8

Patt: 1

Performance FX

Volume

High-pass cutoff

Sample end

Tune

Delay send

Sample Playback

Panning

Band-pass cutoff

Low-pass cutoff

Sample position

Reverb send

Volume LFO

0m:00s P1.028

Rec

273

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

272

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Performance Mode

NOTESNOTES

12.6 Perform Effects List

Tracker Mini has 21 performance effects that can be selected and loaded

into each of the 12 effect slots. The same effect can be applied to multiple

slots. While these are called effects, they in fact control parameters that

apply variations to the parameter values.

12.7 Remixing

Tracker Mini can remix tracks on the y. There are two techniques worth

noting when applying track mixing. Firstly the ‘Pattern Play Mode’ effect has

20 custom algorithms C1-C20 that allow pattern mixing based on

predened shufing of existing patterns. This is called ‘Custom Play Mode’.

Secondly tracks can manually be remixed live when playing a song. Both

techniques operate in performance mode.

Custom Play Mode

▌ USING A CUSTOM PATTERN PLAY EFFECT

1. Press [Menu] and open the ‘Perform’ Page for Performance Mode.

2. Press [Rec] to select record mode. Current value rows and bounding

box are displayed red.

3. Navigate between effect slots, Press (Left) or (Right).

4. To load the effect for the selected slot, Press (Up) or (Down). Select the

‘Pattern Play Mode’ effect.

5. Hold [+] / [-] for the row to edit then Press (Up) or (Down) to change the

value of the specic effect row. Fwd = Forward, Rev = Reverse and Rnd

= Random options as well as ‘C’ options. Set the following example as a

starting point. Any C1-C20 value can be selected:-

• Pad row 2 is the 2

row of effect values Set to C18.

• Pad row 3, is 3

row of effect parameters. Set to C19.

• Pad row 4, is the 4

row of effect parameters. Set to C20.

6. It is possible to set up, other ‘Pattern Play Mode’ effects into other slots

to cover more of the other C1-C17 custom presets.

7. Press [Rec] to turn record mode off.

8. Trigger the rows is now possible for the selected tracks using [+] / [-] to

activate the ‘C’ Algorithms set in perform slot. Also it is possible to make

dynamic and temporary changes by holding [+] / [-] for selecting the

Row 1 and Pressing (Up) (Down) when NOT in Rec mode. This will

clear when releasing the [+] / [-] button.

Effect # Name Range / Comments

1 Volume

-100 to +100.

Volume level adjustment

2 Panning

-100 to +100

Stereo Position

3 Tune

-48 to +48

Semitones. Also applies to MIDI.

4 Low-Pass Cutoff

-100 to +100.

Filter frequency adjustment

5 High-Pass Cutoff

-100 to +100.

Filter frequency adjustment

6 Band-Pass Cutoff

-100 to +100.

Filter frequency adjustment

7 Reverb Send

-100 to +100.

FX Send level

8 Delay Send

-100 to +100.

FX Send level

9 Sample Position

-100 to +100.

Audio sample start position

10 Sample End

-100 to +100.

Audio sample end position

11 Sample Playback

<<< >>>

Backward, Forward direction.

12 Volume LFO Speed

-28 to +28.

LFO Speed

13 Panning LFO Speed

-28 to +28.

LFO Speed

14 Finetune LFO Speed

-28 to +28.

LFO Speed

15 Filter LFO Speed

-28 to +28.

LFO Speed

16 Grain/WT LFO Speed

-28 to +28.

LFO Speed

17 Step Repeater

Off, 16, 12, 8, 6, 4, 3, 2, 1, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/6,

1/8, 1/12, 1/16.

18 Pattern Play Mode

Fwd, Back, Rnd, C1-C20

Fixed or Predened algorithm ‘C’ play modes

19 Pattern Length

1-128

Total length (all tracks - selected or not)

20 Bit Depth

-12 to +12

Bit depth adjustment

21 Overdrive

-100 to +100

Overdrive adjustment

275

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

274

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Performance Mode

NOTESNOTES

Manual Play Mode

▌ MANUALLY REMIXING PATTERNS ON THE FLY

1. Press [Menu] and open the ‘Perform’ Page for Performance Mode.

2. Ensure [Rec] mode is off.

3. Press [Shift] + [Play] to play the Song. The patterns can be remixed

across tracks while a song is playing so ensure that multiple patterns

are available in the song. The perform icon indicates remix is possible.

4. Remix track playback:-

• Hold [Track x], Screen button + Press (Left) or (Right). This will play

the newly selected pattern when the current one completes. The

pattern will ash red to show this is cued ready for the change.

• Hold [Track x], Screen button + Press (Up) or (Down). This will play

the newly selected pattern immediately upon selection.

• It is possible to hold one or more [Track x], Screen buttons at the

same time to select patterns for multiple tracks simultaneously.

4. The patterns will play, led by the longest ones which loop play while

shorter ones are cut.

5. Exit the performance mode. The changes made in performance mode

are disabled upon exit.

Patt: 3 Patt: 1

Change pending current

pattern completion

Flash Red

Change is implemented

immediately

Change Pattern

[Shift] + (Left) / (Right)

Change Pattern

[Shift] + (Up) / (Down)

Track 1

Patt: 1

---

-100

+100

-50

---

-1

---

-5

-7

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

>>>

/16

---

-1

Track 2

Patt: 1

Track 3

Patt: 1

Track 4

Patt: 1

Track 6

Patt: 1

Track 5

Patt: 1

Track 7

Patt: 1

Track 8

Patt: 1

Performance FX

Volume

High-pass cutoff

Sample end

Tune

Delay send

Sample Playback

Panning

Band-pass cutoff

Low-pass cutoff

Sample position

Reverb send

Volume LFO

0m:00s P1.028

Patt: 3

12.8 Controlling Performances with MIDI

An external MIDI controller can easily be assigned to control performance

effects in perform mode. The MIDI Incoming CC’s are predened for the 12

effect slots and the 8 track selections. The top row of the performance

effects are representative of the MIDI incoming values.

Ensure the MIDI settings for communication and the dened connection type are set correctly in the Cong

settings to ensure incoming MIDI control, clock, channel, transport etc are received correctly especially for

the incoming CC data.

Track 1

Patt: 1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

---

-1

>>>

/16

---

-1

Track 2

Patt: 1

Track 3

Patt: 1

Track 4

Patt: 1

Track 6

Patt: 1

Track 5

Patt: 1

Track 7

Patt: 1

Track 8

Patt: 1

Performance FX

Volume

High-pass cutoff

Sample end

Tune

Delay send

Sample Playback

Panning

Band-pass cutoff

Low-pass cutoff

Sample position

Reverb send

Volume LFO

0m:00s P1.028

MIDI

CC51 - CC62

Effect Value

MIDI

CC41 - CC48

Track Pattern Selection

Example: Beatstep

Congured with rotaries to control the CC51-CC62 which sets the effect value. These can also

have preset CC values triggered from the pads. The CC range on the controller is 0-127 which

will be reected across the range of the effect, which may be different. For example -100 to

+100 Panning range will be controlled by a 0 to 127 CC Value.

Rotaries can also be set to select a track and a pattern using CC41-CC48. The value will

represent the pattern which can also be assigned to a pad so that this triggers a specic pattern.

277

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

276

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Performance Mode

NOTESNOTES

12.9 Advanced Pattern Playback

The simple option is to press [Play] to start and stop pattern playback.

During playback a number of ‘on-the-y’ pattern changes can be performed.

This is more useful when improvising and performing.

▌ PLAYING PATTERNS - REFRESHER

1. Press [1] or use the [Menu] to select the Pattern page.

2. Press [Play] to play the current pattern.

3. Press [Play] to pause / stop a currently playing pattern.

4. Press [Shift] + [1] Then [Play] to play a song.

5. Hold [Shift] + [Track x] Screen button to mute or unmute a track when in

pattern page view..

▌ PLAYING PATTERNS - ADVANCED PLAYBACK

1. Press [1] to select the Pattern page.

2. Press [Play] to play the current pattern.

3. To sequentially change the pattern on the y:

• Hold [Pattern], 1

Screen button + (Left) or (Right) buttons to select

a new pattern. This will initiate a sequential pattern change which

awaits the end of the current pattern before switching to the new

pattern selection. Pattern text for the screen button ashes red

when cued.

• Hold [1] Default assigned pattern + (Left) or (Right) buttons to select

a new pattern. This will initiate a sequential pattern change which

awaits the end of the current pattern before switching to the new

pattern selection. Pattern text for the screen button ashes red

when cued.

4. To immediately change the pattern on the y:

• Press [1] + (Up) or (Down) buttons to select a new pattern. This will

initiate a pattern change immediately.

• Press [Pattern], 1

Screen button + (Up) or (Down) buttons to select

a new pattern. This will initiate a pattern change immediately.

• Press [Pattern], 1

Screen button + [+] or [-], for the new pattern.

This will initiate a pattern change immediately.

While on face value this section may appear

like the boring bit (I guess in many ways that

could be true), but don’t overlook the content.

While things like rmware updates are

considered infrequent or one off activities,

there are also some elements that at least are

useful to be aware of. There are some helpful

tips and advise that may guide if you are in a

sticky situation. Also there are some topics that

might be useful around housekeeping and

good disciplines in working with Tracker Mini.

But there are also some tips that may be

helpful beyond the administrative duties. For

example capturing screen images is an often

overlooked feature and can be an aid to storing

settings that you might want to refer to later or

share with others. The visual style and fonts for

the screen and pad brightness can be adjusted

and options on how these can be changed

based on personal taste are provided. Of

course the general rmware update options

are also covered in this section, although it is

recommended to always follow Polyend’s

guidelines and instructions with each rmware

release as it is possible these may change per

update. The current rmware version can be

checked in the startup screen and in the

rmware cong page. Registration of the device

is required to access downloadable content and

rmware updates. Registration is performed at

at Polyend.com. This section not only covers

system wide features but also is a catch all for

topics not covered elsewhere.

System

279

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

278

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

281

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

280

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

System

NOTESNOTES

13.2 Generic Firmware Update

Firmware updates may be provided by Polyend from time to time, to x

bugs or add new features. The process of updating can be performed in

several ways. When performing updates it is strongly advised to follow the

Polyend instructions supplied with each update. The instructions here are a

generic guide.

▌ FIRMWARE UPDATE

1. Download the latest rmware. Access rmware updates for your device

from your registered account at Polyend.

2. Copy the downloaded .ptf rmware le into the /Firmware folder. This

can be found in the root directory of the SD Card.

3. Insert the SD card into Tracker Mini and power up

4. Hold [Shift] + [4] or use [Menu] to select the ‘Cong’ Menu.

5. Navigate to the ‘Firmware’ menu. In the central window, select the

rmware option to install.

6. Press [Conrm], Screen button.

7. The rmware will install and the on screen prompts provided will guide.

The install process is typically less than 1 minute.

8. Tracker Mini should restart, but press On/Off if a manual start is

required after 100% of the update is completed.

13.1 Device Registration

In order for Polyend to provide device support and to give access to future

rmware updates, your Tracker Mini must be registered on the Polyend

website.

▌ REGISTRATION / SUPPORT CHECKLIST

• Create an account at Polyend.com.

• Register your device, ie Tracker Mini in the relevant account section.

• Access rmware downloads in your account.

• Licence information is available at polyend.com/licenses/

Download rmware

[Menu]

‘Cong’ - ‘Firmware’ - [Conrm]

Sub Folders

SD Card

/Root Directory

/Firmware

PolyendTracker Mini_1.6.0.ptf

PolyendTracker Mini_1.7.0.ptf

PolyendTracker Mini_1.5.0.ptf

5 64

283

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

282

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

System

NOTESNOTES

13.4 Resetting the Conguration.

There may be occasions when the changes in congurations have caused

problems and tracking back is not possible. An example may be that MIDI

settings applied may need to be reset. The whole conguration settings can

be reset to the defaults. This is performed in the cong menu.

▌ RESETTING CONFIG

1. Hold [Shift] + [4] or use [Menu] to select the ‘Cong’ Menu.

2. In the main menu list select the ‘Firmware’ option using the screen

navigation buttons.

3. In the Firmware sub menu select ‘Reset Cong’.

4. Press [Apply], 6

Screen button and follow the prompts. Any previously

changed settings will be restored back to default values.

13.3 Emergency Firmware Update

Firmware updates are available from the polyend portal for your registered

device. A reset button is provided, recessed behind the rear panel for

emergency situations . A reset can be performed if there are issues with the

update method or to clear Tracker Mini issues but should not be used as a

regular process for updates.

▌ TRACKER MIDI & FIRMWARE RESET

1. Download the latest rmware. Access rmware updates for your device

from your registered account at Polyend.

2. Copy the downloaded .ptf rmware le into the /Firmware folder. This

can be found in the root directory of the SD Card. Also ensure any

previous update les remain in the rmware folder.

3. Insert the SD card into Tracker Mini.

4. Use a pin or thin object to press the internal reset button. This is located

on the bottom of the device to the left of the input and output jacks.

5. Tracker Mini will reset and search the rmware folder on the SD Card. A

random rmware will be selected and installed in order to recover

Tracker Mini to a working state. The install process is typically less than

1 minute duration.

Recessed reset button. Use a

pin or thin object to trigger reset

Bottom Edge / Input & Output Jacks

The reset option is useful if any lock ups or freezing occurs on Tracker Mini. It is not necessary in these

situations to download a new OS. It is advised to keep a series ofcial, known good, rmware releases in the

/rmware folder. For example 1.5.0, 1.6.0, 1.4.0. That way steps 4-5 can be performed in case of issues and

a random update will be performed from a known state. A manual update in the ‘cong’ menu to select the

latest version can then follow.

285

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

284

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

System

NOTESNOTES

13.5 User Interface Style.

The ability to change the display and pad style is available in the

conguration setting. This may be useful when working in different

environments and essentially is based on personal taste.

▌ CHANGING USER INTERFACE STYLE

1. Hold [Shift] + [4] or use [Menu] to select the ‘Cong’ Menu.

2. Navigate using the screen buttons to the ‘General’ menu option.

3. In the central sub menu, three user interface elements exist:-

• Display Brightness. Options are High (default), Medium and Low.

• Display Theme. Options are Original (default) or Monochrome.

• Display Font. Font for text. Options are original (default) or new.

4. To change the setting highlight the desired sub menu option using the

screen buttons or arrow keys.

5. Press [Change], 6

Screen button option. The available options as

listed above are presented. Use the screen navigation or arrows to

select the desired option.

6. Press [Apply], 6

Screen button option to conrm the selection.

7. The desired setting will be visible on the screen.

13.6 Assignable Function Buttons

Tracker Mini has 4 assignable buttons that are used to quickly access

operating modes and their pages. Each of physical buttons can have two

pages assigned, accessed directly and also using shift. The assignments

are found in the ‘Cong’ menu options under ‘Fn buttons binding’

Default Button Assignments

▌ EDITING THE FUNCTION KEY ASSIGNMENTS

1. Hold [Shift] + [4] or use [Menu] to select the ‘Cong’ Menu.

2. Navigate using the screen buttons to the ‘Fn buttons binding’ option.

3. In the central sub menu, the 8 assignments are displayed. To change

the highlighted option within the desired sub menu press the (Up) and

(Down) screen buttons or D-Pad Navigation buttons.

4. Press [Change], 6

Screen button option. The available page options

are presented. Use the screen navigation or D-Pad Navigation buttons

to select the desired option.

5. Press [Apply], 6

Screen button option to conrm the selection.

Optionally the [Cancel] option can be used if required.

6. The desired selection will be assigned to the function button selected.

This will be available when using the 4 physical buttons directly or with

the [Shift] button.

Shift

21 3 4

Button Combo Function Button Combo Function

Fn 1 Pattern Shift + Fn 1 Song

Fn 2 Instrument Parameters Shift + Fn 2 Sample Loader

Fn 3 Sample Playback Shift + Fn 3 File

Fn 4 Master Shift + Fn 4 Cong

Unassigned Perform Unassigned Sample Editor

Unassigned Games Unassigned Sample Recorder

Fn 1 Fn 3Fn 2 Fn 4

287

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

286

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

System

NOTESNOTES

13.8 Games

Tracker Mini can run NES ROM games, and a collection are supplied

readily available and stored in the SD Card games folder and accessed

through the ‘File’ options. NES ROM les can be found online but there may

be compatibility and performance issues with some. Some communities

online have tested various games for using with Tracker Mini. Load any

other NES ROM les into the games folder on the SD to access.

▌ ACCESSING THE GAMES

1. Hold [Shift] + [4] or use [Menu] to select the ‘Cong’ Menu.

2. Press [Games], 8

Screen button. This will present the list of available

games that are located in the SD Card /Games folder.

3. Scroll and navigate the list using the screen (Up) (Down) buttons or

(Up) or (Down) buttons.

4. Press [Game Sound], 7

Screen button for game sound on or off.

5. Press [Start], 8

Screen button to start the highlighted game.

6. Controls will vary depending on which game is playing. The typical key

commands for control are:-

• The (Up), (Down), (Right), (Left) D-Pad buttons for navigation.

• The [A] and [B], 1

and 2

Screen buttons for control.

• [Sel Start], 8

Screen Button, Select/Start.

6. To exit a game, Press the top On/Off Button.

Additional, compatible .nes les can be

downloaded from the web and when located in

the /Games folder, will be accessible to Tracker.

Sub Folders

SD Card

/Root Directory

/Games

Alter_Ego

Chase

Lan

LawnMower

Utaco

ZoomingSecretary

Default Games List (.nes)

13.7 Screen Capturing

The ability to capture screen images from the currently displayed page is a

built in feature of Tracker Mini.

▌ SCREEN GRAB OF CURRENT IMAGE

1. Select the page to capture.

2. Press [Shift] + On/Off Button. This is the power on button located on the

top edge of the unit. This action is not accompanied by any visual or

audible acknowledgement of capture being completed.

3. The screen will be captured and saved onto the SD card as a .BMP

image le in the snapshots folder. A slight delay with a control response

may exist while a screen capture is in progress.

Sub Folders

Screen Captured Files

RGB 800 x 480 Windows BMP Format

SD Card

/Root Directory

/Snapshots

Snapshot_001.bmp

Snapshot_002.bmp

Snapshot_003.bmp

Snapshot_004.bmp

Snapshot_005.bmp

Snapshot_006.bmp

289

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

288

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

System

NOTESNOTES

13.9 SD Card Compatibility & Backing Up

It is always good practice to backup or even better have a spare SD Card

loaded and ready for use with Tracker Mini. The following information on

SD compatibility is important:-

• A 16GB SD Micro SD Card is supplied with Tracker Mini. Larger size

SD cards can also be used. Supplied SD Card is: Sandisk Ultra,

Micro SD, 16GB, HC1 A1.

• The format of the card must be FAT32 MBR (Master Boot Record).

Other formats will not be recognised.

• Some folders and sub folders are created by Tracker Mini based on

the process carried out. Sample folders for example will be split when

reaching 100 les.

• Tracker Mini uses the SD card in real time and will not function

without the SD card being installed. A ‘bad’ folder / le structure on

the SD card may also cause Tracker Mini problems.

• Some hidden folders exist for example the ‘workspace’ folder. It is

good practice to create a duplicate copy of the SD card for backup

purposes. Also if Tracker Mini does not boot up and crashes,

restoring the full original folder / les structure or using the backup SD

card is advised.

• Tracker Mini is supplied with an SD Card USB reader for use with

most Mac / PC’s which helps transfer les.

• Polyend typically provide pre-release rmware as open beta. While

this is great to get early insights into new features, by denition beta

releases will have inherent problems. Only use beta versions to help

test for bugs and features and do not use in a live gig or critical

production environment.

Tip: SD cards can be notorious in there levels of performance with various gear. This is mainly due

to the wide variety of speeds and specications available. Gear producers do not and in fact

cannot test every single SD specication or each of the manufacturers products. It is therefore

recommended to stick as close as possible to the same SD Card type that the gear producer

supplies with its gear. At least it is known that this SD card type will then have been tested

thoroughly with the device itself by the device manufacturer as well as the user community.

▌ BACKING UP THE SD CARD FOLDERS & FILES

1. This is recommended as a rst task when rst operating Tracker Mini to

have the original structure saved. Also periodic backups is important to

save the projects and les which will be created over time.

2. Use a compatible SD card reader or the supplied USB SD Adapter to

connect the SD card to a PC or Mac.

3. Use the le manager (depends on the PC/Mac Operating System) to

create a ‘Tracker Mini Backup’ Folder in your documents folder and

create a sub folder for each backup i.e. ‘Original SD Aug23’, ‘Backup1

SD May23’. It is good practice to name backup folders by date.

4. Select all of the folders in the SD Card root directory and copy them to

the PC/Mac clipboard.

5. Paste, the copied folders into the ‘Tracker Mini Backup’ sub-folder for

the specic backup.

6. Return the SD card to Tracker Mini for normal operation.

Sub Folders /Original SD Aug23

/Backup1 SD May23

SD Card

/Root Directory

Copy / Paste

Documents

/Tracker Mini Backup

291

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

290

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

System

NOTESNOTES

13.11 Ofcial Specications

Audio Input:

• Unbalanced Stereo, TS (Tip-Sleeve)

• Line Input:

• Audio Input Impedance: 29 kOhm Impedance.

• Input level: 8.2 dBu peak

• Signal to Noise Ratio: 90 dB.

• Microphone Input:

• Microphone Input Impedance: 2.9 kOhm Impedance

• input level: 8.2 dBu peak.

Audio Output

• Line Output:

• Output level 9 dBu peak (when 10k Ohm Load).

• Signal to Noise Ratio: 97 dB.

• Headphone Output:

• Output level: 17.6 dB (when 16k Ohm Load)

• Signal to Noise Ratio: 98 dB.

13.10 Hexadecimal Option

The classic Tracker’s typically used hexadecimal number format. This can

be a little daunting if unfamiliar and especially in the more modern age and

therefore a decimal number format is used as default. However, maybe for

the more nostalgic users, numbering in hex mode is also an option.

▌ CHANGING BETWEEN DECIMAL & HEXADECIMAL VIEW.

1. Hold [Shift] + [4] or use [Menu] to select the ‘Cong’ Menu.

2. Press (Up) or (Down), 1

& 2

Screen buttons to navigate to the

‘General’ menu. The (Up) (Down) buttons also can be used.

3. In the central window pane, Press (Up) or (Down), 4

& 5

Screen

buttons to navigate to the ‘Numbering mode’ option. The arrow keys can

be used to navigate in the central pane.

4. Press [Change], 6

Screen button. The options to change will appear.

5. Press (Up) or (Down) to select between ‘Decimal, Steps from 0’ to use

standard decimal numbers starting at step 0, ‘Decimal, Steps from 1’

where the decimal system is used and steps start at 1, and the

‘Hexadecimal’ option for a classic tracker view.

6. Press [Apply], 6

Screen button.

Hexadecimal to Decimal Converter

Hex 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Dec 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Index

293

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

292

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

NOTES

295

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

294

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

1-Shot Play Mode 118, 120, 122,

126, 134

Adding Steps 66

ADSR 115

Aggregate Device 212

Amplier 203

Arm 90

Arpeggiator 152

Audio Editing 200

Audio Effects 201

Audio Inputs 285

Audio Output 212

Backing Up 288

Backward Loop 120

Band Pass 168

Bass Boost 240

Bit Depth 172

Bitcrusher 204

Brightness 284

Chance 150

Chords 94

Chorus 204

Compressor 205

Cong 40, 46

Copy 8, 58, 76

Crop 203

D-Pad 8, 10–11

Delay 170, 204, 234

Delete 37

Deleting Steps 67

Disarm 90

Display Theme 284

Duplicate Pattern 56

Edit Steps 67

Effect 109, 232

Envelope 111, 115

EQ 241, 249

Equal Slicing 124

Equalizer 205–206, 241, 249

Euclidean Patterns 84–85

Expand Pattern 56

Export 194, 197

Fade In 211

Fade Out 211

File 285

Fill 79–81, 84, 86, 89

Filter 163

Finetune 165

Firmware Update 281–282

Flanger 205

Font 284

Forward Loop 120

Function Buttons 12, 285

FX Descriptions 138

FX Types 100

FX1 Button 8

FX2 Button 8

Games 287

Global Mixer 182

Granular 131

High Pass 169

Import Instruments 45

Inserting Steps 67

Instrument Automation 111

Instrument Button 8

Instrument Parameter 96, 104–106

Invert 59

Keyboard 36

LFO 111–112, 161–165

LFO Shape 112

LFO Speed 113

Limiter 205, 208, 238

Line Input 184

Live Recording 89, 91

Load 35

Loop 121

Low Pass 167

lower quality sample 45

Manual Recording 73

Manual Slicing 124

Master 180

Index

297

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

296

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Master Pages 180

Metronome 40, 62

Mic Input 186

Micro SD Card 7

Micro-Tune 144

MIDI 249

MIDI CC In 258, 261, 263, 266

MIDI CC Out 255

MIDI Conguration 247

MIDI Denitions 246

MIDI Instruments 252, 255

MIDI Messages 176

MIDI synthesizer 260

MIDI Velocity 254

None 140, 142

Normalizer 203

Note 92–93

Note Button 8

Off 141, 143, 145

Overdrive 166, 204

Page Map 30

Panning 143, 145, 162

Paste 58

Pattern 52–54, 58, 60

Pattern Length 55

Pattern Number 55

Pattern View 62, 64

Perform Effect Values 269

Perform Effects 272, 276

Pingpong Loop 120

Play 8

Play Mode 117

Playing Songs 226

Polyphony 94

Position 159, 164

Power On 9

Preview 73, 75

Previewing Tracks 228

Project 33–34, 38, 40

Project Management 35

Quantize 90

Quick Reference Commands 20–21

QWERTY Keyboard 17, 29

Random 154, 156

REC 8

Recording Audio 188

Recording Mode 72

Recording Options 90

Render 94, 192–196

Reset 282

Reverb 171, 236

Reverse 203

Reverse Sample 158, 174

Roll 151

Sample Editor 200

Sample Editor Effects 202

Sample Formats 187

Sample Playback 117

Sampling 189

Saturation 240

Save 35–36

Saving 35

Screen Buttons 6, 8, 54

Screen Capturing 286

SD Card 288, 291

Sharing Instruments 134

Shift 8

Shrink Pattern 57

Slice 160

Song Mode 219

Space 240

Step FX Reference 139

Step Jump 77–78

Swing 147, 149, 151

Synthesizer Mode 261

Tap tempo 38

Tempo 38–39, 146, 148

Timestretch beat 210

Timestretch note 210

Track Mixer 181

Tracker Legacy Files 283, 285

Tracks 16, 61, 65

Index

299

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

298

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

Transient Slicing 124

Tune 173

USB 212

USB Power 7

User Interface Style 284

Volume 142, 157, 161

Wavetable 126, 134

Workow 19

WT Smoother 129, 209

Index

used in any manner whatsoever without the express written permission of the

publisher except for the use of brief quotations in a book review.

August 2023 - Tracker Mini OS 1.0.0

Manual Produced in the United Kingdom

www.synthdawg.com

Synthdawg

301

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual

300

Polyend Tracker Mini Manual